0% found this document useful (0 votes)
99 views381 pages

F30 Complete Vehicle - Technical Training

The document is a reference manual for the BMW F30, detailing technical training and product information related to the BMW 3-Series. It includes specifications, dimensions, and features of the vehicle, along with safety information and guidelines for usage. The manual emphasizes the importance of the content for trainers and participants in BMW Group technical training seminars.

Uploaded by

Lucian Anca
Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.
Available Formats
Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd
0% found this document useful (0 votes)
99 views381 pages

F30 Complete Vehicle - Technical Training

The document is a reference manual for the BMW F30, detailing technical training and product information related to the BMW 3-Series. It includes specifications, dimensions, and features of the vehicle, along with safety information and guidelines for usage. The manual emphasizes the importance of the content for trainers and participants in BMW Group technical training seminars.

Uploaded by

Lucian Anca
Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.
Available Formats
Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd
You are on page 1/ 381

Ref

erenceManual

F30
COMPLETEVEHI
CLE

Techni
calTr
aini
ng
Theinf
ormat
ioncontai
nedi
nthismanuali
snott
oberesol
d,bar
ter
ed,copi
edort
ransf
err
ed
wi
thoutt
heexpresswri
tt
enconsentofBMW ofNor
thAmeri
ca,LLC("
BMW NA" )
.
Technical�training.
Product�information.
F30�Introduction

BMW�Service
General�information

Symbols�used

The�following�symbol�is�used�in�this�document�to�facilitate�better�comprehension�or�to�draw�attention
to�very�important�information:

Contains�important�safety�information�and�information�that�needs�to�be�observed�strictly�in�order�to
guarantee�the�smooth�operation�of�the�system.

Information�status�and�national-market�versions

BMW�Group�vehicles�meet�the�requirements�of�the�highest�safety�and�quality�standards.�Changes�in
requirements�for�environmental�protection,�customer�benefits�and�design�render�necessary�continu-
ous�development�of�systems�and�components.�Consequently,�there�may�be�discrepancies�between
the�contents�of�this�document�and�the�vehicles�available�in�the�training�course.

This�document�basically�relates�to�the�European�version�of�left-hand�drive�vehicles.�Some�operating
elements�or�components�are�arranged�differently�in�right-hand�drive�vehicles�than�shown�in�the�graph-
ics�in�this�document.�Further�differences�may�arise�as�a�result�of�the�equipment�specification�in�specif-
ic�markets�or�countries.

Additional�sources�of�information

Further�information�on�the�individual�topics�can�be�found�in�the�following:

• Owner's�Handbook
• Integrated�Service�Technical�Application.

Contact:�[email protected]

©2011�BMW�AG,�Munich,�Germany

Reprints�of�this�publication�or�its�parts�require�the�written�approval�of�BMW�AG,�Munich

The�information�contained�in�this�document�forms�an�integral�part�of�the�technical�training�of�the�BMW
Group�and�is�intended�for�the�trainer�and�participants�in�the�seminar.�Refer�to�the�latest�relevant�infor-
mation�systems�of�the�BMW�Group�for�any�changes/additions�to�the�technical�data.

Information�status:�September�2011
VH-23/International�Technical�Training
F30�Introduction
Contents.
1. Body...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1. Models..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2
1.2. History...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2
1.3. New�technical�features................................................................................................................................................................................. 3
1.4. Dimensions...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4
1.5. Weights�and�load�capacities................................................................................................................................................................ 4
1.6. Silhouette�comparison.................................................................................................................................................................................. 5

2. Bodyshell..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6
2.1. Introduction..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6
2.2. Materials............................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7

3. Doors,�Lids�and�Hatches........................................................................................................................................................................................... 10
3.1. Doors..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 10
3.2. Engine�compartment�lid......................................................................................................................................................................... 10
3.3. Tailgate............................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 13

4. Exterior�Equipment...............................................................................................................................................................................................................14
4.1. Front�end.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................14
4.2. Underfloor�concept.........................................................................................................................................................................................14
4.3. Sound�insulation................................................................................................................................................................................................. 15
4.4. Attachments...............................................................................................................................................................................................................16
4.4.1. Exterior�mirrors.................................................................................................................................................................... 16
4.4.2. Side�sills..........................................................................................................................................................................................17
4.4.3. Reversing�camera............................................................................................................................................................ 18
4.5. Glass�slide/tilt�sunroof............................................................................................................................................................................... 19

5. Interior�Equipment................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 22
5.1. Dimensions.................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 22
5.2. Material�and�color�concept................................................................................................................................................................ 22
5.2.1. Line�package�content............................................................................................................................................... 25
5.3. Dashboard..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 26
5.4. Center�console...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 27
5.5. Inside�mirror............................................................................................................................................................................................................... 29
5.6. Storage�options.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 29
5.7. Front�seats................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 30
5.8. Rear�seats......................................................................................................................................................................................................................33
5.9. Climate�control...................................................................................................................................................................................................... 34

6. Luggage�Compartment................................................................................................................................................................................................. 36
F30�Introduction
1.�Body
The�sixth�edition�of�the�BMW�3-Series�will�be�launched�on�the�market�in�February�2012.�Each�gener-
ation�of�these�vehicles�combine�exceptional�sporting�character�and�dynamics,�maximum�comfort�and
innovation.

The�new�BMW�3-Series�Sedan�also�offers�a�well-balanced�harmonious�design�concept.�This�sporty
Sedan�with�its�confident�appearance�represents�the�ultimate�driving�machine,�first-class�agility�and
driving�dynamics�without�making�any�compromises�elsewhere.

BMW�F30

The�characteristic�BMW�proportions,�the�short�overhang�at�the�front,�the�long�wheelbase�or�the�ex-
tended�engine�compartment�lid�transmit�a�dynamic�image,�even�when�the�vehicle�is�stationary.

The�exceptional�efficiency�offered�by�BMW�engines�was�even�improved�once�again�in�the�F30.�The
new�engines�are�characterized�by�high�power�and�low�consumption�at�the�same�time.

For�the�first�time�in�the�BMW�3-Series�three�different�equipment�packages�are�being�offered,�each
with�their�own�independent�character.

1
F30�Introduction
1.�Body
1.1.�Models
The�following�models�are�offered�by�the�compact�Sedan:

Model Engine Power�output Torque Displacement


[kW�(HP)] [Nm] 3
[cm ]
BMW�328i N20B20O0 180�(240) 350 1997
BMW�335i N55B30M0 225�(300) 400 2979

1.2.�History
The�first�3-Series�BMW�was�introduced�in�1975.

The�following�is�a�comparison�of�the�6th�generation�3-series.�The�data�is�based�on�the�four-door
Sedan�(with�the�exception�of�the�two-door�E21).

Explanation E21 E30/4 E36/4 E46/4 E90 F30


Base
model*
Sales�period 1975 1983 1991 1997 since From
and and and and 2005 2012
1983 1990 1998 2005
Vehicle�length�[mm] 4355 4325 4433 4471 4531 4636
Vehicle�width�excluding 1610 1645 1698 1739 1817 1811
exterior�mirrors�[mm]
Vehicle�height,�empty 1380 1380 1393 1415 1421 1429
[mm]
Wheelbase�[mm] 2563 2570 2700 2725 2760 2810
Front�track�width,�basic 1388 1407 1418 1481 1500 1531
wheels�[mm] and and
1506 1537
Rear�track�width,�basic 1401 1415 1431 1488 1529 1572
wheels�[mm] and and
1535 1578
Vehicle�curb�weight,�base 1010 1045 1130 1360 1415 1545
model�[kg]
Payload�[kg] 400 460 460 425 460 410
Luggage�compartment -�-�- 425 435 440 460 480
capacity�[l] (450)
(BMW�335i)
Engines R4�B R4�B R4�B R4�B R4�B R4�B
R6�B R6�B R6�B R6�B R6�B R6�B

2
F30�Introduction
1.�Body
Explanation E21 E30/4 E36/4 E46/4 E90 F30
Base
model*
Cubic�capacity�[cm³] 1573 1596 1596 1796 1995 1995
and and and and and and
2315 2495 2793 2993 2996 2979
Engine�performance, 75 90 100 105 125 180
gasoline�[kW] and and and and and and
143 170 192 231 225 225
0–100 km/h�[s] 14.8 15.8 12.9 12.4 9.3 8.1
0–62�mph and and and and and and
10.6 6.9 7.3 5.7 5.6 5.5
Average�consumption 13.5 12.2 9.5 9.0 8.7 7.9
[l/100 km] and and and and and and
11.0 6.9 7.8 6.5 4.1 4.1
Maximum�speed�[km/h] 154 165 191 200 210 210
and and and and and and
190 218 236 250 250 250

1.3.�New�technical�features
Of�the�many�components�which�have�been�altered�or�newly�developed,�the�following�must�be�men-
tioned�in�particular:

• Door�hinges
• Engine�compartment�lid�catches
• Underbody�panelling
• Side�repeaters
• Side�sills
• Inside�mirror
• Seats.

3
F30�Introduction
1.�Body
1.4.�Dimensions

F30�overall�dimensions

Index Explanation F30* E90


a Vehicle�height,�empty [mm] 1429 1421
b Front�track�width,�basic�wheels [mm] 1531 1506
c Front�overhang [mm] 788 767
d Wheelbase [mm] 2810 2760
e Rear�overhang [mm] 1038 1014
f Rear�track�width,�basic�wheels [mm] 1572 1535
g Vehicle�length [mm] 4636 4541
h Width�excluding�exterior�mirrors [mm] 1811 1817
(vehicle�width�with�exterior�mirror) (2031) (1989)

1.5.�Weights�and�load�capacities
Model curb�weight�(DIN) curb�weight�(DIN) Load�capacity
(manual�gearbox) (automatic F30
F30 transmission)
F30
BMW 328i kg/ 1545/3406 1570/3461 410/904
lbs
BMW�335i kg/ 1620/3571 1630/3594 410/904
lbs

Through�the�10�mm�forward�shift�of�the�front�axle�while�retaining�the�engine�mount,�an�even�more�rea-
sonable�axle-load�distribution�was�able�to�be�achieved�(between�50�and�56%�for�all�load�statuses).

4
F30�Introduction
1.�Body
1.6.�Silhouette�comparison

F30�Silhouette�comparison�with�BMW�E90

F30* E90
Vehicle�height,�empty [mm] 1429 1421
Front�overhang [mm] 788 767
Wheelbase [mm] 2810 2760
Rear�overhang [mm] 1038 1014
Vehicle�length [mm] 4636 4541

F30�Silhouette�comparison�with�BMW�F10

F30* F10
Vehicle�height,�empty [mm] 1429 1464
Front�overhang [mm] 788 832
Wheelbase [mm] 2810 2968
Rear�overhang [mm] 1038 1099
Vehicle�length [mm] 4636 4899

5
F30�Introduction
2.�Bodyshell

F30�bodyshell

Index Explanation
1 Roof
2 Rear�end
3 Side�frame
4 Floor�assembly
5 Front�end�with�bulkhead

2.1.�Introduction
For�the�F30,�great�importance�was�attached�to�construction�with�lightweight�materials.�This�is
achieved�with�the�targeted�application�of�higher-strength�multi-phase�steels�and�super-strength�hot-
formed�steels.�The�F30�sees�an�increase�in�the�average�strength�of�its�body�materials�of�10%�com-
pared�with�the�E90.

The�construction�with�lightweight�materials�makes�a�decisive�contribution�to�reducing�the�vehicle
weight.�In�conjunction�with�a�rigid�design�of�the�bodyshell,�it�makes�a�significant�contribution�to

6
F30�Introduction
2.�Bodyshell
• Driving�dynamics
• Reduction�of�the�fuel�consumption
• Reducing�CO2�emissions
• Passive�safety.

Special�features

• High�proportion�of�multi-phase�steels�(14%�of�the�bodyshell�weight)
• High�proportion�of�hot-formed�steels�(3%�of�the�bodyshell�weight).

The�higher-strength�multi-phase�steels�and�super-strength�hot-formed�steels�ensure�maximum�safety
of�the�passenger�safety�cell�with�low�weight.�They�therefore�make�a�huge�contribution�to�passive�safe-
ty.

The�reinforcements�of�the�B-pillars�of�the�F30�are�manufactured�from�tailored�blanks�with�hot-formed
steels.

Tailored�blanks�are�tailor-made�printed�circuit�boards�made�from�sheet�steel.�Single�sheets�of�varying
thickness,�strength�and�surface�coating�are�joined�together�by�laser�welding.�This�prefabricated�se-
mi-finished�product�is�then�formed�to�the�desired�component.

Stronger�material�is�used�at�places�with�a�higher�load.�The�clever�use�of�material�lowers�manufacturing
costs�as�the�high-quality�and�expensive�materials�are�only�used�where�necessary.�Thanks�to�the�use�of
customized�steel�solutions�additional�reinforcements�and�overlap�connections�at�the�body�are�super-
fluous.�This�saves�material�and�the�total�weight�is�reduced�further.

With�hot-formed�steels,�an�innovative�new�development�–�passive�corrosion-proofing�–�is�used.�In�the
past,�there�were�no�suitable�hot-formed�sheet�metal�materials�with�galvanized�corrosion-proofing�avail-
able�on�the�market.�With�the�development�of�press-hardening�technology,�however,�there�is�now�a�pro-
cess�of�manufacturing�galvanized�hot-formed�components�that�is�capable�of�application�in�volume�pro-
duction.

It�involves�initially�cold-forming�galvanized�sheet�steel�and�then�heating�it�to�approx. 900 °C.�Immedi-


ately�afterwards�it�is�cooled�directly�in�the�moulding�die�with�integrated�water�cooling�within�just�a�few
seconds�down�to�approximately�70 °C�and�thereby�hardened.�That�process�gives�the�components�a
minimum�yield�strength�of�well�over�1000 MPa.

The�parts�produced�in�that�way�can�be�used�in�areas�exposed�to�moisture�without�suffering�corrosion
of�the�basic�material.�This�type�of�steel�does�not�therefore�require�any�additional�corrosion-proofing
measures.

2.2.�Materials
A�modern�vehicle�body�must�meet�a�great�many�requirements.�Despite�small�outer�dimensions,�it
should�provide�an�interior�that�is�a�large�as�possible.�In�the�event�of�an�accident,�the�passengers�must
be�protected�against�injury�as�well�as�possible.�The�torque�that�is�generated�also�means�that�all�units,
e.g.�the�engine�and�transmission,�rely�on�the�body�for�support.�Furthermore,�the�body�must�have�high
static�and�above�all�dynamic�strength�in�order�to�guarantee�the�outstanding�driving�characteristics�that
are�typical�of�BMW.

7
F30�Introduction
2.�Bodyshell
Last�but�not�least,�the�supporting�structure�of�the�vehicle�must�be�highly�durable�and,�in�the�event�of�an
accident,�it�must�be�possible�for�repairs�to�be�carried�out�at�a�reasonable�cost�and�without�an�excessive
amount�of�work.

In�order�to�meet�all�of�these�requirements,�BMW�pursues�the�strategy�of�creating�each�component
from�the�material�best�suited�for�its�function.

The�term�steel�is�merely�the�generic�term�for�the�large�number�of�alloys�with�very�different�properties
that�are�deployed.

F30�material�grades�for�bodyshell

Index Explanation
1 Multi-phase�steels�(>�300�MPa)
2 Hot-formed�steels�(>�900�MPa)
3 Other�steels�(<�300�MPa)

Multi-phase�steels�are�steels�where�the�structure�consists�of�a�number�of�phases.�Higher-strength
multi-phase�steels�with�a�yield�strength�Rp0.2�of�300�to�600�MPa�are,�for�example,�dual-phase�steels�or
TRIP�steels.�Super-strength�multi-phase�steels�with�a�yield�strength�Rp0.2�in�excess�of�600�MPa�are,
for�example,�complex-phase�steels�or�martensitic-phase�steels.

Hot-formed�manganese-boron�steels�are�super-strength�steels�with�a�yield�strength�Rp0.2�in�excess�of
900�MPa.

8
F30�Introduction
2.�Bodyshell
Weight�proportions

In�order�to�reduce�the�vehicle�weight�and�still�ensure�maximum�strength�of�the�bodyshell,�the�propor-
tion�of�higher/super-strength�multi-phase�steels�and�super-strength�hot-formed�steels�is�growing.

F30�bodyshell,�distribution�of�material�grades

Index Explanation
1 Multi-phase�steels�(>�300�MPa),�proportion�14%
2 Hot-formed�steels�(>�900�MPa),�proportion�3%
3 Other�steels�(<�300�MPa),�proportion�83%

9
F30�Introduction
3.�Doors,�Lids�and�Hatches
In�addition�to�the�bodyshell,�all�doors�and�flaps�for�the�F30�are�also�made�from�steel.

3.1.�Doors
The�door�hinges�which�are�secured�to�both�the�door�and�the�A-�or�B-pillar�with�one�screw�in�each�case
are�used�in�the�F30.�Previously�the�door�hinges�were�welded�to�the�A-�or�B-pillar�and�secured�to�the
door�with�two�screws�in�each�case.

F30�door�hinge

3.2.�Engine�compartment�lid
The�F30�is�also�equipped�with�a�comfort�opening�for�the�engine�compartment�lid.�The�engine�com-
partment�lid�can�be�unlocked�completely�from�the�passenger�compartment�by�means�of�new,�two-
stroke�engine�compartment�lid�catches.�The�engine�compartment�lid�release�lever�must�be�actuated
twice�in�succession�for�this�purpose.

Advantages

• A�release�lever�does�not�have�to�be�searched�for�and�actuated�at�the�front�of�the�car
• Safety�is�increased�by�the�use�of�two�retaining�hooks
• There�is�no�risk�of�injury�on�exposed�retaining�hooks.

10
F30�Introduction
3.�Doors,�Lids�and�Hatches

F30�engine�compartment�lid,�engine�compartment�lid�catch

When�the�engine�compartment�lid�release�lever�is�activated�for�the�first�time,�this�moves�the�two�en-
gine�compartment�lid�catches�into�the�preliminary�detent.�The�engine�compartment�lid�springs�up-
wards�by�one�stage.�When�the�engine�compartment�lid�release�lever�is�released,�the�engine�compart-
ment�lid�catches�are�moved�into�the�retaining�hook�position.

When�the�engine�compartment�lid�release�lever�is�actuated�again,�the�engine�compartment�lid�is�un-
locked�completely�and�can�be�opened�by�simple�lifting.

11
F30�Introduction
3.�Doors,�Lids�and�Hatches

F30�engine�compartment�lid�catch

Index Explanation Position�of�engine�compartment


lid�release�lever
A Engine�compartment�lid�closed�and�locked Not�actuated
B Preliminary�detent Applied
C Striker�in�retaining�hook�position Applied�and�released�again
D Engine�compartment�lid�completely�unlocked Applied,�released�and�applied�again

If�the�engine�compartment�lid�is�not�completely�locked,�a�Check�Control�message�is�displayed�while
the�engine�is�running.

12
F30�Introduction
3.�Doors,�Lids�and�Hatches
3.3.�Tailgate
The�tailgate�opens�automatically�when�it�is�actuated�via�the�remote�key�or�the�ID�transmitter�or�the�but-
ton�on�the�tailgate.�Depending�on�the�vehicle�equipment�it�can�also�be�actuated�with�the�tailgate�push-
button�on�the�A-pillar�or�contactless�by�means�of�targeted�foot�movement.

F30�tailgate

The�single-joint�hinges�open�automatically�in�the�open�position�with�help�of�two�tension�springs�and�a
gas�spring�damping�action.�The�payload�is�thus�not�damaged,�the�hinge�brackets�run�behind�the�lug-
gage�compartment�trim�panel.�An�additional�cover�ensures�a�high-quality�visible�impression�and�con-
ceals�the�wiring�harness�installation�arrangement.

The�contactless�rear�lid�opening�is�installed�in�vehicles�with�optional�equipment�"Comfort�Access�in-
cluding�Smart�Opener"�(option 322).�It�is�an�additional�operating�element�for�the�tailgate�for�the�cus-
tomer.�The�operation�is�effected�by�means�of�targeted�foot�movement�to�and�back�from�the�bumper.
Two�sensors�identify�the�movement�via�a�capacitive�measurement�in�a�contactless�manner.

Further�information�on�the�contactless�rear�lid�opening�can�be�found�in�the�training�manual�"F30�Gen-
eral�Vehicle�Electrical�System".

13
F30�Introduction
4.�Exterior�Equipment
4.1.�Front�end
The�front�end�of�the�F30�can�be�removed�completely.�It�consists�of�the�bumper,�the�bumper�support,
the�ornamental�grille,�the�lights�and�trim�panels,�among�others.

It�is�imperative�that�the�repair�instructions�are�followed�when�removing�and�refitting�the�front�end.

F30�Bumper�support

The�bumper�support�of�the�F30�is�made�from�aluminium�thus�saving�on�weight�compared�to�a�steel
version.

4.2.�Underfloor�concept
The�virtually�smooth�underbody�throughout�reduces�drag�and�lift�forces.�This�improves�driving�dynam-
ics,�reduces�fuel�consumption�and�thereby�reduces�CO2�emissions.

Strategically�placed�air�inlets�provide�for�optimum�component�cooling.�The�underbody�panelling�al-
so�improve�the�acoustics�and�protect�the�lines�and�other�components�against�stone�chipping�and�dirt
contamination.�In�this�way,�body�and�components�are�protected�against�corrosion.

The�aerodynamic�covers�on�the�rear�axle�are�new�in�the�F30.�These�features�reduce�the�rear�axle�lift,
improve�the�drag�and�provide�protection�against�stone�chipping.

14
F30�Introduction
4.�Exterior�Equipment

F30�Underbody�panelling

Index Explanation
1 Underbody�panelling
2 Wheel�arch�panel
3 Heat�insulation
4 Aerodynamic�cover�on�the�rear�axle
5 Diffuser�cover�(for�vehicles�with�N47�engine)�(not�US)

Changes�and�damage�to�the�underbody�or�omitting�trim�panel�components�leads�to�changes�in�the�air
flow�at�the�underbody.�This�can�influence�road�grip.

4.3.�Sound�insulation
Sound�insulation�has�a�major�impact�on�passenger�compartment�acoustics.�A�heightened�use�of
weight�is�usually�required�to�achieve�a�high�insulating�effect�against�the�noises�radiated�by�the�drive-
train�components.

In�order�to�keep�this�increase�in�weight�as�low�as�possible,�a�new�and�efficient�sound�insulation�con-
cept�is�used�in�the�F30�in�the�area�of�the�transmission�tunnel�and�the�bulkhead.�This�combines�high
sheet�area�stiffness�with�high�damping�action�and�simultaneously�high�fundamental�damping.

Here�sandwich�sheets�are�specifically�connected�to�each�other�by�means�of�damping�compound.

15
F30�Introduction
4.�Exterior�Equipment

F30�sound�insulation�concept

Index Explanation
1 Steel�sheet
2 Damping�compound

4.4.�Attachments

4.4.1.�Exterior�mirrors
The�side�repeaters�required�by�law�which�are�now�integrated�for�the�first�time�by�BMW�in�the�F30�in
the�exterior�mirrors.�They�increase�road�safety.�The�side�repeaters�are�now�omitted�from�the�side�pan-
els.

16
F30�Introduction
4.�Exterior�Equipment

F30�exterior�mirror

Index Explanation
1 Mirror�cap
2 Mirror�glass
3 Flasher�housing
4 Fiber-optic�conductor
5 Mirror�housing
6 LED�module

The�side�repeaters�are�each�operated�with�three�LEDs�and�one�Fiber-optic�conductor.�This�improves
visibility�to�other�road�users.

4.4.2.�Side�sills
The�two�side�sills�of�the�F30�are�screwed�to�the�underbody�and�inserted�at�the�top�into�four�retaining
strips�in�each�case.

The�front�retaining�strips�are�attached�from�below�to�either�side�panel.

17
F30�Introduction
4.�Exterior�Equipment
The�remaining�retaining�strips�are�secured�with�dovetail�guides�to�the�outer�side�frames.�To�remove
them,�they�must�be�slid�towards�the�rear�and�then�removed.

Additional�retaining�elements�are�no�longer�needed.

F30�side�sill

Index Explanation
1 Dovetail�guide
2 Retaining�strip,�front
3 Retaining�strip
4 Side�sills

4.4.3.�Reversing�camera
In�the�F30�a�reversing�camera�(option 3AG)�can�be�ordered.�The�reversing�camera�is�fitted�with�a�hold-
er�and�is�hardly�visible�beside�the�tailgate�push-button.

18
F30�Introduction
4.�Exterior�Equipment

F30�reversing�camera

Index Explanation
1 Reversing�camera
2 Tailgate�push-button

For�further�information�on�the�reversing�camera,�please�refer�to�the� “F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems”
production�information.

4.5.�Glass�slide/tilt�sunroof
The�glass�slide/tilt�sunroof�of�the�F30�is�characterized�by�optimum�sound�insulation�when�closed.�The
sliding�head�liner�can�be�operated�by�hand.�Convenience�operation�consists�of�vent�position�and�open-
ing�and�closing�of�the�glass�slide/tilt�sunroof�cover.

The�glass�slide/tilt�sunroof�is�equipped�with�an�integrated�anti-trap�mechanism.

19
F30�Introduction
4.�Exterior�Equipment

F30�glass�slide/tilt�sunroof

Index Explanation
1 Glass�slide/tilt�sunroof�cover
2 Slide/tilt�sunroof�mechanism
3 Water�channel
4 Gaiter
5 Slide/tilt�sunroof�frame�with�slide/tilt�sunroof�drive
6 Wind�deflector
7 Sliding�head�liner

20
F30�Introduction
4.�Exterior�Equipment
Index Explanation
8 Slider
9 Gate,�front
10 Gate,�rear
11 Guide

21
F30�Introduction
5.�Interior�Equipment
5.1.�Dimensions
Above�all,�the�headroom�and�legroom�in�the�rear�passenger�compartment�have�been�increased�in�the
F30.

F30* E90
Shoulder�room,�front [mm] 1400 1408
Shoulder�room,�rear [mm] 1400 1399
Elbow�room,�front [mm] 1451 1460
Elbow�room,�rear [mm] 1458 1454
Maximum�headroom,�front�-�without�glass�slide/tilt�sunroof [mm] 1023 978
Maximum�headroom,�front�-�with�glass�slide/tilt�sunroof [mm] 992 949
Maximum�headroom,�rear�-�without�glass�slide/tilt�sunroof [mm] 957 953
Maximum�headroom,�rear�-�with�glass�slide/tilt�sunroof [mm] 950 942
Front�footwell [mm] 1068 1054
Rear�footwell [mm] 892 881
Luggage�compartment�volume [liters] 480 460
1

1
�BMW 335i:�450 liters.

To�improve�the�entrance�in�the�rear�passenger�compartment,�the�following�changes�have�been�made�in
comparison�to�the�E90:

• the�door�opening�angle�of�the�rear�doors�has�been�increased�5.5°�to�70°
• the�entrance�height�to�the�roof�edge�has�been�increased�by�approx.�10�mm
• the�B-pillar�trim�panels�have�been�flattened
• the�outer�contours�of�the�seat�bench�have�been�flatted�at�the�side�and�rounded�at�the�front
• the�width�of�the�door�sill�has�been�reduced�by�14�mm
• the�foot�entry�freedom�between�B-pillar�and�heel�panel�has�been�increased�18�mm
• the�seat�distance�between�front�and�rear�has�been�increased�16�mm.

5.2.�Material�and�color�concept
In�addition�to�the�comprehensive�offering�of�optional�equipment,�the�F30�can�also�be�individualized
with�the�following�equipment�packages:

• BMW�Sport�Line�(ZSL)
• BMW�Modern�Line�(ZML)
• BMW�Luxury�Line�(ZLL).

The�equipment�packages�contain�both�general�optional�equipment�and�line-specific�features.

22
F30�Introduction
5.�Interior�Equipment
The�content�of�the�equipment�packages�is�partly�binding.�Individual�elements�cannot�be�deselected,
creating�an�excellent�price/performance�ratio.

F30�Lines,�exterior

23
F30�Introduction
5.�Interior�Equipment

F30�Lines,�interior

24
F30�Introduction
5.�Interior�Equipment
5.2.1.�Line�package�content

Sport�Line Luxury�Line Modern�Line


Option�2A5 Option�2H2 Option�2P5
18"�light�alloy�wheels 18"�light�alloy�wheels 18"�light�alloy�wheels
Double�spoke�397 Multi�spoke�416 Turbine�415
Sports�leather�steering�wheel Sports�leather�steering�wheel Sports�leather�steering�wheel
Black�Leatherette,�or�Leather Black�Leather,�Beige�or�Brown Leather�Dakota�(oyster/oyster
grey/black�or�red/black�or or�anthracite/black)
black/red
Black�high-gloss�interior�trim Fine-wood�trim�"Fineline"�an- Interior�trim�finishers�"Pearl"
finishers�with�coral�red�accen- thracite�with�accentuation�trim with�accentuation�trim�in
tuation�strip,�matt in�pearl-effect�chrome pearl-effect�chrome
Sports�seats�for�driver�and Standard Standard
front�passenger

Scope�controlled�by�package

Sport�Line Luxury�Line Modern�Line


Front�and�rear�bumpers,�air�in- Front�and�rear�bumpers,�air�in- Front�and�rear�bumpers,�air�in-
lets�in�Lines-specific�design�in lets�in�Lines-specific�design�in lets�in�Lines-specific�design�in
black�high-gloss chrome matt�chrome
Exclusively�designed�radiator Exclusively�designed�radiator Exclusively�designed�radiator
grille�in�black�high-gloss grille�in�chrome grille�in�matt�chrome
Tailpipe�design�in�black Tailpipe�design�in�chrome Tailpipe�design�in�matt�chrome
chrome
B-pillar�in�black�high-gloss B-pillar�in�black�high-gloss B-pillar�in�black�high-gloss
“Sport”�lettering "Luxury"�lettering "Modern"�lettering
Sill�trim Sill�trim Sill�trim
"BMW�Sport" "BMW�Luxury" "BMW�Modern"
Exclusive�red�trim�seams�for Enhanced�interior�color�nut Sports�steering�wheel�and
steering�wheel�and�seats brown�(only�in�connection�with mounting�in�exclusive
exclusive�nut�brown�leather) light�color
Ambient�lighting�including Ambient�lighting�including Ambient�lighting�including
ColorSwitch ColorSwitch ColorSwitch
Chrome�frame�for�A/C�and�ra- Chrome�frame�for�A/C�and�ra- Chrome�frame�for�A/C�and�ra-
dio�control�panel dio�control�panel dio�control�panel
Key�in�“Sport”�design Key�in�"Luxury"�design Key�in�"Modern"�design
Instrument�cluster�with�sporty Chrome�link�in�the�center�con- Instrument�cluster�with�exclu-
design�elements sole sive�design�elements
Mirror�caps�available�in�plain Side�window�graphic�in
black,�solid�paint�(option�3BE) chrome

25
F30�Introduction
5.�Interior�Equipment
5.3.�Dashboard
The�upper�part�of�the�dashboard�is�black�in�the�basic�version�and�for�the�BMW�Modern�Line�(PA 7S1)
dark�oyster.�The�surface�is�coated�with�a�PUR�spray�(PUR�=�polyurethane)�and�has�a�F30-specific
grain.

A�different�Central�Information�Display�(CID)�is�installed,�depending�on�the�vehicle�equipment�specifi-
cation:

• CID�with�6.5"�screen�in�the�basic�version
• CID�with�8.8"�screen�diagonal�for�Professional�navigation�system�(option 609).

For�vehicles�with�basic�equipment�a�black�high-gloss�link�is�installed�around�the�CID.

F30�CID�with�6.5"�screen�diagonal

In�vehicles�with�Professional�navigation�system�(option 609)�a�CID�with�anti-reflecting�laminated�safety
glass�is�used.�The�glass�cover�stretches�to�the�edge�of�the�CID.

F30�CID�with�8.8"�screen�diagonal

For�further�information�on�the�Central�Information�Display�(CID),�please�refer�to�the�“F30�Displays�and
Controls”�product�training�manual.

In�vehicles�with�then�standard�HiFi�loudspeaker�system�there�is�a�mid-range�speaker�on�the�top�side
of�the�dashboard;�in�vehicles�with�the�optional�Harman�Kardon�Surround�Sound�system�(option�688)
there�is�a�mid-range�and�tweeter�on�the�top�side�of�the�dashboard.

Further�information�on�the�speaker�systems�can�be�found�in�the�product�information�"F30�Information
and�Communication".

For�the�first�time�in�the�3-Series�a�BMW�Head‐Up�Display�(option�610)�can�be�ordered.

Further�information�on�the�Head-Up�Display�can�be�found�in�the�product�information�"F30�Displays
and�Controls".

26
F30�Introduction
5.�Interior�Equipment

F30�dashboard

Index Explanation
1 BMW�Head‐Up�Display�(option�610)
2 Cover�for�mid-range�speaker/tweeter�(for�HiFi�loudspeaker�system�or�for
Harman�Kardon�Surround�Sound�system,�option 688)

The�lower�section�of�the�dashboard�is�available�in�black,�Veneto�beige,�oyster�or�nut�brown.�The�sur-
face�is�coated�with�a�PUR�spray�(PUR�=�polyurethane)�and�has�a�F30-specific�grain.�The�die-cast�pan-
elling�is�covered�with�comfort�paint,�thus�improving�the�optic�and�haptic�elements.

With�corresponding�vehicle�equipment�the�control�box�for�the�assist�systems�is�located�under�the�light
switch�or�for�vehicles�with�a�storage�compartment�package�(option�493)�an�additional�storage�com-
partment.

5.4.�Center�console
The�center�console�is�available�in�the�colors�black,�Veneto�beige�or�oyster.

27
F30�Introduction
5.�Interior�Equipment

F30�center�console

Index Explanation
1 Oddments�tray�and�connector�or�ashtray�and�cigarette�lighter
2 Removable�storage�tray
3 Controller
4 Front�armrest
5 Rear�air�outlet
6 Cup�holder

The�controller�is�ergonomically�embedded�next�to�the�gearshift�in�the�decor.�Two�different�controllers
are�fitted�depending�on�the�vehicle�equipment:

• Controller�with�5 buttons�(basic)
• Controller�with�7 buttons�Professional�navigation�system�(option 609).

With�the�optional�equipment�light�package�(option�563)�the�front�oddments�tray�and�the�storage�com-
partment�under�the�front�armrest�are�illuminated.

There�is�a�storage�tray�on�the�back�of�the�center�console�or�the�rear�air�outlet�for�IHKA�2/1�zones.

28
F30�Introduction
5.�Interior�Equipment
5.5.�Inside�mirror
In�the�F30�a�new�inside�mirror�fitting�is�installed.�To�remove�the�inside�mirror,�the�mirror�base�cover
must�be�removed,�the�plug�connection�disconnected�and�then�the�inside�mirror�with�mirror�base�and
retaining�spring�pulled�down�from�the�guide.

F30�inside�mirror

Index Explanation
1 Inside�mirror
2 Retaining�spring
3 Guide

5.6.�Storage�options
The�F30�features�the�following�storage�options.

29
F30�Introduction
5.�Interior�Equipment

F30�storage�options

Index Explanation
1 Oddments�tray
2 Glove�box
3 Door�pocket
4 Storage�compartment,�center�console
5 Storage�tray�(not�US)
6 Cup�holder�(with�removable�storage�tray)
7 Storage�compartment

A�1-litre�bottle�can�be�easily�stowed�in�the�front�door�pockets.

5.7.�Front�seats
The�following�front�seat�variants�can�be�chosen�for�the�F30:

• Basic�seat,�electrical;�driver's�seat�with�memory
• Sports�seat,�electrical;�driver's�seat�with�memory�(option 481).

30
F30�Introduction
5.�Interior�Equipment

F30�front�seat

The�inclination�of�the�head�restraints�can�be�set�in�three�different�positions�in�the�F30.

31
F30�Introduction
5.�Interior�Equipment

F30�maximum�seat�adjustment

Index Explanation
1 Head�restraint�angle�adjustment
2 Head�restraint�height�adjustment
3 Backrest�angle�adjustment
4 Backrest�width�adjustment
5 Forward/back�seat�adjustment
6 Seat�height�adjustment
7 Seat�angle�adjustment
8 Seat�depth�adjustment
9 Lumbar�support�adjustment

32
F30�Introduction
5.�Interior�Equipment
The�seat�adjustment�options�may�vary�depending�on�the�vehicle�equipment.

F30�switch�block,�driver's�seat�adjustment

Index Explanation
1 Button�2�(calls�up�stored�position)
2 Button�1�(calls�up�stored�position)
3 Button�M�(stores�current�position)
4 Backrest�width�adjustment
5 Lumbar�support�adjustment
6 Backrest�angle�adjustment
7 Forward�/�back,�seat�height�and�seat�angle�adjustment

5.8.�Rear�seats
A�through-loading�system�(option�465)�with�a�separate�folding�center�part�can�be�ordered�as�optional
equipment.�The�backrest�is�divided�in�the�ratio�40-20-40.�The�individual�sections�can�be�folded�to�the
front�as�shown�in�the�following�diagrams:

33
F30�Introduction
5.�Interior�Equipment

F30�through-loading�system

5.9.�Climate�control
One�climate�control�variant�is�available�for�the�F30:

• Integrated�automatic�heating�/�air�conditioning�(IHKA),�2/1-zone.

In�the�zone�specification�the�first�number�denotes�the�number�of�controllable�temperature�zones�(tem-
perature�selector�wheels)�and�the�second�number�the�number�of�controllable�airflow�volume�and�air
distribution�zones�(separate�fan�settings).

In�the�F30�the�IHKA�control�unit�is�separate�from�the�IHKA�controls�and�is�located�on�the�heating�and
air-conditioning�unit.

For�further�information�on�the�heating�and�air-conditioning�systems,�please�refer�to�the�“F30�General
Vehicle�Electrics”�product�information.

34
F30�Introduction
5.�Interior�Equipment

F30�air�ducts�integrated�automatic�heating�/�air-conditioning�system�IHKA 2/1�zones

Index Explanation
1 Driver�zone
2 Front�passenger�zone

35
F30�Introduction
6.�Luggage�Compartment
Special�features

• Luggage�compartment�floor�with�flowing�transition�to�the�side�trim�panel
• Luggage�compartment�floor�stop�in�raised�position
• Level�side�faces�with�maximum�use�of�space
• Large,�depth�storage�tray�on�the�left
• Cover�for�toolkit�and�battery,�right
• Tie-down�by�four�lashing�eyes
• Enlarged�luggage�compartment�(480 liters)
• Bigger�loading�opening�in�both�width�and�height.

36
Bayerische�Motorenwerke�Aktiengesellschaft
Händlerqualifizierung�und�Training
Röntgenstraße�7
85716�Unterschleißheim,�Germany
Technical�training.
Product�information.
F30�Powertrain

BMW�Service
General�information

Symbols�used

The�following�symbol�is�used�in�this�document�to�facilitate�better�comprehension�or�to�draw�attention
to�very�important�information:

Contains�important�safety�information�and�information�that�needs�to�be�observed�strictly�in�order�to
guarantee�the�smooth�operation�of�the�system.

Information�status�and�national-market�versions

BMW�Group�vehicles�meet�the�requirements�of�the�highest�safety�and�quality�standards.�Changes�in
requirements�for�environmental�protection,�customer�benefits�and�design�render�necessary�continu-
ous�development�of�systems�and�components.�Consequently,�there�may�be�discrepancies�between
the�contents�of�this�document�and�the�vehicles�available�in�the�training�course.

This�document�basically�relates�to�the�European�version�of�left-hand�drive�vehicles.�Some�operating
elements�or�components�are�arranged�differently�in�right-hand�drive�vehicles�than�shown�in�the�graph-
ics�in�this�document.�Further�differences�may�arise�as�a�result�of�the�equipment�specification�in�specif-
ic�markets�or�countries.

Additional�sources�of�information

Further�information�on�the�individual�topics�can�be�found�in�the�following:

• Owner's�Handbook
• Integrated�Service�Technical�Application.

Contact:�[email protected]

©2011�BMW�AG,�Munich,�Germany

Reprints�of�this�publication�or�its�parts�require�the�written�approval�of�BMW�AG,�Munich

The�information�contained�in�this�document�forms�an�integral�part�of�the�technical�training�of�the�BMW
Group�and�is�intended�for�the�trainer�and�participants�in�the�seminar.�Refer�to�the�latest�relevant�infor-
mation�systems�of�the�BMW�Group�for�any�changes/additions�to�the�technical�data.

Information�status:�September�2011
VH-23/International�Technical�Training
F30�Powertrain
Contents
1. Powertrain�Variants.................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 1
1.1. Models..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1.1. Gasoline�engines.................................................................................................................................................................. 1

2. Engines............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 2
2.1. N20�Engine...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2
2.1.1. New�features/changes.................................................................................................................................................. 2
2.1.2. Technical�data............................................................................................................................................................................ 4
2.1.3. Full�load�diagram................................................................................................................................................................... 5
2.2. N55�engine...................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5
2.2.1. New�features/changes.................................................................................................................................................. 6
2.2.2. Technical�data............................................................................................................................................................................ 7
2.2.3. Full�load�diagram................................................................................................................................................................... 8
2.3. Engine�oil�level�check..................................................................................................................................................................................... 9
2.3.1. Detailed�measurement............................................................................................................................................ 10
2.4. Engine�identification..................................................................................................................................................................................... 10
2.4.1. Engine�designation....................................................................................................................................................... 10
2.4.2. Engine�identification....................................................................................................................................................11

3. Fuel� Supply......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 12
3.1. Gasoline............................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 12
3.1.1. System�overview............................................................................................................................................................... 12
3.1.2. Fuel�delivery............................................................................................................................................................................. 14
3.1.3. Tank�ventilation�system..........................................................................................................................................15

4. Automatic�Start/Stop�II�(MSA�II)................................................................................................................................................................. 16
4.1. System�Overview............................................................................................................................................................................................... 16
4.1.1. Automatic�start/stop�function�-�Manual�transmission............................................. 16
4.1.2. Automatic�start/stop�function�-�Automatic�transmission................................... 16
4.1.3. DC/DC�converter............................................................................................................................................................... 17
4.2. Automatic�mode.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 18
4.2.1. Driving................................................................................................................................................................................................ 19
4.2.2. Stopping......................................................................................................................................................................................... 19
4.2.3. Driving�off..................................................................................................................................................................................... 20
4.2.4. Establishing�start-up�readiness................................................................................................................. 20
4.2.5. Automatic�hold..................................................................................................................................................................... 21
4.2.6. Preventing�automatic�engine�shutdown...................................................................................... 21
4.3. Switch-off�inhibitors...................................................................................................................................................................................... 21
4.4. Switch-on�prompts......................................................................................................................................................................................... 22
4.5. Deactivation................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 23
4.5.1. Deactivation�via�automatic�start/stop�function�button............................................24
F30�Powertrain
Contents
4.6. Hydraulic�pressure�accumulator................................................................................................................................................ 24
4.6.1. Installation�location....................................................................................................................................................... 25
4.6.2. Design................................................................................................................................................................................................ 26
4.6.3. Charging......................................................................................................................................................................................... 27
4.6.4. Locking............................................................................................................................................................................................. 29
4.6.5. Discharging................................................................................................................................................................................ 29
4.7. Service�information.........................................................................................................................................................................................30

5. Manual�Gearboxes..................................................................................................................................................................................................................31
5.1. Designation................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 31
5.2. Variants...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................31
5.3. I�gearbox.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 32
5.3.1. I�Turbo�manual�gearbox......................................................................................................................................... 32
5.3.2. Technical�data........................................................................................................................................................................33
5.4. K�transmission........................................................................................................................................................................................................34
5.4.1. Special�features.................................................................................................................................................................. 35
5.4.2. Technical�data........................................................................................................................................................................35
5.4.3. Intermediate�bearings............................................................................................................................................... 36
5.4.4. Dry-sump�lubrication.................................................................................................................................................. 36
5.4.5. Synchromesh..........................................................................................................................................................................36
5.4.6. Mating�dimensions........................................................................................................................................................ 36

6. Automatic�Transmission............................................................................................................................................................................................. 37
6.1. Designation................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 37
6.2. Variants...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................37
6.3. GA8HP45Z�transmission...................................................................................................................................................................... 37
6.3.1. Technical�data........................................................................................................................................................................38

7. Rear�Axle�Differential....................................................................................................................................................................................................... 40
7.1. Designation................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 41
7.2. Variants...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................41

8. Shafts............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 42
8.1. Drive�shafts..................................................................................................................................................................................................................42
8.1.1. Variants............................................................................................................................................................................................. 44
8.1.2. Crash�function....................................................................................................................................................................... 44
8.2. Rear�axle�output�shafts............................................................................................................................................................................ 44
8.2.1. Variants............................................................................................................................................................................................. 44
F30�Powertrain
1.�Powertrain�Variants

F30�powertrain

1.1.�Models
The�F30�will�be�launched�onto�the�market�in�February�2012�in�the�following�models:

• BMW�328i
• BMW�335i

1.1.1.�Gasoline�engines

BMW�328i BMW�335i
Engine N20B20O0 N55B30M0
Power�output [kW�(HP)] 180�(240) 225�(300)
Torque [Nm�(ft�lbs)] 350�(255) 407�(300)
Automatic�transmission GA8HP45Z GA8HP45Z
Manual�gearbox GS6-17BG GS6-45BZ
Rear�axle�differential HAG�188LW HAG�215LW
1
2
HAG�188LW

1
�with�manual�gearbox.
2
�with�automatic�transmission.

1
F30�Powertrain
2.�Engines
2.1.�N20�Engine
The�N20�engine�is�the�new�generation�of�the�4-cylinder�gasoline�engines�at�BMW�and�was�installed�for
the�first�time�in�the�E84.�It�is�gradually�replacing�both�the�4-cylinder�engines�N46�and�N43,�as�well�as
the�6-cylinder�naturally�aspirated�engines�N52�and�N53.�The�latest�technology�has�been�used�for�the
N20�engine�such�as�Turbo-Valvetronic�direct�injection�(TVDI)�in�connection�with�a�twin-scroll�exhaust
turbocharger�for�example.

Special�features

• Combination�of�TwinPower�Turbo,�direct�fuel�injection�(DI)�and�Valvetronic
• Reduction�of�fuel�consumption�by�15%�compared�to�the�N52 engine
• Reduction�of�the�engine�weight�by�22�kg�compared�to�the�N52 engine
• All-wheel�drive�capability
• Exhaust�emission�standards
• Global�use�thanks�to�homogeneous�mixture�preparation.

2.1.1.�New�features/changes

Engine�mechanics

• Aluminium�crankcase�with�LDS-coated�cylinder�barrels
(The�electric�arc�spraying�is�a�powerful�wire�spraying�for�the�manufacture�of�coatings�for�which
electrically�conducted�materials�are�sprayed.)
• Friction-optimized�crankshaft�drive
• Optimized�cooling�jacket
• Turbo-Valvetronic�direct�injection�(TVDI)
• Twin-scroll�exhaust�turbocharger
• 3rd�generation�Valvetronic�with�new�intermediate�levers
• New�variable�camshaft�timing�control�(VANOS)�with�central�valve
• Camshafts�(all�the�components�are�shrink-fitted�onto�the�shaft�pipe)
• Two-part�crankcase�ventilation
• Forged�crankshaft
• Crosswise�crankshaft�drive�(offset�of�crankshaft�axle�to�cylinder�mid�level)
• Piston�with�negative�axial�offset�(offset�of�piston�pin�axle�from�the�cylinder�mid�level)
• Chain�drive�for�counterbalance�shafts�with�chain�tensioner
• Counterbalance�shafts�arranged�on�top�of�one�another.

2
F30�Powertrain
2.�Engines
Oil�supply

• Map-controlled�oil�pump
• New�pendulum-slide�oil�pump
• Raw�oil�cooling�(engine�oil/coolant�heat�exchanger�in�oil�circuit�before�oil�filter)
• New�combined�oil�pressure�and�temperature�sensor.

Air�intake�and�exhaust�emission�systems

• Twin-scroll�exhaust�turbocharger
• Hot�film�air�mass�meter�7�in�all�engine�versions
• Three�connections�for�crankcase�ventilation
• Different�number�of�connections�for�tank�ventilation�(depending�on�the�variant)
• Air-gap-insulated�exhaust�manifold,�six�into�two
• Upstream�catalytic�converter.

Vacuum�system

• Two-stage�vacuum�pump
• Vacuum�reservoir�for�the�wastegate�valve�permanently�connected�to�the�engine�cover.

Fuel�preparation/supply

• Direct�fuel�injection�with�central�injector�position�and�up�to�200 bar�fuel�injection�pressure
• Solenoid�valve�injectors
• Bosch�high-pressure�pump
• High-pressure�lines�to�the�injectors�soldered�to�the�rail
• No�low�fuel-pressure�sensor
• Three�different�tank�ventilation�variants.

Cooling

• Electric�coolant�pump
• Established�heat�management.

Engine�electrical�system

• Bosch�MEVD�17.2.4�engine�control�unit

For�more�information�please�refer�to�the�"N20�Engine"�Training�Information�ST1111

3
F30�Powertrain
2.�Engines
2.1.2.�Technical�data

N20B20O0
F30,�328i�US�version
Design R4
Valves�per�cylinder 4
Engine�control MEVD�17.2.4
Displacement [cm ]
3 1997

Stroke/bore [mm] 90.1/84.0


Power�output�at�speed [kW�(HP)] 180 kW�(240)
[rpm] 5000 –�6000
Torque�at�speed [Nm�(ft�lbs)] 350�Nm�(255)
[rpm] 1250 –�4800
1

Compression�ratio [ε] 10.0�:�1


Fuel�grade RON�91�–�98
Exhaust�emission�standards Ultra�Low�Emission
Vehicle�(ULEV)�II
Fuel�consumption [l/100 km] ---
(manual/automatic�transmission)
Acceleration�0�–�100�km/h [s] 6.2/6.4
(manual/automatic�transmission)

1
�for�automatic�transmission:�1500 –�4800�rpm
2
�values�were�still�not�available�at�editorial�deadline.

4
F30�Powertrain
2.�Engines
2.1.3.�Full�load�diagram

Full�load�diagram�F30,�328i�with�N20B20O0�engine�in�comparison�to�the�N52B30O1�engine

2.2.�N55�engine
The�N55�engine�is�the�successor�to�the�N54�engine�and�is�already�in�use�in�numerous�BMW�models,
for�example�in�the�F07,�F10�and�F25.�Technical�updates�and�modifications�make�it�possible�to�use�on-
ly�one�exhaust�turbocharger.�The�technical�data�have�remained�virtually�the�same�-�with�reduced�costs
and�improved�quality.

5
F30�Powertrain
2.�Engines
2.2.1.�New�features/changes

Engine�mechanics

• Crankcase�adapted�for�twin-scroll�exhaust�turbocharger
• Cylinder�bore�changed�to�84 mm
• Large�longitudinal�ventilation�bore�holes�in�the�crankcase
• Modified�oil�supply�of�vacuum�pump
• Water�duct�for�injector�cooling�integrated�in�the�cylinder�head
• Crankcase�ventilation�and�blow-by�pipe�integrated�in�the�cylinder�head�cover
• Asymmetrical�counterweight�arrangement�of�crankshaft�and�weight�reduction
• Profiled�bore�hole�in�small�connecting�rod�eye
• Unleaded�connecting�rod�bearing�shells.

Valve�gear

• Variable�camshaft�timing�control�(VANOS)
- Solenoid�valves�with�integrated�non-return�valve�and�3 strainers
- Increased�adjustment�speed�and�reduced�susceptibility�to�dirt

• Valvetronic�VTC
- Integrated�in�the�cylinder�head�and�revised
- Brushless�servomotor,�3rd�generation
- Position�identifier�for�eccentric�shaft�integrated�in�the�servomotor.

Belt�drive

• Belt�drive�and�vibration�absorber�newly�developed.

Oil�supply

• Intake�pipe,�oil�deflector�and�oil�collector�integrated�in�one�component
• Oil�pump�with�thermoset�slide�and�map�control
• Modified�oil�filter�housing.

Air�intake�and�exhaust�emission�systems

• Twin-scroll�exhaust�turbocharger�with�wastegate�valve�and�electrical�blow-off�valve
• Air-gap-insulated�exhaust�manifold,�six�into�two
• Upstream�catalytic�converter
• Discontinuation�of�underbody�catalytic�converter.

6
F30�Powertrain
2.�Engines
Vacuum�system

• Revised,�similar�to�N63 engine.

Fuel�preparation

• Direct�fuel�injection�with�central�injector�position�and�up�to�200 bar�fuel�injection�pressure
• Solenoid�valve�injectors.

Cooling

• Coolant�channels�revised�for�exhaust�turbocharger.

Engine�electrical�system

• Crankshaft�sensor�integrated�for�automatic�engine�start-stop�function
• Engine-related�Digital�Engine�Electronics�DME�(MEVD 17.2.6)�secured�to�air�intake�system
and�cooled�using�intake�air,�FlexRay-compatible
• Improved�signal�quality�and�temperature�resistance�of�the�hot-film�air-mass�meter�HFM
• Adoption�of�oxygen�sensor�before�catalytic�converter�from�the�N63 engine
• New�oil�pressure�sensor�for�absolute�pressure�measurement
• Oil�temperature�sensor�screwed�into�main�oil�duct
• Ignition�coils�with�higher�ignition�voltage�and�improvement�of�the�electromagnetic
compatibility
• Spark�plugs�analogous�to�N63 engine
• Solenoid�valve�injectors.

For�more�information�please�refer�to�the�"N55�Engine"training�material�ST916.

2.2.2.�Technical�data

N55B30M0
F30,�335i�US�version
Design R6
Valves�per�cylinder 4
Engine�control MEVD�17.2
Displacement 3
[cm ] 2979

Stroke/bore [mm] 89.6/84.0


Power�output�at�speed [kW�(HP)] 225�(300)
[rpm] 5800
Torque�at�speed [Nm�(ft-lbs)] 400�(300)
[rpm] 1300�–�5000

7
F30�Powertrain
2.�Engines
N55B30M0
F30,�335i�US�version
Compression�ratio [ε] 10.2�:�1
Fuel�grade RON�91�–�98
Exhaust�emission�standards Ultra�Low�Emission
Vehicle�(ULEV)�II
Fuel�consumption [l/100 km] ---
(manual/automatic�transmission)
Acceleration�0�–�100�km/h [s] 5.7/5.7
(manual/automatic�transmission)

2.2.3.�Full�load�diagram
When�compared�with�its�predecessor,�the�N55�engine�is�characterized�by�lower�fuel�consumption�with
identical�power�and�torque�data.

8
F30�Powertrain
2.�Engines

Full�load�diagram�F30,�335i�with�N55B30M0�engine�in�comparison�to�the�N54B30O0�engine

2.3.�Engine�oil�level�check
The�F30�has�an�engine�oil�level�check.�Only�the�following�messages�can�be�displayed�while�the�vehicle
is�being�driven:

• Engine�oil�level�OK
• Engine�oil�at�minimum.�Top�up�with�1�liter�engine�oil.
• Engine�oil�level�below�minimum.�Top�up�with�1�liter�of�oil.

9
F30�Powertrain
2.�Engines
2.3.1.�Detailed�measurement
Prerequisites:

• Vehicle�standing�on�a�level�road�with�the�engine�running�at�normal�at�operating�temperature
• Manual�gearbox:�gearshift�lever�in�neutral,�clutch�and�accelerator�pedals�not�pressed
• Automatic�transmission:�selector�lever�in�position�N�or�P�and�accelerator�pedal�not�pressed.

Measurement�must�be�started�from�the�Vehicle�Information�menu�and�takes�roughly�one�minute,�in�the
course�of�which�the�idle�speed�is�automatically�increased�slightly.�The�engine�oil�level�is�then�indicated
on�a�scale.

2.4.�Engine�identification

2.4.1.�Engine�designation
In�the�technical�documentation,�the�engine�designation�is�used�to�ensure�unambiguous�identification
of�the�engine.�However,�an�abbreviated�engine�designation�(e.g.�N20)�is�often�used�which�only�allows
the�engine�type�classification.

Posi- Meaning Index Explanation


tion
1 Engine�developer M,�N BMW�Group
P BMW�M�Sport
S BMW�M�GmbH
W Bought-in�engines
2 Engine�type 1 4-cylinder�in-line�engine�(e.g.�N12)
2 4-cylinder�in-line�engine�(e.g.�N20)
4 4-cylinder�in-line�engine�(e.g.�N43)
5 6-cylinder�in-line�engine�(e.g.�N53)
6 V8�engine�(e.g.�N63)
7 V12�engine�(e.g.�N73)
8 V10�engine�(e.g.�S85)
3 Change�to�the�basic�engine�con- 0 Basic�engine
cept 1�–�9 Changes,�e.g.�combustion�process
4 Working�method�or�fuel�type�and B gasoline,�longitudinally�mounted
possibly�installation�position D Diesel,�longitudinally�mounted
H Hydrogen

10
F30�Powertrain
2.�Engines
Posi- Meaning Index Explanation
tion
5 Capacity�in�liters 1 1�liters
6 Displacement�in�1/10�liter 8 0.8�liters
equals�1.8�liters
7 Performance�class K Lowest
U Lower
M Middle
O Upper�(standard)
T Top
S Super
8 Revision�relevant�to�approval 0 New�development
1�–�9 Redesign

2.4.2.�Engine�identification
The�engines�have�an�identification�mark�on�the�crankcase�to�ensure�unambiguous�identification�and
classification.�This�engine�identification�is�also�necessary�for�approval�by�government�authorities.

With�the�N55�engine,�this�identification�has�been�subject�to�a�further�development,�with�the�previous
eight�positions�being�reduced�to�seven.�The�engine�number�can�be�found�on�the�engine�below�the�en-
gine�identification.�This�consecutive�number,�in�conjunction�with�the�engine�identification,�permits�un-
ambiguous�identification�of�each�individual�engine.

Posi- Meaning Index Explanation


tion
1 Engine�developer M,�N BMW�Group
P BMW�M�Sport
S BMW�M�GmbH
W Bought-in�engines
2 Engine�type 1 4-cylinder�in-line�engine�(e.g.�N12)
2 4-cylinder�in-line�engine�(e.g.�N20)
4 4-cylinder�in-line�engine�(e.g.�N43)
5 6-cylinder�in-line�engine�(e.g.�N53)
6 V8�engine�(e.g.�N63)
7 V12�engine�(e.g.�N73)
8 V10�engine�(e.g.�S85)
3 Change�to�the�basic�engine�con- 0 Basic�engine
cept 1�–�9 Changes,�e.g.�combustion�process
4 Working�method�or�fuel�type�and B gasoline,�longitudinally�mounted
possibly�installation�position D Diesel,�longitudinally�mounted
H Hydrogen
5 Capacity�in�liters 1 1�liters
6 Displacement�in�1/10�liter 8 0.8�liters
equals�1.8�liters
7 Type�approval�matters A Standard
(changes�which�require�a�new B�–�Z as�required,�e.g.�research�octane�num-
type�approval) ber 87

11
F30�Powertrain
3.�Fuel�Supply
3.1.�Gasoline

3.1.1.�System�overview

F30 fuel�tank�for�gasoline�engine

12
F30�Powertrain
3.�Fuel�Supply

F30 fuel�tank�for�gasoline�engine�(European�version)

Index Explanation
A Fuel�filler�cap
B Overpressure�protection�function�(in�the�fuel�filler�cap)
C Non-return�valve
D Surge�tank
E Fuel�tank
F Delivery�module
G Lever�sensor

13
F30�Powertrain
3.�Fuel�Supply
Index Explanation
H Service�vent�valve
I Refuelling�ventilation�valve�with�fuel�tank�overfill�protection�facility
J Maximum�fill�level�(limited�by�refuelling�ventilation�valve)
K Non-return�valve�(only�in�US�version)
L Carbon�canister
M Opening�to�environment
N Tank�vent�valve�(on�engine)
O Purge�air�line
P Liquid�trap
Q Fuel�tank�overfill�protection�facility
1 First�fill�valve�and�surge�tank�inlet
2 Suction�strainer
3 Electric�fuel�pump
4 Non-return�valve�(pressure�holding�function,�delivery�pressure)
5 Pressure-limiting�valve
6 Fuel�filter
7 Pressure�regulator
8 Feed�line
9 Suction�jet�pump
10 Intake�pipe�with�coarse�filter�(suction�jet�pump�transfer)
11 Pressure�control�valve�(for�suction�jet�pump)
12 Electronic�fuel�pump�control�EKPS

3.1.2.�Fuel�delivery
For�vehicles�with�N20�or�N55�engine�the�fuel�tank�has�a�volume�of�60�liters.�It�is�designed�as�a�saddle
tank�on�account�of�the�installation�area�in�the�vehicle.�The�fuel�supply�system�has�a�so-called�delivery
unit�and�a�sensor�unit.�The�delivery�unit�is�accommodated�in�the�right�half,�and�the�sensor�unit�in�the
left�half�of�the�fuel�tank.�The�first�fill�valve�(1)�ensures�that�fuel�is�introduced�into�the�surge�tank�during
refuelling�when�the�surge�tank�is�completely�empty.�It�also�acts�as�an�inlet,�in�that�there�is�no�active�fill-
ing�of�the�surge�tank.

The�fuel�flows�via�the�suction�strainer�(2)�to�the�electric�fuel�pump�(3)�with�non-return�valve�(4)�and
pressure�limiting�valve�(5).�It�flows�further�via�the�fuel�filter�(6)�with�pressure�regulator�(7)�to�the�feed
line�(8).�The�electric�fuel�pump�sits�in�the�surge�tank�and�is�adjusted�via�the�electronic�fuel�pump�con-
trol�unit�EKPS�(12).�The�delivery�pressure�is�configured�at�5.8 bar.

The�suction�jet�pump (9)�conveys�the�fuel�via�an�additional�line�from�the�left�half�of�the�fuel�tank�to�the
surge�tank.�The�location�of�the�suction�jet�pump (9)�in�the�surge�tank�is�new.

14
F30�Powertrain
3.�Fuel�Supply
When�the�engine�is�switched�off,�the�delivery�pressure�is�maintained�for�a�certain�amount�of�time�on
account�of�the�hot-start�response.�The�feed�line�cannot�run�dry,�even�after�the�dwell�time,�because�air
cannot�get�in�with�the�system�being�airtight.�The�non-return�valve�(4)�prevents�the�fuel�tank�from�leak-
ing�in�the�event�of�damage�to�the�lines�on�the�engine�or�underbody.

3.1.3.�Tank�ventilation�system
An�overpressure�protection�function�(B)�is�integrated�in�the�fuel�filler�cap�(A).�The�overpressure�pro-
tection�function�ensures,�in�the�event�of�a�problem�with�the�tank�ventilation�system,�that�any�excess
pressure�that�forms�can�escape�and�the�fuel�tank�is�not�damaged.�A�non-return�valve�(C)�is�located�at
the�end�of�the�fuel�filler�neck.�The�non-return�valve�prevents�fuel�from�sloshing�back�into�the�fuel�filler
neck.�The�non-return�valve�is�closed�by�a�spring�so�that�it�is�fluid-tight.

The�components�in�the�fuel�tank�are�accessible�through�the�service�opening�on�the�right,�which�is�an
integral�part�of�the�delivery�module�(F).

The�fuel�level�is�detected�via�the�two�lever�sensors�(G).

The�surge�tank�(D)�ensures�that�enough�fuel�is�always�available�to�the�electric�fuel�pump�(3)�for�deliv-
ery.�The�surge�tank�is�also�an�integral�part�of�the�delivery�module�and�can�thus�be�changed.

The�refuelling�ventilation�valve�with�fuel�tank�overfill�protection�facility�(I)�is�situated�in�a�high�position.
The�valve�closes�if�the�fill�level�reaches�this�height�during�refuelling.�The�air�can�no�longer�escape�fast
enough�from�the�fuel�tank,�thereby�causing�the�fuel�in�the�filler�pipe�to�rise�and�the�fuel�pump�nozzle�to
cut�out.

Ventilation�is�effected�during�operation�while�the�refuelling�ventilation�valve�is�closed�via�the�service
vent�valves�(H).�They�have�a�smaller�opening�diameter�they�alone�would�not�allow�the�air�to�escape�fast
enough�from�the�fuel�tank�during�refuelling.�The�service�vent�valves�are�arranged�in�such�a�way�that
ventilation�is�also�possible�when�the�vehicle�is�at�an�inclination�of�18°.

The�integrated�fuel�tank�overfill�protection�facility�is�provided�by�a�ball,�which�closes�the�vent�hole�as
a�result�of�its�own�weight.�A�fuel�tank�overfill�protection�facility�is�necessary�to�safeguard�the�compen-
sation�volume�in�the�tank.�When�the�refuelling�ventilation�valve�has�closed,�in�order�to�guarantee�the
compensating�volume�maintained�in�the�tank�an�overpressure�is�built�up�in�the�tank�by�the�integrated
fuel�tank�overfill�protection�facility.�This�overpressure�causes�the�fuel�level�in�the�fuel�filler�pipe�to�rise
and�thus�the�fuel�pump�nozzle�to�cut�out.

During�operation�the�pressure�can�rise�due�to�the�temperature�increase.�If�the�pressure�in�the�fuel�tank
(fill�level�above�the�service�vent�valves)�reaches�approx.�30�mbar�above�the�ambient�pressure,�the�ball�is
lifted�and�the�pressure�can�escape�via�the�liquid�trap�(P).�Entrained�fuel�is�retained�in�the�liquid�trap�and
returned�to�the�tank.�In�this�way,�ventilation�is�possible�even�when�the�fuel�tank�is�full�without�the�risk�of
overfilling.

15
F30�Powertrain
4.�Automatic�Start/Stop�II�(MSA�II)
The�F30�328i�(N20),�335i�(N55)�are�available�with�the�MSA�II�system�(as�standard�equipment)�with�both
the�manual�and�automatic�8�speed�transmission.

MSA�II�system�highlights:

• Air�conditioning�function�is�enhanced�with�the�cold�storage�evaporator.
• The�hydraulic�pressure�accumulator�allows�MSA�II�to�operate�with�automatic�transmissions.
• Driver�presence�detection�via�driver's�seat�belt�and�driver's�door�switch.

MSA�II�System�Components

4.1.�System�Overview

4.1.1.�Automatic�start/stop�function�-�Manual�transmission
When�the�car�is�stopped�and�the�driver�engages�neutral�and�releases�the�clutch�pedal,�the�automatic
start/stop�function�switches�the�engine�off.�This�means�that�the�vehicle�does�not�use�any�fuel�when�it�is
at�a�standstill.�When�the�driver�depresses�the�clutch�pedal�again,�the�engine�is�automatically�restarted
and�the�driver�can�continue�driving.

4.1.2.�Automatic�start/stop�function�-�Automatic�transmission
The�automatic�engine�start-stop�function�switches�off�the�engine�when�the�vehicle�is�brought�to�a
standstill,�the�selector�lever�remains�in�the�D�position,�and�the�driver�depresses�the�brake�pedal�to�hold
the�vehicle�at�a�standstill.�This�means�that�the�car�does�not�use�any�fuel�when�it�is�at�a�standstill.�When
the�driver�releases�the�brake�pedal�again,�the�engine�is�automatically�restarted�and�the�driver�can�con-
tinue�driving.

The�description�that�follows�therefore�deals�specifically�with�the�automatic�start/stop�function�in�con-
junction�with�the�automatic�transmission.

16
F30�Powertrain
4.�Automatic�Start/Stop�II�(MSA�II)

The�engine�will�NOT�automatically�turn�OFF�if:

• Outside�temperature�below�37.4˚F.
• Outside�temperature�above�95˚F.
• Vehicle�interior�is�not�yet�warmed�up�or�cooled�down.
• Engine�is�not�yet�warmed�up.
• Vehicle�battery�state�of�charge�very�low.
• After�vehicle�was�driven�in�reverse.
• Steering�wheel�operated�after�vehicle�stopped.
• Stop&Go�Traffic.
• GWS�selector�in�Sport/Manual�mode.

If�MSA�is�active�(ENGINE�OFF),�the�engine�will�be�turned�ON�automatically�if:

• Interior�temperature�cannot�be�maintained�(cooling�and�heating).
• Windshield�fogging.
• Vehicle�battery�state�of�charge�drops�below�a�threshold.
• Steering�wheel�input�is�detected.
• Change�gear�lever�position�from�D�to�N;�D�to�M/S;�P�to�D.
• The�accelerator�and�the�brake�pedal�are�pressed�at�the�same�time.
• ECO�PRO�mode�activated.

4.1.3.�DC/DC�converter
The�higher�frequency�of�starting�operations�in�vehicles�with�the�automatic�start/stop�function�can�lead
to�voltage�dips�in�the�vehicle�electrical�system.�One�DC/DC�converter�is�installed�in�order�to�protect
specific�voltage-sensitive�components�(depending�on�the�vehicle�equipment).

The�DC/DC�converter�supplies�a�constant�voltage�to�the�30B_DC/DC�terminals,�also�during�the�start-
ing�operation.

A�DC/DC�converter�is�installed�only�if�the�following�options�are�installed:

• Harmon�Kardon�Surround�Sound�System�(SA�688)
• Navigation�system�(optional�609)

Note:�For�a�detailed�explanation�of�how�the�DC/DC�converter�operates�refer�to�the�MSA�I�sec-
tion�of�the�ST1112�training�material.

17
F30�Powertrain
4.�Automatic�Start/Stop�II�(MSA�II)
4.2.�Automatic�mode
The�automatic�start/stop�function�is�ready�for�operation�following�every�engine�start.

The�function�is�activated�once�the�vehicle�reaches�a�specific�speed:

• Vehicles�with�manual�transmission:�>�5�km/h/3�mph.
• Vehicles�with�automatic�transmission:�>�9�km/h/5�mph.

The�driver�presence�detection�via�the�seat�belt�buckle�switch�and�also�via�the�door�contact�has�been
introduced�as�a�new�feature�of�MSA�II.

When�the�driver�leaves�the�vehicle,�the�automatic�start/stop�function�is�deactivated,�in�order�to�prevent
the�engine�from�starting�automatically.

The�MSA�function�is�always�reactivated�if:

• the�driver's�seat�belt�is�fastened�and�the�vehicle�is�travelling�at�a�speed�of�>�5�km/h/3�mph
• the�driver's�door�is�closed�and�the�vehicle�is�travelling�at�a�speed�of�>�5�km/h/3�mph*.

*�>�9�km/h/5�mph�-�vehicles�with�automatic�transmission

The�prerequisites�for�deactivation�of�the�automatic�start/stop�function�vary,�depending�on�which
switching�mode�the�seatbelt�buckle�switch�and�door�contact�are�in�when�the�automatic�start/stop�func-
tion�is�activated:

Status�during�activation�of�automatic Prerequisites�for�deactivation�of�automatic
start/stop�function start/stop�function

• The�driver's�seat�belt�is�fastened. The�driver�unfastens�the�seat�belt�buckle�and
opens�driver's�door.
• The�driver's�door�is�closed.

• The�driver's�seat�belt�is�not�fastened. The�driver�opens�the�driver's�door.

• The�driver's�door�is�closed.

• The�driver's�seat�belt�is�fastened. The�driver�unfastens�the�seat�belt�buckle.

• The�driver's�door�is�opened.

The�automatic�start/stop�function�is�reactivated�if:

• the�seat�belt�buckle�is�fastened�and/or�the�driver's�door�is�closed�and�the�engine�has�been
started
• the�seat�belt�buckle�is�fastened�and/or�the�driver's�door�is�closed�and�the�vehicle�is�travelling�at
a�speed�of�>�5�km/h/3mph*.

*�>�9�km/h/5mph�-�vehicles�with�automatic�transmission

18
F30�Powertrain
4.�Automatic�Start/Stop�II�(MSA�II)
4.2.1.�Driving
The�purpose�of�the�automatic�start/stop�function�is�to�switch�the�engine�off�when�the�vehicle�is�at�a
standstill.�As�long�as�the�vehicle�is�in�motion�the�driver�will�not�be�aware�of�the�automatic�start/stop
function.

Index Explanation
1 Vehicle�moving
2 Selector�lever�in�drive�position�D,�driver�operates�accelerator�pedal
3 Engine�running,�the�driving�situation�is�reflected�by�the�engine�speed�display
and�fuel�consumption�display

4.2.2.�Stopping
From�the�driver's�point�of�view,�the�stopping�process�with�subsequent�engine�stop�is�as�follows:

Index Explanation
1 Vehicle�slows�to�a�standstill,�e.g.�at�a�red�light
2 Selector�lever�remains�in�the�"D"�drive�position,�driver�depresses�the�brake
pedal�to�decelerate�and�hold�the�vehicle�at�a�standstill
3 The�engine�is�switched�off�after�roughly�1�second,�"0"�engine�speed�will�be
displayed�on�the�tachometer�with�the�needle�reading�“Ready”.

19
F30�Powertrain
4.�Automatic�Start/Stop�II�(MSA�II)
In�the�situation�depicted�above�the�driver�holds�the�car�at�a�standstill�by�depressing�the�brake�pedal.

Alternatively,�the�driver�can�select�selector�lever�position�"P"�and�release�the�brake�pedal.�The�engine
remains�switched�off.�If�then�the�drive�position�"D"�is�subsequently�engaged,�the�engine�starts�without
delay.

4.2.3.�Driving�off
The�driver�indicates�his�intention�to�drive�off�by�releasing�the�brake�pedal.

If�the�driver�previously�held�the�car�at�a�standstill�by�depressing�the�brake�pedal,�the�engine�starts�as
soon�as�the�driver�releases�the�brake�pedal.

Index Explanation
1 Driver�wishes�to�continue�the�journey�(e.g.�green�light)
2 The�selector�lever�remains�in�drive�position�"D",�driver�releases�the�brake�pedal
3 Engine�is�started,�revolution�counter�and�fuel�consumption�display�revert�back
to�normal�to�reflect�the�driving�situation

If�the�driver�moves�the�selector�lever�into�position�"P"�after�the�engine�was�switched�off�automatically,
the�engine�starts�automatically�if�the�selector�lever�is�now�moved�to�position�"D".

During�this�process,�the�automatic�engine�start�is�not�activated�automatically�via�a�signal�from�the
brake�light�switch,�but�by�the�DSC�control�unit�that�monitors�the�brake�pressure.

4.2.4.�Establishing�start-up�readiness
If�the�driver�wants�to�start�the�engine�but�not�yet�drive�off,�he�can�establish�start-up�readiness�by:

• Pressing�the�brake�pedal�briefly,�applying�more�force
• Releasing�the�brake�pedal�slightly

Both�of�these�actions�will�prompt�the�engine�to�start�automatically.

20
F30�Powertrain
4.�Automatic�Start/Stop�II�(MSA�II)
4.2.5.�Automatic�hold
If�the�driver�has�activated�the�"Automatic�Hold"�function,�he/she�can�also�release�the�brake�pedal�once
the�vehicle�has�come�to�a�standstill.�The�automatic�start/stop�function�also�switches�the�engine�off�in
this�case.�The�car�is�held�at�a�standstill�by�the�DSC�hydraulics.�The�engine�only�starts�if�the�driver�oper-
ates�the�accelerator�pedal.

4.2.6.�Preventing�automatic�engine�shutdown
In�order�to�be�able�to�drive�off�quickly,�e.g.�at�a�crossing,�the�automatic�engine�shutdown�can�be�ac-
tively�prevented�if�within�one�second�after�the�vehicle�comes�to�a�standstill�the�brake�pedal�is�pressed
briefly,�applying�more�force�than�usual,�then�immediately�held�with�the�usual�brake�pedal�force.

Index Explanation
1 Vehicle�slows�to�a�standstill,�e.g.�at�a�red�light
2 Immediately�after�the�vehicle�comes�to�a�standstill�(within�one�second)
the�brake�pedal�is�pressed�briefly,�applying�more�force�than�usual,�then
immediately�held�with�the�usual�brake�pedal�force
3 The�engine�continues�running

4.3.�Switch-off�inhibitors
Under�certain�conditions�it�is�necessary�to�suppress�the�MSA�function:

• the�vehicle�is�coasting�(vehicles�with�manual�transmission�only)
• the�brake�vacuum�is�too�low�(vehicles�with�manual�transmission�only)
• the�brake�pedal�is�not�pressed�firmly�enough�which�means�the�vehicle�is�detected�as�not�being
held�sufficiently�(vehicles�with�automatic�transmission�only)
• the�vehicle�stops�on�uphill/downhill�gradients�>�12%
• the�steering�angle�is�>�6°
• the�steering�wheel�movement�is�not�yet�complete�(as�otherwise�insufficient�support�will�be
provided�by�the�power�steering�as�a�consequence)

21
F30�Powertrain
4.�Automatic�Start/Stop�II�(MSA�II)
• the�vehicle�was�not�driven�at�a�speed�of�>�5�km/h/3�mph*�following�the�previous�engine�shut-
down
• the�engine�is�not�running�at�idle�speed�(accelerator�pedal�is�being�pressed)
• the�vehicle�is�being�driven�in�reverse
• the�Hill�Descent�Control�(HDC)�has�been�activated
• the�operating�temperature�of�the�engine�is�too�low
• the�carbon�canister�is�being�purged
• the�fuel�grade�is�insufficient
• the�gearbox�adaptation�is�active�(vehicles�with�automatic�transmission�only)
• the�hydraulic�pressure�accumulator�is�not�charged�yet�(vehicles�with�automatic�transmission
only)
• stop-and-go�traffic
• the�state�of�charge�is�too�low
• the�ambient�temperature�is�below�+3�°C/�37.4�°F�(ice�warning)
• the�ambient�temperature�is�above�+35�°C/�95�°F�(with�heating�and�air�conditioning�system
switched�on)
• the�condensation�sensor�of�the�IHKA�detects�fogging�of�the�windshield
• the�heating�and�air�conditioning�system�is�switched�on�but�the�passenger�compartment�has
not�yet�warmed�up�or�cooled�down�to�the�required�temperature
• the�brakes�have�been�applied�via�ABS.

*�>�9�km/h/5�mph�-�vehicles�with�automatic�transmission

4.4.�Switch-on�prompts
Conversely,�it�may�be�necessary�to�start�the�engine�under�the�following�conditions:

• the�vehicle�is�not�sufficiently�held�by�the�released�brake�pedal�(vehicles�with�automatic�trans-
mission�only)
• the�steering�wheel�is�moved
• the�engine�is�not�running�at�idle�speed�(accelerator�pedal�is�being�pressed)
• the�transmission�changes�from�"P"�to�"D";�the�driver�previously�shifted�from�"D"�to�"P"�when
the�engine�was�automatically�switched�off�(vehicles�with�automatic�transmission�only)
• the�transmission�changes�from�"D"�to�"N"�or�"R"�(vehicles�with�automatic�transmission�only)
• the�state�of�charge�is�too�low
• the�ambient�temperature�is�above�+35�°C/95�°F�(with�heating�and�air�conditioning�system
switched�on)
• the�condensation�sensor�of�the�IHKA�detects�fogging�of�the�windshield
• the�evaporator�temperature�is�too�low�to�ensure�sufficient�climate�control.

22
F30�Powertrain
4.�Automatic�Start/Stop�II�(MSA�II)
4.5.�Deactivation
If�a�deactivation�condition�exists,�the�automatic�start/stop�function�is�deactivated.

The�following�scenarios�arise,�depending�on�when�the�deactivation�condition�for�the�automatic�start/
stop�function�occurred:

• the�engine�continues�running�and�is�no�longer�stopped�automatically
• the�engine�was�stopped�automatically�and�starts�once�again�automatically
• the�engine�was�stopped�automatically�and�no�longer�starts�automatically�(the�Check�Control
message�"MSA�off"�appears�-�the�start/stop�button�must�be�operated�in�order�to�the�start�the
engine).

The�following�deactivation�conditions�may�occur:

• the�driver's�absence�has�been�detected
• the�engine�did�not�start�when�starting
• the�engine�compartment�lid�is�unlocked
• a�fault�related�to�the�automatic�start/stop�function�has�been�detected�at�the�engine,�transmis-
sion�or�components�involved�in�the�automatic�start/stop�function
• the�bus�communication�is�faulty
• the�automatic�start/stop�function�has�been�deactivated�via�the�automatic�start/stop�function
button
• the�automatic�start/stop�function�was�deactivated�via�the�diagnosis�system
• the�vehicle�is�in�transport�mode
• the�engine�was�stalled.

The�individual�statuses�can�be�read�out�using�the�diagnosis�system.

An�easy-to-follow�example�of�a�deactivation�with�subsequent�switch-on�request:

• the�automatic�start/stop�function�is�deactivated�via�the�automatic�start/stop�function�button�in
the�automatic�engine�shutdown�phase
• as�a�consequence,�the�engine�starts�automatically
• after�this,�no�further�automatic�engine�shutdowns�occur,�the�automatic�start/stop�function�re-
mains�deactivated.

23
F30�Powertrain
4.�Automatic�Start/Stop�II�(MSA�II)
4.5.1.�Deactivation�via�automatic�start/stop�function�button

F30�automatic�start/stop�function�button�location

The�automatic�start/stop�function�can�be�deactivated�manually�via�the�automatic�start/stop�function
button�(1).�The�LED�in�the�button�lights�up�when�the�function�is�deactivated.�The�automatic�start/stop
function�is�reactivated�each�time�the�engine�is�restarted.

4.6.�Hydraulic�pressure�accumulator
When�the�automatic�start/stop�function�is�activated�the�engine�may�shut�off�once�the�vehicle�is�at�a
standstill,�the�engine�restarts�automatically�as�the�driver�releases�the�brake�to�drive�off.

In�these�engine�stop�phases�the�transmission�oil�pump�is�not�driven,�thus�the�fluid�pressure�supply
ceases,�the�gearshift�elements�open,�and�there�is�no�longer�a�transfer�of�power�in�the�transmission.
Maximum�transmission�oil�pressure�is�required�in�order�for�the�drive�off�process�to�take�place�dynami-
cally�without�a�noticeable�delay�when�the�automatic�start/stop�function�is�activated.�However,�the�me-
chanically�driven�transmission�oil�pump�cannot�build�up�pressure�quickly�enough�while�the�engine�is
starting.

A�hydraulic�pressure�accumulator�is�therefore�used�in�the�automatic�transmission�for�this�purpose�(as
with�F04).�With�the�volume�of�transmission�fluid�stored�in�the�hydraulic�pressure�accumulator,�the�shift
elements�can�be�filled�as�soon�as�the�engine�is�started,�even�before�the�transmission�oil�pump�has�built
up�the�necessary�pressure�to�drive�off.

24
F30�Powertrain
4.�Automatic�Start/Stop�II�(MSA�II)

Variation�in�transmission�oil�pressure�over�time�at�engine�start

Index Explanation
1 Transmission�oil�pressure
2 Nominal�value�of�the�transmission�oil�pressure�which�is�required�to
hydraulically�actuate�the�shift�elements
3 Characteristic�of�the�transmission�oil�pressure�with�hydraulic�pressure
accumulator
4 Characteristic�of�the�transmission�oil�pressure�without�hydraulic�pressure
accumulator
5 Point�at�which�the�automatic�transmission�with�hydraulic�pressure
accumulator�is�ready�to�drive�off
6 Point�at�which�the�automatic�transmission�without�hydraulic�pressure
accumulator�is�ready�to�drive�off
7 Time

4.6.1.�Installation�location
The�hydraulic�pressure�accumulator�is�integrated�in�the�automatic�transmission.�It�is�located�in�the
transmission�oil�sump,�in�the�direction�of�travel�behind�the�mechatronics�module.

The�hydraulic�pressure�accumulator�can�be�replaced�as�a�separate�component.

25
F30�Powertrain
4.�Automatic�Start/Stop�II�(MSA�II)

8–speed�automatic�transmission�cutaway

Index Explanation
1 Transmission�housing
2 Transmission�oil�sump
3 Hydraulic�pressure�accumulator

4.6.2.�Design

Design�of�hydraulic�pressure�accumulator

Index Explanation
1 Connection�to�hydraulic�system�of�automatic�transmission
2 Throttle�and�non-return�valve
3 Hydraulic�piston
4 Hydraulic�cylinder
5 Coil�spring
6 Electromechanical�latch�mechanism

26
F30�Powertrain
4.�Automatic�Start/Stop�II�(MSA�II)
The�hydraulic�pressure�accumulator�consists�of�a�hydraulic�cylinder.�This�cylinder�contains�a�piston
that�moves�against�the�force�of�a�spring.�The�piston�can�be�electromechanically�locked�in�the�ten-
sioned�end�position.�The�electromechanical�latch�mechanism�incorporates�locking�balls,�a�tension
spring,�a�release�spring,�and�a�solenoid.

The�solenoid�is�activated�and�deactivated�by�the�EGS.�A�corresponding�wiring�harness�to�the�hydraulic
pressure�accumulator�is�laid�inside�the�transmission�housing.

The�cylinder�of�the�hydraulic�pressure�accumulator�is�connected�to�the�transmission's�hydraulic�sys-
tem�directly�(without�any�valves�between�them).�The�hydraulic�pressure�accumulator�in�fact�contains
an�element�which�functions�as�a�throttle�and�non-return�valve.�The�throttle�limits�the�volumetric�flow�of
the�fluid�while�the�hydraulic�pressure�accumulator�is�being�filled.�In�general,�this�filling�operation�corre-
sponds�to�the�charging�operation�of�the�accumulator�which�is�why�the�expressions�"charging"�or�"dis-
charging"�are�used�in�this�description.

The�non-return�valve�ensures�that�the�transmission�fluid�flows�into�the�hydraulic�pressure�accumula-
tor�via�the�throttle�during�charging.�The�transmission�fluid�does�not�flow�through�the�throttle�during�the
discharging�process,�the�non-return�valve�now�opens�instead�to�allow�an�unrestricted�flow�of�transmis-
sion�fluid�back�into�the�hydraulic�system.�The�purpose�of�the�non-return�valve�is�therefore�not�to�main-
tain�the�pressure�in�the�charged�state.�In�the�charged�state,�the�transmission�fluid�in�the�hydraulic�pres-
sure�accumulator�is�depressurized�and�the�energy�is�stored�in�the�tensioned�spring.

4.6.3.�Charging
The�hydraulic�pressure�accumulator�is�therefore�always�charged�when�the�engine�is�running�and�the
transmission�oil�pump�is�working.�During�charging�transmission�fluid�flows�through�the�throttle�into�the
hydraulic�cylinder.�In�the�process�only�a�small�volume�is�drawn�from�the�hydraulic�system�so�that�the
pressure�level�does�not�drop�unintentionally.�The�transmission�fluid�pushes�on�the�piston�which�acts
against�the�spring�force�increasing�the�tension�on�the�spring.

27
F30�Powertrain
4.�Automatic�Start/Stop�II�(MSA�II)

Charging�of�the�hydraulic�pressure�accumulator

Index Explanation
A Discharged�state�-�charging�procedure�starts
B Charged�state�-�charging�procedure�ends
1 Transmission�fluid�flows�from�the�hydraulic�system�of�the�automatic
transmission�into�the�hydraulic�pressure�accumulator
2 Volumetric�flow�of�the�transmission�fluid�is�limited�by�the�throttle
3 The�transmission�fluid�exerts�force�on�the�piston�which�moves�and�tensions
the�coil�spring
4 Transmission�fluid�exerts�a�force�on�the�piston�so�that�it�is�held�in�the
"charged"�end�position

At�the�end�of�the�charging�process�the�piston�travels�past�the�latch�mechanism�(locking�balls)�until�it
reaches�the�end/stop.�The�transmission�fluid�pressure�holds�the�piston�against�the�spring�force�in�the
end�position.

The�latch�mechanism�does�not�engage�yet.�The�hydraulic�pressure�accumulator�is�fully�charged�in�this
end�position.

28
F30�Powertrain
4.�Automatic�Start/Stop�II�(MSA�II)
4.6.4.�Locking
When�the�engine�is�switched�off�(while�the�hydraulic�pressure�accumulator�is�charged)�the�transmis-
sion�oil�pressure�drops�causing�the�spring�to�be�released�slightly.�This�allows�the�piston�to�slide�into
the�locked�position�where�locking�balls�hold�the�piston�mechanically�in�place.

The�now�energized�solenoid�holds�the�inner�slide�in�place�so�that�the�locking�balls�cannot�enter�the
channels�designated�for�releasing�the�lock.�The�electric�power�used�for�this�is�low�(<�10�W)�and�is�only
required�while�the�engine�is�off.�Therefor�the�additional�energy�consumption�of�the�hydraulic�pressure
accumulator�viewed�over�an�entire�driving�cycle�is�very�low.

Charged�and�locked�state�of�the�hydraulic�pressure�accumulator

Index Explanation
1 Mechanical�latch�mechanism
2 Solenoid�activated

4.6.5.�Discharging
When�the�engine�is�started,�as�the�driver�wants�to�drive�off,�the�gearshift�elements�in�the�automatic
transmission�for�driving�off�must�be�engaged.�The�hydraulic�pressure�accumulator�supplies�the�trans-
mission�fluid�pressure�required�for�this�during�the�discharging�process.

As�the�solenoid�is�deactivated�for�discharging�the�inner�slide�(driven�by�a�small�spring)�moves�in�the�di-
rection�of�the�locking�balls.�This�allows�the�balls�to�enter�the�channels�designated�for�releasing�the�lock
which�in�turn�releases�the�piston.�The�spring�(compressed�during�the�charging�process)�exerts�force
on�the�piston�which�pressurizes�the�transmission�fluid�in�the�cylinder.

29
F30�Powertrain
4.�Automatic�Start/Stop�II�(MSA�II)

Discharging�of�the�hydraulic�pressure�accumulator

Index Explanation
1 The�large�spring�pushes�on�the�piston,�which�in�turn,�forces�the�transmission
fluid�out�of�the�hydraulic�cylinder
2 Transmission�fluid�can�now�flow�through�the�throttle�and�the�opened�non-
return�valve
3 Transmission�fluid�flows�from�the�hydraulic�pressure�accumulator�back�into�the
hydraulic�system�of�the�automatic�transmission

The�piston�moves�(in�the�graphic�to�the�left)�and�thereby�pushes�the�transmission�fluid�back�into�the
transmission�hydraulic�system.�The�transmission�fluid�exits�the�cylinder�through�the�now�opened�non-
return�valve�and�throttle.

The�oil�volume�forced�back�into�the�hydraulic�system�of�the�transmission�is�sufficient�to�engage�the
gearshift�elements�needed�for�the�driving�off�process.�This�system�is�designed�to�provide�the�initial�flu-
id�pressure�needed�for�the�transmission�to�go�into�“Gear”�at�the�exact�moment�just�before�the�engine
is�started.�As�soon�as�the�engine�is�started,�the�transmission�fluid�pressure�is�then�again�generated�by
the�transmission�oil�pump�and�the�entire�process�is�restarted.

4.7.�Service�information
For�information�on�servicing/diagnosing�the�MSA�II�system,�refer�to�ST1112�Automatic�Start/Stop
(MSA)�training�material.

30
F30�Powertrain
5.�Manual�Gearboxes
In�the�F30�all�the�engine�variants�are�equipped�as�standard�with�manual�gearboxes.

5.1.�Designation
The�transmission�designation�in�the�technical�documentation�allows�it�to�be�uniquely�identified.�In�fre-
quent�cases,�however,�only�a�short�designation�is�used.�such�as�I,�K,�or�G�is�used�to�identify�the�trans-
mission.�For�the�correct�designation,�refer�to�the�following�table.

Position Meaning Index Explanation


1 Designation G Transmission
2 Type�of�transmission S Manual�gearbox
3 Number�of�gears 1�–�9 Number�of�forward�gears
4 Type�of�transmission - Manual�gearbox
X All-wheel�drive�vehicle�with�manual�transmis-
S sion
W Sequential�Manual�Gearbox�SMG
D All-wheel�drive�vehicle�with�sequential�manual
Y transmission
Twin-clutch�gearbox
All-wheel�drive�vehicle�with�twin-clutch�gear-
box
5�+�6 Transmission�type 17 I�gearbox
26 D�transmission
37 H�transmission
45 K�transmission
53 G�transmission
7 Gear�train B gasoline�engine�ratio
D Diesel�engine�ratio�(w)
S Sport�ratio
P gasoline�engine�ratio,�revised
8 Manufacturer G Getrag
J Jatco
R General�Motors�Powertrain
Z Zahnradfabrik�Friedrichshafen
H In-house�part

5.2.�Variants
Model Engine Transmission�designation
BMW�328i N20B20O0 GS6-17BG I-350�Turbo�transmis-
sion
BMW�335i N55B30M0 GS6-45BZ K�transmission

31
F30�Powertrain
5.�Manual�Gearboxes
5.3.�I�gearbox

F30�I�gearbox

Index Explanation
1 GS6-17BG�gearbox
2 Gearshift�rod
3 Gearshift�arm
4 Gaiter

The�I�transmission�is�a�6-speed�manual�gearbox�with�two-piece�die-cast�aluminium�housing.�The�dif-
ferent�engine�applications�can�be�covered�with�a�variation�of�the�clutch�housing.�The�main�housing�is
the�same�for�all�variants.

For�the�I�Turbo�transmission,�the�transmission�ratio�was�adapted�to�the�power�characteristics�of�the
turbo�engines.�In�the�F30�the�I�Turbo�transmission�is�used.�I–350�turbo�transmission�in�the�BMW 328i.

5.3.1.�I�Turbo�manual�gearbox

New�features/changes

• Gear�set�optimized�for�turbo�engines
• Improvement�to�behavior�of�vehicle�in�the�event�of�a�crash�through�reinforced�transmission
mounting�and�a�new�gear�safety�bearing
• Clutch�housing�extended�to�the�fixture�of�the�centrifugal�pendulum�in�the�N20�engine
• Screw�connection�on�engine�standardized�to�M10�thread
• Ground�connection�to�the�body�for�the�first�time.

32
F30�Powertrain
5.�Manual�Gearboxes
Gears

To�minimize�the�gearbox�noise�the�running�gears�have�been�designed�as�high�gears�with�a�particularly
large�helix�angle�and�have�been�optimized�in�terms�of�their�coverage.

Bearings

The�main�bearings�have�a�fundamental�influence�on�the�operational�smoothness�and�the�switching
precision�of�the�transmission.�Play�changes�due�to�temperature�fluctuations�or�an�increase�in�the�play
during�operating�time�are�avoided�by�the�exclusive�use�of�grooved�ball�bearings�and�roller�bearings.

The�main�bearings�are�designed�as�so-called�"clean�bearings".�They�are�protected�against�dirt�with�a
cover�and�are�thus�oil-permeable.�The�operating�safety�is�therefore�increased�and�the�use�of�smaller,
lighter�bearings�is�possible.

Lubrication

The�use�of�a�life-time�oil�filling�(capacity�1.4 liter).�Together�with�the�dirt-resistance�of�the�bearings,�an
optimal�combination�of�a�long�service�life�with�no�maintenance�is�achieved.

Synchronization

In�the�first�and�second�gear�double�taper�synchronizations�are�used.�All�other�gears�are�designed�as
single�taper�synchronization.

Acoustics

A�very�precise�and�smooth�gearshift�is�achieved�by:

• The�shift�gate�installed�in�the�transmission
• The�low-friction�gearshift�shaft�in�a�ball�sleeve
• The�use�of�gearshift�forks.

The�passive�lock�guarantees�locking�safety�with�optimized�ease�of�movement.

5.3.2.�Technical�data

I-350�Turbo
Transmission�designation GS6-17BG
Maximum�drive�torque [Nm] 350
Transmission�ratio�1st�gear 3.6933
Transmission�ratio�2nd�gear 2.0619
Transmission�ratio�3rd�gear 1.3134
Transmission�ratio�4th�gear 1.0000

33
F30�Powertrain
5.�Manual�Gearboxes
I-350�Turbo
Transmission�ratio�5th�gear 0.8092
Transmission�ratio�6th�gear 0.6771
Transmission�ratio�reverse�gear 3.3484

5.4.�K�transmission

F30�K�gearbox

Index Explanation
1 Gearbox�GS6-45BZ
2 Gearshift�arm
3 Gearshift�rod
4 Gaiter

The�K�transmission�is�a�6-gear�inline�manual�gearbox�in�a�countershaft�design.

Instead�of�the�G�gearbox,�the�smaller,�lighter�and�more�cost-effective�gearbox�can�be�used�in�the
N55B30M0�engine.�The�weight�advantage�is�approx.�11�kg�depending�on�the�engine�application.
The�gearbox's�high�transmission�capability�with�at�the�same�time�small�size�and�weight�is�essentially
achieved�by�intermediate�mounting�of�the�main�shafts�and�a�modified�gear�train�concept.

34
F30�Powertrain
5.�Manual�Gearboxes
5.4.1.�Special�features

• Six-speed�gearbox�with�optimized�transmission�ratios
• Intermediate�bearings
• Dry-sump�lubrication
• Reduction�in�consumption�(approx.�–2%�compared�to�G�manual�gearboxes)
• Reduced�weight�(approx.�–11 kg�compared�to�G�manual�gearboxes)
• Synchromesh�units�with�carbon�friction�linings
• Life-time�oil�filling
• Zero-gear�sensor�for�automatic�engine�start-stop�function.

The�gearshift�quality�is�significantly�improved�by

• The�use�of�a�newly�developed�carbon�friction�lining�on�the�synchromesh�units
• Newly�developed�and�very�low-friction�shift�mechanism
• The�low�drag�losses�of�the�gear�train
• The�minimal�overshift�travel.

To�keep�the�drag�losses�low,�dry-sump�lubrication�is�used�for�the�first�time.�Compared�with�conven-
tional�immersion�lubrication,�this�prevents�the�swash�losses�from�the�movement�of�the�gear�train�in�the
sump�oil.�Further�reduction�of�losses�is�achieved�by�the�friction-optimized�radial�shaft�seals.

5.4.2.�Technical�data

K�transmission
Transmission�designation GS6-45BZ
Maximum�drive�torque [Nm] 470
Wheelbase [mm] 80
Weight�incl.�oil [kg] 43.3
Gearbox�length [mm] 646
Transmission�ratio�1st�gear 4.110
Transmission�ratio�2nd�gear 2.315
Transmission�ratio�3rd�gear 1.542
Transmission�ratio�4th�gear 1.179
Transmission�ratio�5th�gear 1.000
Transmission�ratio�6th�gear 0.846
Transmission�ratio�reverse�gear 3.372

35
F30�Powertrain
5.�Manual�Gearboxes
5.4.3.�Intermediate�bearings
In�countershaft-design�manual�gearboxes�the�main�shaft�is�pressed�away�from�the�countershaft�by�the
gearing�forces.�This�gives�rise�to�a�deviation�of�the�ideal�gearing�contact�pattern,�which�results�in�a�sig-
nificant�deterioration�in�the�strength�of�the�gearing�and�the�acoustics.

The�K�gearbox�therefore�makes�use�of�intermediate�bearings�which�significantly�limit�shaft�bending.�In
this�way,�compared�with�conventional�gearboxes,�higher�torques�can�be�transmitted�and�the�gearing
acoustics�can�be�simultaneously�improved.

5.4.4.�Dry-sump�lubrication
The�lubrication�method�used�in�conventional�manual�gearboxes�is�usually�immersion�lubrication.�The
gear�wheels�on�the�countershaft�are�immersed�into�the�gearbox�oil�and�distribute�it�as�the�gear�train
rotates�in�an�uncontrolled�fashion�through�the�entire�gearbox.�Additional�equipment�such�as�oil�bulk-
heads�or�oil�ways�is�often�required�to�deliver�the�oil�to�the�gearing,�the�bearings�or�the�synchromesh
units.

The�K�gearbox�uses�for�the�first�time�a�dry-sump�lubrication�system,�consisting�of

• Oil�filter
• Oil�pump
• Injection�pipe.

This�system�utilizes�less�energy�than�an�immersion�lubrication�system�to�deliver�lubricating�oil�specif-
ically�to�the�gearing,�the�bearings�and�the�synchromesh�units.�Controlled�oil�routing�also�results�in�im-
proved�temperature�management,�in�that�cooling�air�from�the�underbody�area�is�specifically�directed
into�the�area�of�the�filter�intake�opening.�In�this�way,�the�gearbox�oil�is�subjected�to�continuous�cooling.

The�oil�filter�also�improves�the�oil�quality�and�with�it�the�load�capability�of�the�gearing.

5.4.5.�Synchromesh
Triple-band�synchromesh�units�are�used�in�1st�and�2nd�gears.�Single-band�synchromesh�units�are�in-
stalled�in�the�other�gears.�These�are�equipped�with�a�newly�developed�carbon�friction�lining�for�improv-
ing�gearshift�quality.

5.4.6.�Mating�dimensions
The�mating�dimensions�for�the�gearbox�mounting�have�been�adopted�from�established�series�appli-
cations.�In�this�way,�integration�in�the�vehicle�environment�has�been�significantly�simplified,�since�it�is
possible�to�fall�back�on�existing�peripherals.

36
F30�Powertrain
6.�Automatic�Transmission
The�F30�is�available�in�all�engine�versions�also�with�automatic�transmission.�The�established�GA8HP
8-speed�automatic�transmission�is�always�used.

6.1.�Designation
A�unique�designation�is�used�for�the�transmission�in�the�technical�documentation�so�it�can�be�clearly
identified.�In�frequent�cases,�however,�only�a�short�designation�is�used.�This�short�form�is�used�so�the
transmission�can�be�assigned�to�a�transmission�family.�The�GA8HP�transmission�family,�consisting�of
the�GA8HP45Z,�the�GA8HP70Z�and�the�GA8HP90Z�transmissions�for�example,�are�often�mentioned.

Position Meaning Index Explanation


1 Designation G Transmission
2 Type�of�transmission A Automatic�transmission
3 Number�of�gears 6 Six�forward�gears
8 Eight�forward�gears
4 Type�of�transmission HP Hydraulic�planetary�gear�train
L Designation�of�General�Motors�Powertrain
R Designation�of�General�Motors�Powertrain
5�+�6 Transferable�torque 19 300�Nm�gasoline�engine
26 600�Nm�gasoline�engine
32 720�Nm�gasoline�engine
45�(ZF) 450�Nm�gasoline�engine,�500�Nm�diesel�en-
45�(GMPT) gine
70 350�Nm�gasoline�engine
90 700�Nm�gasoline�engine�and�diesel�engine
390 900�Nm�gasoline�engine
390�Nm,�4th gear�410 Nm,�gasoline�engine
7 Manufacturer G Getrag
J Jatco
R GMPT
Z ZF
H In-house�part

6.2.�Variants
Model Engine Transmission Torque�converter
BMW�328i N20B20O0 GA8HP45Z NW235ZDW
BMW�335i N55B30M0 GA8HP45Z NW235TDD

6.3.�GA8HP45Z�transmission
The�GA8HP�transmission�is�already�familiar�from�being�used�in�many�BMW�models.

There�is�also�a�Sport�Automatic�Transmission�option�available�2TB,�this�includes�shift�paddles�on�the
steering�wheel.

37
F30�Powertrain
6.�Automatic�Transmission
For�a�description�of�the�8-speed�automatic�transmission,�please�refer�to�the�"GA8HP�Automatic�Trans-
mission"�Training�information.

automatic�transmission�GA8HP

6.3.1.�Technical�data

GA8HP45Z
Maximum�power [kW] 250
Maximum�torque [Nm] 450
Maximum�permissible�torque,�1st�-�7th�gear [rpm] 7200
Maximum�permissible�torque,�8th�gear [rpm] 5700
Maximum�permissible�engine�speed,�reverse�gear [rpm] 3500
Transmission�ratio�1st�gear 4.714
Transmission�ratio�2nd�gear 3.143
Transmission�ratio�3rd�gear 2.106
Transmission�ratio�4th�gear 1.667
Transmission�ratio�5th�gear 1.285
Transmission�ratio�6th�gear 1.000

38
F30�Powertrain
6.�Automatic�Transmission
GA8HP45Z
Transmission�ratio�7th�gear 0.839
Transmission�ratio�8th�gear 0.667
Transmission�ratio�reverse�gear 3.295

39
F30�Powertrain
7.�Rear�Axle�Differential
The�rear�axle�differential�for�the�F30�is�a�further�development�of�the�low-friction�rear�axle�differential�al-
ready�familiar�from�the�E90�and�F25.

For�a�description�of�the�rear�axle�differential,�please�refer�to�the�following�Training�Manuals:

• "E90�Complete�Vehicle�Powertrain"�for�the�rear�axle�differential�HAG�168L
• "F25�Powertrain�Complete�Vehicle"�for�the�rear�axle�differential�HAG�188LW�and�the�rear�axle
differential�HAG�215�LW.

F30�rear�axle�differential�HAG�188LW

Special�features

• Reduced�transmission�losses
• Optimized�efficiency�(approx.�1%)�by
- The�use�of�lower-viscosity�oil
- Changing�the�material�used�for�the�radial�shaft�seals�on�the�powertrain
- Optimized�lubrication�of�the�pinion�bearing
- Crown�wheel�welded�to�expansion�tank�housing�(previously�screwed�on).

40
F30�Powertrain
7.�Rear�Axle�Differential
7.1.�Designation
Position Meaning Index Explanation
1�-�3 Type�of�transmission HAG Rear�axle�differential
4�-�6 Overall�size 168/188/215 Diameter�of�crown�wheel�pitch�circle
in�mm
7 Bearing�(internal) L Low-friction�bearing�(angular-contact
ball�bearing)
8 Optimization�stage W Efficiency-optimized

7.2.�Variants
Model Transmission Rear�axle�differen- Gear�ratio�i
tial
BMW�328i GS6-17BG HAG 188LW 3.91
BMW�328i GA8HP45Z HAG 188LW 3.15
BMW�335i GS6-45BZ HAG 215LW 3.23
BMW�335i GA8HP45Z HAG 188LW 3.15

41
F30�Powertrain
8.�Shafts
8.1.�Drive�shafts
A�variant�of�the�drive�shaft�that�is�adapted�to�the�torque�requests�is�available�for�each�engine-gearbox
configuration.

Focal�points�in�the�design�of�the�drive�shafts�in�the�were�the�torque�transfer�and�comfort�requirements
with�regard�to�acoustics�and�vibrations.

The�joints,�shaft�divisions�and�shaft�diameters�have�been�designed�to�prevent�disruptive�noises�or�vi-
brations�being�passed�on�to�the�connection�points�at�the�body.

To�minimize�the�high-frequency�tooth�meshing�noise�of�the�rear�axle�differential,�the�drive�shaft�for�en-
gines�with�a�torque�of�over�270 Nm�are�secured�to�the�rear�axle�differential�with�flexible�discs.�The�drive
shaft�is�always�secured�to�the�gearbox�or�automatic�transmission�using�flexible�discs.

Depending�on�the�engine/gearbox�configuration�the�steel�drive�shaft�is�available�in�different�lengths.�It
is�screwed�to�the�gearbox�or�automatic�transmission,�connected�to�the�rear�axle�differential.

42
F30�Powertrain
8.�Shafts

F30�drive�shaft

Index Explanation
1 Flexible�disc
2 Sliding�piece
3 Universal�joint
4 Crash�function
A Connection�to�rear�axle�differential

43
F30�Powertrain
8.�Shafts
8.1.1.�Variants

Model Transmission Front�connec- Middle�connec- Rear�connec-


tion tion tion
BMW�328i GS6-17BG GS�96M12 KG48 GS�96M10
BMW�328i GA8HP45Z GS�96M12 KG48 GS�96M10
BMW�335i GS6-45BZ GS�105M12 KG60 KFG�Z34
BMW�335i GA8HP45Z GS�105M12 KG48 KFG�Z34

8.1.2.�Crash�function
In�the�event�of�a�head-on�collision,�the�drive�shaft�absorbs�a�portion�of�the�crash�energy.�The�occupant
load�is�thus�reduced�and�the�passive�safety�increased.

The�crash�function�integrated�in�the�front�drive�shaft�pipe�has�been�optimized.�The�spring�force�at
which�the�front�drive�shaft�tube�selectively�deforms�has�once�again�been�reduced.�The�torque�transfer
capability�has�remained�unchanged.

8.2.�Rear�axle�output�shafts
The�output�shafts�for�the�F30�are�designed�as�a�full-length�shafts�and�have�different�overall�lengths�on
account�of�the�rear�axle�differential�being�positioned�on�the�left�and�right�sides.�The�joints�to�the�rear
axle�differential�and�on�the�wheel�side�are�designed�as�journals�and�are�mounted�by�connection.

F30�rear�drive�shaft

8.2.1.�Variants

Model Transmission Rear�axle�differen- Output�shaft


tial
BMW�328i GS6-17BG HAG 188LW VL2600i
BMW�328i GA8HP45Z HAG 188LW EBJ95
BMW�335i GS6-45BZ HAG 215LW VL3300i
BMW�335i GA8HP45Z HAG 188LW VL2600i

44
Bayerische�Motorenwerke�Aktiengesellschaft
Händlerqualifizierung�und�Training
Röntgenstraße�7
85716�Unterschleißheim,�Germany
Technical�training.
Product�information.
F30�Chassis�Dynamics

BMW�Service
General�information

Symbols�used

The�following�symbol�is�used�in�this�document�to�facilitate�better�comprehension�or�to�draw�attention
to�very�important�information:

Contains�important�safety�information�and�information�that�needs�to�be�observed�strictly�in�order�to
guarantee�the�smooth�operation�of�the�system.

Information�status�and�national-market�versions

BMW�Group�vehicles�meet�the�requirements�of�the�highest�safety�and�quality�standards.�Changes�in
requirements�for�environmental�protection,�customer�benefits�and�design�render�necessary�continu-
ous�development�of�systems�and�components.�Consequently,�there�may�be�discrepancies�between
the�contents�of�this�document�and�the�vehicles�available�in�the�training�course.

This�document�basically�relates�to�the�European�version�of�left-hand�drive�vehicles.�Some�operating
elements�or�components�are�arranged�differently�in�right-hand�drive�vehicles�than�shown�in�the�graph-
ics�in�this�document.�Further�differences�may�arise�as�a�result�of�the�equipment�specification�in�specif-
ic�markets�or�countries.

Additional�sources�of�information

Further�information�on�the�individual�topics�can�be�found�in�the�following:

• Owner's�Handbook
• Integrated�Service�Technical�Application.

Contact:�[email protected]

©2011�BMW�AG,�Munich,�Germany

Reprints�of�this�publication�or�its�parts�require�the�written�approval�of�BMW�AG,�Munich

The�information�contained�in�this�document�forms�an�integral�part�of�the�technical�training�of�the�BMW
Group�and�is�intended�for�the�trainer�and�participants�in�the�seminar.�Refer�to�the�latest�relevant�infor-
mation�systems�of�the�BMW�Group�for�any�changes/additions�to�the�technical�data.

Information�status:�September�2011
VH-23/International�Technical�Training
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
Contents
1. Introduction............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 1
1.1. Models..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1
1.2. Driving�dynamics�and�comfort.......................................................................................................................................................... 1
1.3. Bus�overview................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 3

2. Models............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6
2.1. Comparison..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 6

3. Chassis�and�Suspension................................................................................................................................................................................................ 7
3.1. Front�axle............................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 7
3.1.1. Technical�data............................................................................................................................................................................ 9
3.1.2. Notes�for�service...............................................................................................................................................................10
3.2. Rear�axle...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................11
3.2.1. Technical�data........................................................................................................................................................................14
3.2.2. Notes�for�Service............................................................................................................................................................. 14
3.3. Suspension/dampers................................................................................................................................................................................... 15
3.3.1. Basic�chassis�and�suspension.................................................................................................................... 15
3.3.2. M�Sports�suspension.............................................................................................................................................. 15
3.3.3. Adaptive�M�chassis�and�suspension.................................................................................................15
3.4. Wheels�and�Tires...............................................................................................................................................................................................16
3.4.1. Tire�Pressure�Monitor�TPMS........................................................................................................................16

4. Brakes............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 17
4.1. Service�brakes........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 17
4.2. Parking�brake............................................................................................................................................................................................................19

5. Steering...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 20
5.1. Electronic�Power�Steering�EPS.................................................................................................................................................. 20
5.1.1. System�overview............................................................................................................................................................... 21
5.1.2. System�wiring�diagram............................................................................................................................................23
5.1.3. Steering�angle�sensor.............................................................................................................................................. 24
5.2. Variable�sport�steering.............................................................................................................................................................................. 24
5.3. Steering�column................................................................................................................................................................................................ 26
5.3.1. Steering�column�adjustment......................................................................................................................... 26

6. Driving�Stability�Control............................................................................................................................................................................................. 27
6.1. Directions�of�action........................................................................................................................................................................................ 27
6.2. Integrated�Chassis�Management�(ICM)......................................................................................................................... 27
6.2.1. System�overview............................................................................................................................................................... 27
6.2.2. System�function................................................................................................................................................................. 28
6.3. Dynamic�Stability�Control�DSC................................................................................................................................................... 29
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
Contents
6.3.1. System�overview............................................................................................................................................................... 30
6.3.2. System�wiring�diagram............................................................................................................................................31
6.3.3. System�function................................................................................................................................................................. 32
6.4. Dynamic�Cruise�Control�DCC........................................................................................................................................................34
6.5. Electronic�Damper�Control�(EDC)........................................................................................................................................... 35
6.5.1. System�overview............................................................................................................................................................... 36
6.5.2. System�wiring�diagram............................................................................................................................................37
6.5.3. System�function................................................................................................................................................................. 38
6.5.4. Notes�for�Service............................................................................................................................................................. 39
6.6. Driving�experience�control�button...........................................................................................................................................39
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
1.�Introduction
1.1.�Models
The�F30�will�be�launched�on�the�market�in�the�following�models�in�February�2012:

• BMW�328i
• BMW�335i

1.2.�Driving�dynamics�and�comfort

F30�Chassis�and�suspension

Index Explanation
1 Suspension/dampers
2 Electronic�Power�Steering�EPS
3 Dynamic�Stability�Control�DSC
4 Five-link�rear�suspension
5 Damping�action
6 Suspension

1
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
1.�Introduction
Index Explanation
7 Parking�brake
8 Wheels
9 Brakes
10 Two-joint�spring�strut�front�axle�with�trailing�links

The�chassis�and�suspension�of�the�F30�is�a�further�development�based�on�the�E90.�The�front�axle�is
designed�as�a�double�pivot�spring�strut�axle.�A�further�improved�version�of�the�five-link�rear�axle�HA5
is�used�on�the�rear�axle.�The�chassis�and�suspension�system�takes�driving�dynamics�and�comfort�to�a
new�level.

2
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
1.�Introduction
1.3.�Bus�overview

F30�bus�overview

3
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
1.�Introduction
Index Explanation
1 Control�units�with�wake-up�authorization
2 Start-up�node�control�units�for�starting�and�synchronizing�the�FlexRay�bus
system
ACSM Advanced�Crash�Safety�Module
AMPT Top-HiFi�amplifier
COMBOX Combox�(Combox�emergency�call,�Multimedia�Combox)
CON Controller
D-CAN Diagnosis-on-Controller�Area�Network
DME Digital�Engine�Electronics�(DME)
DSC Dynamic�Stability�Control
DVDC DVD�changer
EGS Electronic�transmission�control
EKPS Electronic�fuel�pump�control
EPS Electromechanical�Power�Steering
Ethernet Cable-based�data�network�technology�for�local�data�networks
FEM Front�Electronic�Module
FLA High-beam�assistant
FlexRay Fast,�preset�and�fault-tolerant�bus�system�for�use�in�automotive�sector
FZD Roof�function�center
GWS Gear�selector�lever
HEADUNIT/CIC Headunit�(Car�Information�Computer�or�Basic�headunit)
ICM Integrated�Chassis�Management
IHKA Integrated�automatic�heating�/�air�conditioning
K-CAN Body�controller�area�network
K-CAN2 Body�controller�area�network�2
KAFAS Camera-based�driver�assistance�systems
KOMBI Instrument�cluster�(MOST�only�with�option 6WA)
MOST Media�Oriented�System�Transport
OBD On-board�diagnosis�(diagnostic�socket)
PDC Park�Distance�Control�(with�option�5DP,�parking�manoeuvring�assistant:
integrated�in�the�parking�manoeuvring�assistant�control�unit,�otherwise
integrated�in�the�Rear�Electronic�Module�control�unit)
PMA Parking�manoeuvring�assistant
PT-CAN Powertrain�controller�area�network
PT-CAN2 Powertrain�controller�area�network�2
RAD Radio

4
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
1.�Introduction
Index Explanation
REM Rear�Electronic�Module
REMA�LI Reversible�electromotive�automatic�reel,�left�(not�US)
REMA�RE Reversible�electromotive�automatic�reel,�right�(not�US)
SMFA Seat�module,�driver
SWW Lane�change�warning
TPMS Tire�Pressure�Monitoring�System
TRSVC Control�unit�for�all-round�vision�camera
VDM Vertical�Dynamics�Management
ZGM Central�gateway�module

The�FlexRay�is�shown�in�a�simplified�form�in�the�overview�of�the�bus�systems.�The�information�bulletin
"F30�General�vehicle�electrical�system"�contains�the�actual�physical�configuration�(topology).

5
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
2.�Models
2.1.�Comparison
The�following�table�compares�the�technical�data�of�the�chassis�and�suspension�in�the�F30�with�its�pre-
decessor�E90�using�the�example�of�the�BMW 328i�model.

Designation F30�328i E90 328i�model


Wheelbase 2810 mm 2761 mm
Front�track�width 1531 mm 1501 mm
Rear�track�width 1572 mm 1529 mm
Tires,�basic�wheels 225/50 R17 �AS 205/55�R16�91V
Basic�wheel�rims 7.5J�x�17 LM 7J�x�16�l
Front�axle Two-joint�spring�strut�front�axle Two-joint�spring�strut�front�axle
with�trailing�links with�trailing�links
Springs/dampers Steel�spring/conventional�or�EDC Steel�springs,�conventional
Anti-roll�bar,�front mechanical mechanical
Front�brake Brake�disc,�ventilated Brake�disc,�ventilated
Steering EPS�rack Hydraulic
Rear�axle Five-link�rear�suspension Five-link�rear�suspension
Rear�suspen- Steel�spring/conventional�or�EDC Steel�springs,�conventional
sion/dampers
Rear�anti-roll�bar Mechanical mechanical
Rear�brakes Brake�disc,�ventilated Brake�disc,�ventilated
Parking�brake Duo-servo�parking�brake�with�park- Duo-servo�parking�brake�with�park-
ing�brake�lever ing�brake�lever

6
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
3.�Chassis�and�Suspension
3.1.�Front�axle

Two-joint�spring�strut�front�axle�with�trailing�links�in�F30

Index Explanation
1 Swivel�bearing
2 Electronic�Power�Steering�EPS
3 Anti-roll�bar
4 Front�axle�support
5 Anti-roll�bar�link
6 Support�bearing

7
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
3.�Chassis�and�Suspension
Index Explanation
7 Wheel�hub
8 Spring�strut
9 Track�rod
10 Wishbone
11 Trailing�link

The�two-joint�spring�strut�front�axle�with�trailing�links�in�the�F30�represents�the�optimum�combination
of�driving�dynamics�and�ride�comfort.�The�load-bearing�function�of�the�steering�box�housing�achieves
an�extremely�high�degree�of�rigidity�with�the�lowest�possible�weight.

Compared�to�its�predecessor�in�the�E90,�the�front�axle�support�in�the�F30�must�satisfy�more�stringent
requirements.�A�second�crash�load�path�has�now�been�integrated�above�the�front�axle�support.�In�order
to�guarantee�optimum�crash�behavior,�a�high-strength�welded�steel�structure�has�been�used�instead�of
an�aluminium�front�axle�support.

Improved�acoustic�properties�and�maximum�rigidity�and�accompanying�increase�in�ride�comfort�can�be
achieved�with�a�small�installation�space.

Front�axle�of�F30�-�viewed�from�below

Index Explanation
1 High-strength�steel
2 Aluminium

8
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
3.�Chassis�and�Suspension
The�ball�joints�of�the�front�axle�have�been�friction-optimized.�This�has�made�it�possible�to�improve�the
response�characteristics.

Use�of�cast�aluminium�parts�(wishbones,�trailing�links)�and�aluminium�die-cast�parts�(swivel�bearings)
reduces�the�unsprung�masses.

The�Electronic�Power�Steering�EPS�(electromechanical�power�steering)�that�features�in�the�F30�makes
an�important�contribution�to�BMW�EfficientDynamics.

For�vehicles�with�an�adaptive�M�sports�suspension�(optional�equipment�2VF)�the�electronic�damper
control�EDC�is�also�integrated.

3.1.1.�Technical�data

Designation Without�optional With�optional


equipment 2VF�Adap- equipment 2VF�Adap-
tive�M�Suspension�or�op- tive�M�Suspension�or�op-
tional�equipment 704 tional�equipment 704
Sport�Suspension Sport�Suspension
Castor�angle 7.0° 7.2°
Camber –20' –29'
Total�toe-in 14' 14'
Toe�difference�angle�at�20° 86' 86'
Maximum�wheel�lock�angle, 33.8° 33.4°
outer
Maximum�wheel�lock�angle, 40.5° 40.0°
inner

Please�refer�to�the�latest�Technical�Data�for�alignment�specs.

For�servicing�a�camber�correction�is�possible�by�means�of�a�disconnected�swivel�bearing�available�in
the�spare�parts�service.

Two�versions�of�this�swivel�bearing�are�available:

• Version�1:�Camber�correction�–0° 30'
• Version�2:�camber�correction�0°�30'.

9
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
3.�Chassis�and�Suspension
3.1.2.�Notes�for�service
The�following�tables�show�when�front�wheel�alignment�is�necessary.

Component�replaced Wheel�alignment�required
Front�axle�support YES
Steering�box YES
Wishbone YES
Rubber�mount�for�wishbone YES
Trailing�link NO
Rubber�mount�for�trailing�link NO
Track�rod YES
Swivel�bearing YES
Wheel�bearing NO
Spring�strut NO
Coil�spring NO
Support�bearing NO

Screw�connection�unfastened Wheel�alignment�required
Front�axle�support�to�body NO
Steering�box�to�front�axle�support YES
Wishbone�to�front�axle�support YES
Wishbone�to�swivel�bearing NO
Trailing�link�to�front�axle�support NO
Trailing�link�to�swivel�bearing NO
Track�rod�to�steering�box NO
Track�rod�end�to�track�rod YES
Track�rod�end�to�swivel�bearing NO
Spring�strut�to�swivel�bearing NO
Support�bearing�to�body NO
Steering�shaft�to�steering�gear NO
Steering�column�to�steering�shaft NO

10
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
3.�Chassis�and�Suspension
3.2.�Rear�axle

F30�Five-link�rear�suspension

Index Explanation
1 Compression�strut
2 Wishbone
3 Damping�action
4 Anti-roll�bar
5 Rear�axle�support
6 Suspension
7 Camber�link

11
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
3.�Chassis�and�Suspension
Index Explanation
8 Wheel�hub
9 Wheel�carrier
10 Trailing�arm
11 Control�arm
12 Camber�link

In�the�F30�a�five-link�rear�axle�has�been�used.�HA5�This�is�based�on�the�predecessor�but�has�under-
gone�significant�further�development�and�has�been�implemented�as�a�steel�construction.

Elasto-kinematics�are�installed�in�the�five-link�rear�axle,�which�are�coordinated�specifically�to�the�F30.
The�precise�and�superior�wheel�control�in�all�driving�situations�has�a�large�spring�travel�range.

It�has�been�possible�to�resolve�the�conflicting�objectives�of�driving�dynamics�and�comfort�by:

• A�flexible�suspension�of�rear�axle�differential�at�rear�axle�support�and�a�flexible�bearing�of�rear
axle�support�at�body�(2x�flexible�bearing),�which�have�been�specifically�coordinated�to�the�F30
• Maximum�support�base�width�for�the�rear�axle�support
• Significant�increase�in�track�width�when�compared�to�E90
• Optimum�connection�of�body�suspension�and�damping.

F30�aerodynamic�covers

Index Explanation
1 Aerodynamic�covers

12
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
3.�Chassis�and�Suspension
Specific�aerodynamic�measures�improve�the�lift�coefficients�and�the�drag�coefficient�(Cd),�which�has
a�positive�impact�on�consumption�and�driving�dynamics.�Thus�aerodynamic�covers�made�of�fibre-
glass-reinforced�polyamide�has�been�fitted�to�the�camber�links�of�the�F30.

When�compared�to�the�E90�,�it�has�been�possible�to�increase�the�loading�width�of�the�luggage�com-
partment�and�leg�room�in�the�rear�passenger�compartment.

F30�shock�absorber,�rear�axle

Index Explanation
1 Support�bearing�with�multiple�load�path

13
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
3.�Chassis�and�Suspension
The�shock�absorber�design�of�the�F30�and�E90�are�different.�In�the�F30,�firstly�the�pivot�point�of�the
shock�absorber�to�the�camber�link�was�modified,�and�secondly�no�more�work�is�necessary�in�the�lug-
gage�compartment�for�dismantling�the�shock�absorber.

The�support�bearing�with�single�load�path�for�the�shock�absorber�in�the�E90�is�screwed�to�the�body
from�the�inside.�The�support�bearing�in�the�F30�is�a�multiple-path�version�and�is�fastened�to�the�body
from�the�outside.

3.2.1.�Technical�data

Designation Without�optional With�optional


equipment 2VF�or�op- equipment 2VF�or�op-
tional�equipment 704 tional�equipment 704
Total�toe-in 18' 18'
Camber –90' –105'

Please�refer�to�the�latest�Technical�Data�for�alignment�specs.

3.2.2.�Notes�for�Service
The�following�tables�show�when�rear�wheel�alignment�is�necessary.

Component�replaced Wheel�alignment�required
Rear�axle�support YES
Rubber�mount�for�rear�axle�support NO
Wheel�carrier YES
Ball�joint�and�rubber�mount�in�wheel�carrier YES
Control�arm NO
Trailing�arm NO
Wishbone YES
Camber�link YES
Camber�link YES
Wheel�bearing NO
Shock�absorber NO
Coil�spring NO
Support�bearing NO

Screw�connection�unfastened Wheel�alignment�required
Rear�axle�support�to�body NO
Compression�strut�to�body NO
Control�arm�to�rear�suspension�subframe NO
Control�arm�to�hub�carrier NO

14
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
3.�Chassis�and�Suspension
Screw�connection�unfastened Wheel�alignment�required
Trailing�arm�to�rear�axle�support NO
Trailing�arm�to�wheel�carrier NO
Wishbone�to�rear�axle�support YES
Wishbone�to�wheel�carrier NO
Camber�link�to�rear�axle�support YES
Camber�link�to�wheel�carrier YES
Camber�link�to�rear�axle�support YES
Camber�link�to�wheel�carrier YES
Support�bearing�to�body NO

3.3.�Suspension/dampers

3.3.1.�Basic�chassis�and�suspension
Steel�springs�are�mounted�to�the�front�and�rear�axle�of�the�F30.

Damping�is�provided�by�conventional�shock�absorbers�as�standard.�Spring�struts�are�installed�at�the
front�axle�and�springs�and�dampers�are�arranged�separately�at�the�rear�axle.

3.3.2.�M�Sports�suspension
Vehicles�with�M�Sports�suspension�(optional�equipment�704)�have�a�tighter�spring/damper�design�and
are�positioned�10�mm�lower.

3.3.3.�Adaptive�M�chassis�and�suspension
Vehicles�with�an�adaptive�M�sports�suspension�(optional�equipment�2VF)�are�also�positioned�10�mm
lower.

In�addition,�the�electronic�damper�control�EDC�is�integrated.�Here�four�continuously�adjustable�shock
absorbers�with�coupled�rebound/compression�stage�adjustment�produce�damping�forces�according�to
requirements.�The�shock�absorbers�can�automatically�assume�a�harder�setting�(more�dynamic/sporty)
or�softer�(more�comfortable)�setting,�depending�on�the�driving�manoeuvre.

For�more�information�on�the�EDC�refer�to�Chapter�"Electronic�Damper�Control�(EDC)".

15
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
3.�Chassis�and�Suspension
3.4.�Wheels�and�Tires
The�standard�Tire�sizes�are�listed�in�the�following�tables.

Model Tires Wheel�rim Rim�offset�IS


BMW 328i 225/50 R17 94V�AS 7.5J�x�17 LA 37 mm
BMW 335i 225/45 R18 91V�AS 8J�x�18�LA 34 mm

Run-flat�tires�on�the�F30�are�standard�equipment.

3.4.1.�Tire�Pressure�Monitor�TPMS
The�F30�is�equipped�with�the�latest�generation�of�the�TPMS�(Tire�pressure�control).

For�further�information�on�the�TPMS,�please�refer�to�the�Training�Material�"F25�Chassis�and�Suspen-
sion".

16
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
4.�Brakes

F30�Brake�system

Index Explanation
1 Brake�fluid�expansion�tank
2 Brake�servo
3 Parking�brake
4 Brake�caliper
5 Brake�pedal
6 Dynamic�Stability�Control�DSC
7 Brake�disc

4.1.�Service�brakes
The�F30�features�a�hydraulic�2-circuit�brake�system�with�“front/rear�split”.�One�brake�circuit�is�intended
for�both�the�front�and�rear�axle.

The�familiar�brake�pad�wear�monitoring�function�for�the�Condition�Based�Service�display�continues�to
be�used.�Single-stage�brake�pad�wear�sensors�are�installed�on�the�front�left�and�rear�right�wheel�brakes
for�this�purpose.

17
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
4.�Brakes

F30�level�sensor�for�brake�fluid

The�brake�fluid�level�sensor�in�the�F30�is�no�longer�integrated�into�the�lid�of�the�tank�and�is�instead�in-
serted�into�the�tank�itself.

The�brake�disc�dimensions�for�the�F30�are�listed�in�the�following�table.

Model Brake�disc,�front�axle Brake�disc,�rear�axle


(Ø/thickness) (Ø/thickness)
[mm] [mm]
BMW�328i 330�x�24 300�x�20
BMW�335i 340�x�30 330�x�20

For�all�engine�versions,�internally�ventilated,�coated�brake�discs�are�used�on�both�axles.�In�the
BMW 335i�lightweight�brake�discs�with�an�aluminium�brake�disc�chamber�are�installed�as�standard.

In�the�F30�twor�brake�caliper�variants�are�used�on�the�front�axle�and�two�on�the�rear�axle�depending�on
the�model:

Brake�caliper,�front�axle Models
Single-piston�floating�caliper,�piston��57 mm,�aluminium BMW�328i
Four-piston�fixed�caliper,�piston��40 mm,�aluminium BMW�335i

Brake�caliper,�rear�axle Models
Single-piston�floating�caliper,�piston��42 mm,�cast�iron BMW�328i
Single-piston�floating�caliper,�piston��42 mm,�cast�iron BMW�335i

18
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
4.�Brakes
4.2.�Parking�brake
The�parking�brake�is�designed�as�a�duo-servo�parking�brake�with�the�following�dimensions:

• 185 x 20 mm�for�BMW�328i�and�335i.

19
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
5.�Steering
5.1.�Electronic�Power�Steering�EPS
The�F30�features�Electronic�Power�Steering�EPS�(electromechanical�power�steering)�which�replaces
the�conventional�hydraulic�steering.

When�compared�to�hydraulic�steering,�with�EPS�the�power�assist�is�applied�to�the�rack�via�an�electric
motor�and�a�reduction�gear.

Steering�gear�of�EPS�in�F30

Index Explanation
1 Reduction�gear
2 Steering-torque�sensor
3 Track�rod
4 EPS�control�unit
5 Electric�motor�with�rotor�position�sensor

Thanks�to�the�supply�of�condition-based�power,�the�average�fuel�consumption�has�been�reduced�by
approx.�3%�compared�to�conventional�hydraulic�power�steering.�This�helps�reduce�carbon�dioxide
emissions.

As�there�is�no�oil�in�an�EPS�system,�it�is�more�environmentally�friendly�and�easier�to�service�than�a�con-
ventional�hydraulic�power�steering�system.

Owing�to�the�compact�design�of�the�steering�gear�with�integrated�electric�motor�and�control�electron-
ics,�the�installation�and�maintenance�overheads�are�considerably�less�than�a�conventional�hydraulic
power�steering�system.

With�EPS,�both�the�steering�servo�(steering�force)�and�return�can�be�freely�balanced.�Steerability�and
drivability�can�therefore�be�adapted�optimally�to�the�relevant�driving�situation�(e.g.�when�driving�in�built-
up�areas�or�on�the�highway).

20
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
5.�Steering
Servotronic�is�installed�as�standard�equipment�on�the�F30.�The�Servotronic�controls�the�steering�servo
subject�to�the�vehicle�speed.�Two�different�settings�(“Normal”�and�“Sporty”)�can�be�accessed�via�the
driving�experience�switch.

Active�steering�is�not�available�for�the�F30,�"Variable�sports�steering"�(SA�2VL)�is�instead�available�as
optional�equipment.

The�EPS�a�prerequisite�for�implementation�of�the�Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant�PMA.

Depending�on�the�F30�options�two�variants�of�steering�gear�are�used:

• EPS�basic�steering�gear�for�BMW�328i�and�335i.
With�this�steering�gear�the�housing�and�the�mechanics�are�designed�for�higher�axle�loads.�The
electrical�motor�is�enhanced�and�the�engine�shortened.
Manufacturer:�ThyssenKrupp.
• EPS�for�variable�sport�steering�(optional�equipment 2VL).
In�terms�of�the�housing,�this�steering�gear�corresponds�to�the�mechanics�and�the�engine�of�the
EPS�for�BMW�328i�and�335i.�However,�the�electric�motor�is�designed�for�the�higher�dynamics
of�sport�steering.�In�addition,�a�rack�with�variable�ratio�is�installed.
Manufacturer:�ThyssenKrupp.

5.1.1.�System�overview

Steering�components�of�EPS�in�F30

21
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
5.�Steering
Index Explanation
1 Electronic�Power�Steering�EPS
2 Steering�column
3 Steering�wheel

22
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
5.�Steering
5.1.2.�System�wiring�diagram

System�wiring�diagram�of�EPS�in�F30

23
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
5.�Steering
Index Explanation
1 Dynamic�Stability�Control�DSC
2 Digital�Engine�Electronics�(DME)�or�Digital�Diesel�Electronics�(DDE)�(not�US)
3 Electronic�Power�Steering�EPS
4 Power�distribution�box,�front
5 Power�distribution�box,�engine�compartment
6 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
7 Integrated�Chassis�Management�(ICM)
8 Steering�column�switch�cluster�(SZL)
9 Instrument�cluster�(KOMBI)
Kl.15N Ignition�(after-run)
Terminal�30 Terminal�30

5.1.3.�Steering�angle�sensor
The�information�on�the�steering�angle�in�the�F30�is�not�recorded�by�the�Electronic�Power�Steering�EPS
via�a�separate�sensor�on�the�steering�wheel�and�instead�is�computed�based�on�the�angle�of�the�EPS
motor�position�in�relation�to�the�steering�wheel.

The�EPS�transmits�the�position�of�the�rack�to�the�ICM�control�unit�via�FlexRay.�During�this�process,
the�EPS�calculates�the�absolute�position�of�the�rack�based�on�the�current�rotor�position�of�the�EPS
motor�and�the�number�of�complete�revolutions�performed�by�the�rotor�starting�from�the�zero�position
(straight-ahead�driving�position).

Taking�this�position�as�the�starting�point,�the�ICM�control�unit�determines�the�wheel-specific�steering
angle�among�other�things�using�the�stored�ratio�parameters�(rack�to�wheel-specific�steering�angle)�and
transmits�this�via�FlexRay.�This�wheel-specific�steering�angle�is�used�by�the�DSC�among�other�things
as�a�reference�variable�for�internal�control�functions.

In�cases�where�the�absolute�value�is�not�available�from�the�EPS�(loss�of�Terminal�30,�flash�process),�the
absolute�value�is�determined�through�interaction�between�the�ICM�and�EPS�using�a�teaching�function
in�which�the�steering�wheel�is�turned�from�end�stop�to�end�stop�(e.g.�straight-ahead�position�->�left�->
right�->�straight-ahead�position).

5.2.�Variable�sport�steering
The�"Variable�sport�steering"�(optional�equipment�2VL)�is�available�for�the�F30�as�an�alternative�to�the
basic�version�of�EPS.�This�is�the�first�steering�system�on�the�market�to�combine�the�benefits�of�an�ex-
tremely�direct,�variable�steering�gear�ratio�and�the�operating�principle�of�EPS.

The�variable�sport�steering�increases�both�ride�comfort�and�agility.�The�direct�ratio�reduces�the�over-
all�steering�angle,�i.e.�the�number�of�turns�of�the�steering�wheel�required�to�turn�from�one�steering�stop
to�the�other,�by�roughly�25%.�This�therefore�helps�manoeuvres�that�require�a�larger�steering�angle,�e.g.
parking,�turning�off�or�turning�round,�to�be�carried�out�more�comfortably.

24
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
5.�Steering
The�more�direct�steering�gear�ratio�when�compared�to�the�basic�version�of�the�EPS�and�the�reduced
steering�angle�which�is�required�as�a�result�achieves�a�more�direct�vehicle�response�and�higher�agility.
This�comes�in�handy�during�avoidance�manoeuvres�for�example.

The�variable�steering�gear�ratio�is�implemented�through�the�stroke-dependent�gear�geometry�of�the
rack.�Around�the�center�position�of�the�steering�gear,�the�steering�system�behaves�accurately�with
steady�directional�stability.�As�the�steering�angle�moves�away�from�the�center�position,�the�ratio�be-
comes�increasingly�more�direct.

Comparison�between�steering�gear�ratio�of�basic�EPS�version�and�variable�sport�steering�for�F30

Index Explanation
1 Rack�in�basic�version�of�EPS�(constant�gear�geometry)
2 Variable�sport�steering�rack�(variable�gear�geometry)
A More�indirect�steering�gear�ratio�(variable�sport�steering)
B More�direct�steering�gear�ratio�(variable�sport�steering)
x Steering�angle
y Rack�stroke

25
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
5.�Steering
5.3.�Steering�column
Thanks�to�an�integrated�crash�system,�in�the�event�of�an�accident�the�steering�column�can�dissipate
additional�energy�through�specific�deformation.

5.3.1.�Steering�column�adjustment
The�steering�column�of�the�F30�can�be�adjusted�mechanically;�a�forward/back�adjustment�of�60�mm
and�height�adjustment�of�40�mm�is�possible.�This�allows�optimum�ergonomic�positioning�of�the�driver.

26
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
6.�Driving�Stability�Control
6.1.�Directions�of�action

Direction Longi- Pitch Lateral Yaw Vertical Roll


of�action tudinal
DSC    
EDC     
DCC 

Driving�stability�control�systems�can�be�differentiated�in�terms�of�their�basic�effective�directions.�They
can�act�along�as�well�as�around�an�axis�of�the�vehicle's�fixed�X,�Y�or�Z�coordinate�system.

6.2.�Integrated�Chassis�Management�(ICM)

6.2.1.�System�overview

F30�ICM�control�unit

27
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
6.�Driving�Stability�Control
Index Explanation
1 ICM�control�unit

6.2.2.�System�function
The�Integrated�Chassis�Management�ICM�coordinates,�as�monitoring�system�so�to�speak,�all�driving
stability�control�systems�and�vehicle�control�systems.�The�advantage�of�this�structure�is�that�the�in-
dividual�systems�can�continue�processing�their�immediate�functions�rapidly�and�also�independently.
As�the�higher-level�central�control�system,�the�ICM�monitors�and�coordinates�interventions�and�sends
instructions�to�intelligent�actuators.�This�allows�braking,�steering�or�torque�interventions�to�be�per-
formed,�for�example.

Influence�of�ICM�control�unit�on�driving�stability�control

• Driving�dynamics�control�FDR
The�driver�can�activate�and�deactivate�the�driving�dynamics�control�(FDR)�via�the�DTC�but-
ton�or�the�driving�experience�switch.�The�function�mode�is�displayed�in�the�instrument�cluster
KOMBI.
The�ICM�control�unit�evaluates�the�DTC�button�and�driving�experience�switch�as�well�as�the
switching�logic,�as�well�as�communication�between�the�various�systems�involved�(including
DSC).�Furthermore,�the�ICM�control�unit�includes�system�monitoring�of�partner�functions
which�switches�back�to�normal�mode�(DSC�ON)�if�one�of�the�functions�being�monitored�drops
out.
• Dynamic�Cruise�Control�DCC
Dynamic�Cruise�Control�DCC�is�a�road�speed�controller�with�braking�intervention.�The�DCC
function�in�the�ICM�control�unit�acts�on�the�powertrain�and�brake�via�corresponding�interfaces.
In�addition,�interfaces�exist�with�display�and�operating�elements�and�the�driving�dynamics�sen-
sor�systems.
Further�information�on�the�DCC�can�be�found�in�the�chapter�entitled�"Dynamic�Cruise�Control
DCC".
• Active�cruise�control�with�Stop&Go�function�(optional�equipment�5DF)�Not�at�start�of
production.
The�active�cruise�control�with�Stop&Go�function�(ACC�Stop & Go)�is�a�speed�regulator�with�a
distance�regulator�function.�The�"ACC�Stop�&�Go"�function�in�the�ICM�control�unit�acts�on�the
powertrain�and�brake�via�corresponding�interfaces.�In�addition,�interfaces�exist�with�display�and
operating�elements�and�the�driving�dynamics�sensor�systems.

Sensor�system

As�the�central�element,�the�ICM�control�unit�incorporates�the�driving�dynamics�sensors�and�central
airbag�sensor�system.�It�is�installed�near�the�vehicle's�center�of�gravity�via�a�holder�on�the�center�con-
sole.

Function Vehicles Vehicles


without�EDC with�EDC
Longitudinal�acceleration�(airbag�sensor�system)  
Lateral�acceleration�(airbag�sensor�system)  
Longitudinal�acceleration  

28
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
6.�Driving�Stability�Control
Function Vehicles Vehicles
without�EDC with�EDC
Lateral�acceleration  
Vertical�acceleration – 
Yaw�rate – 
Pitch�rate – 
Yaw�rate  

The�following�signals�are�calculated�from�this�and�made�available�to�the�DSC�via�FlexRay:

• Yaw�rate
• Lateral�acceleration
• Longitudinal�acceleration
• Steering�angle.

6.3.�Dynamic�Stability�Control�DSC
The�Dynamic�Stability�Control�DSC�forms�the�core�of�the�vehicle�control�systems�that�enhance�active
safety.�It�optimizes�driving�stability�in�all�driving�conditions�and�also�traction�when�driving�off�and�ac-
celerating.�Furthermore,�it�identifies�unstable�driving�conditions�such�as�understeering�or�oversteering
and�helps�maintain�the�vehicle�on�a�steady�course.

In�the�F30�two�variants�of�the�DSC�are�used.�In�the�basic�version�the�hydraulic�unit�has�an�internal�pres-
sure�sensor�and�a�double�piston�pump.�For�vehicles�with�active�cruise�control�with�Stop&Go�function
(optional�equipment 5DF)�“Not�at�start�of�production”�a�version�with�two�additional�pressure�sensors�is
installed.

The�ultra�sensitive�sensors�of�the�F30�record�the�current�driving�condition�permanently.�The�informa-
tion�comes�for�example�from�the�wheel�speed,�steering�angle,�lateral�acceleration,�longitudinal�acceler-
ation,�pressure�and�yaw�sensors�(detect�rotation�on�the�vehicle's�vertical�axis).�The�single-track�mod-
el�calculated�by�the�DSC�control�unit�serves�as�the�basic�variable�for�control�interventions�in�the�DSC.
During�this�process,�the�relevant�driver�input�(steering�wheel�angle�and�vehicle�speed),�in�other�words
"the�desired�state",�and�the�vehicle�sensor�data,�in�other�words�"the�actual�state",�are�compared.

If�the�calculated�desired�state�and�measured�actual�state�do�not�correspond,�stabilizing�or�traction-en-
hancing�measures�are�introduced�once�defined�tolerances�have�been�exceeded.�Driving�stability�can
once�again�be�ensured�or�a�traction�requirement�can�be�implemented�by�selectively�reducing�or�in-
creasing�the�engine�torque�(with�active�engine�drag�torque�control)�or�through�wheel-specific�brake�in-
tervention.

29
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
6.�Driving�Stability�Control
6.3.1.�System�overview

System�overview�of�DSC�in�F30

Index Explanation
1 Dynamic�Stability�Control�(DSC)
2 Driving�experience�control�button
3 Integrated�Chassis�Management�(ICM)

30
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
6.�Driving�Stability�Control
6.3.2.�System�wiring�diagram

System�wiring�diagram�of�DSC�in�F30

31
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
6.�Driving�Stability�Control
Index Explanation
1 Wheel-speed�sensor,�front�left
2 Brake�fluid�level�switch
3 Digital�Engine�Electronics�(DME)�or�Digital�Diesel�Electronics�(DDE)�(not�US)
4 Power�distribution�box,�engine�compartment
5 Power�distribution�box,�front
6 Wheel-speed�sensor,�front�right
7 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
8 Wheel�speed�sensor,�rear�right
9 Brake�pad�wear�sensor,�rear�right
10 Wheel�speed�sensor,�rear�left
11 Operating�facility,�center�console
12 Parking�brake�switch
13 Integrated�Chassis�Management�(ICM)
14 Brake�light�switch
15 Steering�column�switch�cluster�(SZL)
16 Instrument�cluster�(KOMBI)
17 Dynamic�Stability�Control�(DSC)
18 Brake�pad�wear�sensor,�front�right
Terminal�15WUP Wake-up�with�terminal�15�ON
Terminal�30 Terminal�30
Terminal�30B Terminal�30�basic�operation

6.3.3.�System�function

Function Subfunction Designation


ABS Antilock�Brake�System
EBV Electronic�brake�force�distribution
CBC Cornering�Brake�Control
DBC Dynamic�Brake�Control
ASC Automatic�Stability�Control
ADB Automatic�Differential�Brake�(only�active�in�DSC
OFF�mode)
MMR Engine�torque�control
MSR Engine�drag�control

32
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
6.�Driving�Stability�Control
Function Subfunction Designation
BMR Braking�torque�control
DSC Dynamic�Stability�Control
DTC Dynamic�Traction�Control

The�DSC�can�be�operated�in�three�modes:

• DSC�ON
• Dynamic�traction�control,�DTC
• DSC�OFF.

F30�DTC�button

Index Explanation
1 DTC�button

Function DSC DTC DSC


ON OFF
Anti-lock�braking�system�ABS   
Electronic�brake-force�distribution�EBV   
Cornering�Brake�Control�CBC   
Engine�drag�torque�control�MSR   
Automatic�Stability�Control�ASC  X –

33
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
6.�Driving�Stability�Control
Function DSC DTC DSC
ON OFF
Automatic�Differential�Brake�ADB – – 
Driving�dynamics�control�FDR  X –
Brake�standby   
Dry�by�applying�brake   
Drive-off�assistant   
Fading�Brake�Support   
Dynamic�Braking�Control�DBC   
Run�Flat�Indicator�RPA   
Condition�Based�Services�CBS   
Post�Crash   

Symbol Explanation
 Function�active
– Function�inactive
X Function�with�modified�control�thresholds

Adopting�a�suitably�adapted�driving�style�always�remains�the�responsibility�of�the�driver.

Not�even�DSC�can�overcome�the�laws�of�physics.

The�additional�safety�features�afforded�by�the�system�should�not�be�diminished�by�risky�driving.

6.4.�Dynamic�Cruise�Control�DCC
Dynamic�Cruise�Control�DCC�is�a�cruise�control�with�comfortable�brake�intervention.�DCC�keeps�the
chosen�speed�constant�above�speeds�of�roughly�30�km/h�-�when�compared�to�conventional�cruise
control�with�the�following�additional�functions:

• Active�brake�intervention�-�if�the�engine�drag�torque�is�insufficient�in�coasting�(overrun)
mode�to�maintain�the�chosen�speed,�the�vehicle�is�decelerated�automatically�through�addition-
al�controlled�brake�intervention.

• Curve�Speed�Limiter�(CSL)�-�Depending�on�the�actual�lateral�acceleration,�the�driving�speed
is�reduced�during�controlled�cornering�as�necessary.�When�coming�out�of�the�bend�the�speed
is�adjusted�until�it�once�again�reaches�the�desired�level.

34
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
6.�Driving�Stability�Control
• Comfort�Dynamic�System�(CDS)�-�Referred�to�as�"Hand-controlled�acceleration�mode",�this
feature�allows�the�driver�to�accelerate�or�decelerate�continuously�via�an�operating�element�on
the�steering�wheel�in�two�dynamic�stages�respectively.�The�driver�can�thus�accelerate�or�de-
celerate�in�the�traffic�flow�without�having�to�estimate�the�target�speed�beforehand.
• Adapted�downhill�driving�–�Maintaining�the�desired�speed�during�controlled�downhill�driv-
ing�is�effected�by�overrun�fuel�cutoff�and�adapted�gear�downshifting.�The�wheel�brakes�are�re-
lieved�and�the�fuel�consumption�reduced.�With�the�DSC�braking�control�system,�correspond-
ing�measures�are�applied�via�a�substitute�temperature�model�to�compensate�for�leaks�and
distribute�torque�between�the�front�and�rear�axle.�This�means�that�any�leaks�that�occur�in�the
braking�control�circuit�can�be�counteracted.

The�desired/resume�speed�is�indicated�in�the�instrument�cluster�KOMBI�by�a�mark�that�moves�round
the�speed�reading.�Depending�on�the�system�status�the�marking�illuminates�in�green�(active)�or�orange
(system�interrupted).

If�the�desired�speed�is�adjusted,�or�when�the�DCC�function�is�activated,�the�updated�digital�value�ap-
pears�briefly�in�the�display�as�acknowledgement�for�the�driver.

6.5.�Electronic�Damper�Control�(EDC)
For�vehicles�with�an�adaptive�M�sports�suspension�(optional�equipment�2VF)�the�electronic�damper
control�EDC�is�used.�Here�four�continuously�adjustable�shock�absorbers�with�coupled�rebound/com-
pression�stage�adjustment�produce�damping�forces�according�to�requirements.�The�shock�absorbers
can�automatically�assume�a�harder�setting�(more�dynamic/sporty)�or�softer�(more�comfortable)�setting,
depending�on�the�driving�manoeuvre.

35
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
6.�Driving�Stability�Control
6.5.1.�System�overview

System�overview�of�EDC�in�F30

Index Explanation
1 Electronic�adjustable�damper,�rear
2 Driving�experience�control�button
3 Electronic�adjustable�damper,�front
4 VDM�control�unit
5 Electromagnetic�adjusting�valve
6 Wheel�acceleration�sensor

36
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
6.�Driving�Stability�Control
6.5.2.�System�wiring�diagram

System�wiring�diagram�of�EDC�in�F30

37
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
6.�Driving�Stability�Control
Index Explanation
1 Vertical�wheel�acceleration�sensor,�front�left
2 Electromagnetic�adjusting�valve,�front�left
3 Dynamic�Stability�Control�DSC
4 Electromagnetic�adjusting�valve,�front�right
5 Vertical�wheel�acceleration�sensor,�front�right
6 Power�distribution�box,�luggage�compartment
7 Electromagnetic�adjusting�valve,�rear�right
8 Vertical�Dynamics�Management�(VDM)
9 Electromagnetic�adjusting�valve,�rear�left
10 Integrated�Chassis�Management�(ICM)
11 Driving�experience�control�button
12 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
Terminal�30 Terminal�30
Terminal�15N Ignition�(after-run)

6.5.3.�System�function
The�Electronic�Damper�Control�EDC�is�a�variable,�electronically�controlled�shock�absorber�adjustment
system�that�controls�the�vertical�dynamics.�The�EDC�adapts�the�damping�forces�of�the�shock�absorber
more�or�less�instantly�to�the�changing�road�or�driving�conditions.

The�Electronic�Damper�Control�(EDC)�comes�with�the�optional�equipment�SA�2VF�"Adaptive�M�sports
suspension".

The�EDC�consists�of:

• Four�continuously�adjustable�shock�absorbers�with�coupled�rebound/compression�stage�ad-
justment
• The�VDM�control�unit
• Two�wheel�acceleration�sensors�on�the�front�axle�to�determine�the�wheel�movement
• Sensor�cluster�integrated�into�the�ICM�control�unit�which�determines�the�body�movements
(pitch,�vertical,�roll).

The�sensors�in�the�vehicle�permanently�measure:

• The�body�and�wheel�acceleration
• The�current�lateral�and�longitudinal�acceleration
• The�vehicle�speed
• The�steering�wheel�position.

38
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
6.�Driving�Stability�Control
Based�on�this�measured�data,�the�VDM�control�unit�calculates�the�control�commands�to�be�sent�to�the
electromagnetic�valves�in�the�shock�absorbers�for�each�individual�wheel�according�to�the�road�profile
and�driving�situation.�This�means�that�the�damping�forces�will�always�be�applied�according�to�require-
ments.

This�improves�ride�comfort�and�also�increases�driving�dynamics.

This�improves�the�vehicle's:

• Suitability�for�long-distance�journeys
• Enhanced�body�stability�and�agility
• Improves�driving�safety�by�minimizing�wheel�load�fluctuations�and�reducing�the�stopping�dis-
tance.

The�driver�can�choose�between�the�more�comfortable�or�more�sporty�aspect�of�the�vehicle's�character
via�the�driving�experience�switch.

6.5.4.�Notes�for�Service
Separate�lines�are�still�used�between�the�dampers,�including�the�sensors�at�the�front�axle�and�wiring
harness.�These�are�not�shown�in�the�system�wiring�diagram�and�can�be�replaced�individually�when�car-
rying�out�repairs.

6.6.�Driving�experience�control�button

F30�driving�experience�control�button

39
F30�Chassis�Dynamics
6.�Driving�Stability�Control
Index Explanation
1 Driving�experience�control�button

The�F30�features�the�driving�experience�switch�in�the�center�console�operating�facility�as�standard.

The�driver�can�use�the�driving�experience�control�button�to�select�different�programs�which�alter�vari-
ous�properties�of�the�vehicle�depending�on�the�vehicle's�equipment�specification.�The�following�pro-
grams�are�available:

• SPORT+
Only�in�connection�with�at�least�one�of�the�following�optional�equipment:
- Sport�Automatic�transmission�(optional�equipment�2TB)
- Variable�sport�steering�(optional�equipment�2VL)
- Adaptive�M�sports�suspension�(optional�equipment�2VF)�or
- BMW�Sport�Line�(PA�7AC)

• SPORT
• COMFORT
• ECO�PRO.

Drive�systems SPORT+ SPORT COMFORT ECO�PRO


Accelerator�character- Sports Sports Normal ECO�PRO
istic
Shift�program�(auto- Sports Sports Normal ECO�PRO
matic�transmission)
Shift�speed Sports Sports Normal Normal
Shift�point�display none none Normal ECO�PRO

Chassis�and�suspen- SPORT+ SPORT COMFORT ECO�PRO


sion�systems
Steering�servo Sport Sport Normal Normal
Dynamic�Stability�Con- DTC�on DSC�on DSC�on DSC�on
trol
Electronic�Damper Sports Sports Comfortable Comfortable
Control

The�Sports�mode�can�be�adapted�by�means�of�the�Controller.�It�is�possible�to�specify�whether�the
Sports�mode�applies�only�to�the�chassis�and�suspension,�only�to�the�powertrain,�or�both.

ECO�PRO�supports�a�consumption-friendly�driving�style.�In�this�regard,�the�engine�control�and�con-
venience�functions�such�as�air-conditioning/heating�are�adapted.�In�addition,�situation-dependent
information�can�be�shown�which�helps�consumption-optimized�driving.�The�extension�of�the�range
achieved�can�be�shown�in�the�instrument�cluster.

Further�information�on�ECO�PRO�can�be�found�in�the�training�information�"F30 Display�and�Operating
Elements".

40
Bayerische�Motorenwerke�Aktiengesellschaft
Händlerqualifizierung�und�Training
Röntgenstraße�7
85716�Unterschleißheim,�Germany
Technical�training.
Product�information.
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics

BMW�Service
General�information

Symbols�used

The�following�symbol�is�used�in�this�document�to�facilitate�better�comprehension�or�to�draw�attention
to�very�important�information:

Contains�important�safety�information�and�information�that�needs�to�be�observed�strictly�in�order�to
guarantee�the�smooth�operation�of�the�system.

Information�status�and�national-market�versions

BMW�Group�vehicles�meet�the�requirements�of�the�highest�safety�and�quality�standards.�Changes
in�requirements�for�environmental�protection,�customer�benefits�and�design�render�necessary
continuous�development�of�systems�and�components.�Consequently,�there�may�be�discrepancies
between�the�contents�of�this�document�and�the�vehicles�available�in�the�training�course.

This�document�basically�relates�to�the�European�version�of�left-hand�drive�vehicles.�Some�operating
elements�or�components�are�arranged�differently�in�right-hand�drive�vehicles�than�shown�in�the
graphics�in�this�document.�Further�differences�may�arise�as�a�result�of�the�equipment�specification�in
specific�markets�or�countries.

Additional�sources�of�information

Further�information�on�the�individual�topics�can�be�found�in�the�following:

• Owner's�Handbook
• Integrated�Service�Technical�Application.

Contact:�[email protected]

©2011�BMW�AG,�Munich,�Germany

Reprints�of�this�publication�or�its�parts�require�the�written�approval�of�BMW�AG,�Munich

The�information�contained�in�this�document�forms�an�integral�part�of�the�technical�training�of�the
BMW�Group�and�is�intended�for�the�trainer�and�participants�in�the�seminar.�Refer�to�the�latest�relevant
information�systems�of�the�BMW�Group�for�any�changes/additions�to�the�technical�data.

Information�status:�September�2011
BV-72/Technical�Training
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
Contents
1. Introduction............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 1

2. Vehicle�Electrical�System............................................................................................................................................................................................. 2
2.1. Control�units.................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 2
2.2. Bus�overview................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 4
2.3. OBD�II�diagnostic�access..........................................................................................................................................................................8

3. Voltage�Supply� ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 9
3.1. System�wiring�diagram................................................................................................................................................................................. 9
3.2. Components.............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 10
3.2.1. Battery............................................................................................................................................................................................... 12
3.2.2. Wiring�harness......................................................................................................................................................................13
3.2.3. Power�distribution�boxes......................................................................................................................................13
3.3. Stabilization�of�the�vehicle�electrical�system......................................................................................................... 15
3.4. Energy�management.................................................................................................................................................................................... 15
3.4.1. Charge�state�indicator.............................................................................................................................................. 15
3.4.2. Influence�of�steering�power............................................................................................................................. 15
3.4.3. Power�distribution�box,�front.......................................................................................................................... 15
3.5. Supply�to�EPS........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 16
3.5.1. System�wiring�diagram............................................................................................................................................17
3.6. Battery�Guard...........................................................................................................................................................................................................18

4. Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)......................................................................................................................................................................19
4.1. Central�gateway�module�(ZGM)..................................................................................................................................................22
4.2. Control�unit�replacement...................................................................................................................................................................... 22

5. Rear�Electronic�Module�(REM)........................................................................................................................................................................23

6. CAS�Functions.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 25
6.1. System�wiring�diagram............................................................................................................................................................................. 26
6.2. Overview�of�functions.................................................................................................................................................................................29

7. Comfort�Access.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 31
7.1. System�wiring�diagram............................................................................................................................................................................. 32
7.2. Hands-free�trunk�lid�opening..........................................................................................................................................................35
7.2.1. System�wiring�diagram............................................................................................................................................35
7.2.2. Functional�description..............................................................................................................................................36

8. Central�Locking�System.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 39
8.1. System�wiring�diagram............................................................................................................................................................................. 39

9. Power�Window�Regulators..................................................................................................................................................................................... 43
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
Contents
9.1. System�wiring�diagram............................................................................................................................................................................. 43

10. Exterior�Mirrors............................................................................................................................................................................................................................46
10.1. System�wiring�diagram............................................................................................................................................................................. 46

11. Glass�Slide/Tilt�Sunroof.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 49
11.1. System�wiring�diagram............................................................................................................................................................................. 49

12. Alarm�System.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 51
12.1. System�wiring�diagram............................................................................................................................................................................. 52

13. Exterior�Lights............................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 54
13.1. System�wiring�diagram............................................................................................................................................................................. 55
13.2. Adaptive�headlights....................................................................................................................................................................................... 60
13.2.1. Function.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 61
13.2.2. Operation.......................................................................................................................................................................................61
13.2.3. Cornering�light...................................................................................................................................................................... 61
13.2.4. Malfunction................................................................................................................................................................................ 61
13.3. Front�lights................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 62
13.4. Rear�lights..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 63

14. Interior�Lighting.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 64
14.1. System�wiring�diagram............................................................................................................................................................................. 65

15. Seats................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 68
15.1. Front�seats................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 68
15.1.1. System�wiring�diagram............................................................................................................................................68

16. Heating/Air�Conditioning�Systems..........................................................................................................................................................71
16.1. Sensors�and�actuators.............................................................................................................................................................................. 71
16.2. Features............................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 72
16.2.1. IHKA�features......................................................................................................................................................................... 72
16.2.2. Additional�Functions�of�the�IHKA...........................................................................................................72
16.3. 2/1-zone�IHKA........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 73
16.3.1. Control�panel...........................................................................................................................................................................73
16.3.2. System�wiring�diagram............................................................................................................................................74
16.4. Microfilter........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 76
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
1.�Introduction
The�vehicle�electrical�system�of�the�F30�is�based�for�the�most�part�on�the�current�BMW�models.�This
product�information�bulletin�provides�an�overview�of�the�most�important�topics�relating�to�the�vehicle
electrical�system.

For�more�information�on�the�various�topics,�please�refer�to�the�following�documents�covering�the�F01/
F02:

Topic�F30 Training�information�F01/F02
Bus�systems Bus�Systems�F01/F02
Voltage�supply Voltage�Supply�F01/F02
Energy�management Energy�Management�F01/F02
Car�Access�System Car�Access�System�F01/F02
Comfort�Access Comfort�Access�F01/F02
Central�locking�system Central�Locking�System�F01/F02
Power�window�regulators Power�Window�Regulators�F01/F02
Exterior�mirrors Exterior�Mirrors�F01/F02
Glass�slide/tilt�sunroof Slide/Tilt�Sunroof�F01/F02
Alarm�system Alarm�System�F01/F02
Exterior�lights Exterior�Lights�F01/F02
Interior�lighting Interior�Light�F01/F02
Seats Seats�F01/F02
Heating�and�air�conditioning�systems Heating�and�Air�Conditioning�Systems�F01/F02

In�the�F30�the�centralization�of�several�control�units.�Two�control�units�are�installed�in�the�F30�for�this
purpose:

• Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)�and
• Rear�Electronic�Module�(REM).

The�FEM�and�REM�control�units�replace�the�following�control�units�previously�used�in�the�E90:

• Junction�box�(JB)
• Footwell�module�(FRM)
• Car�Access�System�(CAS)
• Comfort�Access�(CA)
• Park�Distance�Control�(PDC).

1
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
2.�Vehicle�Electrical�System
2.1.�Control�units

F30�control�unit�locations

2
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
2.�Vehicle�Electrical�System
Index Explanation
1 Dynamic�Stability�Control�(DSC)
2 Digital�Motor�Electronics�(DME)
3 Vertical�Dynamics�Management�(VDM)
4 Integrated�automatic�heating�/�air�conditioning�(IHKA)
5 Instrument�panel�(KOMBI)
6 Electronic�transmission�control�(EGS)
7 Head�unit
8 High-beam�assistant�(FLA)
9 Roof�function�center�(FZD)
10 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
11 Controller�(CON)
12 Reversible�electric�automatic�reel�right�(REMA�RE)�(not�for�US)
13 Combox
14 Electronic�fuel�pump�control�(EKPS)
15 Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant�(PMA)
16 DC/DC�converter
17 Rear�Electronic�Module�(REM)
18 Blind�spot�detection�(SWW)
19 Video�module�VM�(not�for�US)
20 Hi-Fi�amplifier�AMP/Top-HiFi�amplifier�(AMPT)
21 DVD�changer�(DVDC)
22 Tire�Pressure�Monitoring�System�(TPMS)
23 Integrated�Chassis�Management�(ICM)
24 Gear�selector�switch�(GWS)
25 Reversible�electric�automatic�reel�left�(REMA�LI)�(not�for�US)
26 Driver's�seat�module�(SMFA)
27 Advanced�Crash�Safety�Module�(ACSM)
28 Electronic�Power�Steering�(electromechanical�power�steering)�(EPS)
29 Camera-based�driver�support�systems�(KAFAS)
30 Control�unit�for�camera�systems�(TRSVC)

3
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
2.�Vehicle�Electrical�System
2.2.�Bus�overview

F30�bus�overview

4
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
2.�Vehicle�Electrical�System
Index Explanation
1 Control�units�with�wake-up�authorization
2 Start-up�node�control�units�for�starting�and�synchronizing�the�FlexRay�bus
system
ACSM Advanced�Crash�Safety�Module
AMPT Top-HiFi�amplifier
COMBOX Combox�(Combox�emergency�call,�Multimedia�Combox)
CON Controller
D-CAN Diagnosis-on-Controller�Area�Network
DME Digital�Engine�Electronics�(DME)
DSC Dynamic�Stability�Control
DVDC DVD�changer
EGS Electronic�transmission�control
EKPS Electronic�fuel�pump�control
EPS Electromechanical�Power�Steering
Ethernet Cable-based�data�network�technology�for�local�data�networks
FEM Front�Electronic�Module
FLA High-beam�assistant
FlexRay Fast,�preset�and�fault-tolerant�bus�system�for�use�in�automotive�sector
FZD Roof�function�center
GWS Gear�selector�lever
HEADUNIT/CIC Headunit�(Car�Information�Computer�or�Basic�headunit)
ICM Integrated�Chassis�Management
IHKA Integrated�automatic�heating�/�air�conditioning
K-CAN Body�controller�area�network
K-CAN2 Body�controller�area�network�2
KAFAS Camera-based�driver�assistance�systems
KOMBI Instrument�cluster�(MOST�only�with�option 6WA)
MOST Media�Oriented�System�Transport
OBD On-board�diagnosis�(diagnostic�socket)
PDC Park�Distance�Control�(with�option�5DP,�parking�manoeuvring�assistant:
integrated�in�the�parking�manoeuvring�assistant�control�unit,�otherwise
integrated�in�the�Rear�Electronic�Module�control�unit)
PMA Parking�manoeuvring�assistant
PT-CAN Powertrain�controller�area�network
PT-CAN2 Powertrain�controller�area�network�2
RAD Radio

5
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
2.�Vehicle�Electrical�System
Index Explanation
REM Rear�Electronic�Module
REMA�LI Reversible�electromotive�automatic�reel,�left�(not�US)
REMA�RE Reversible�electromotive�automatic�reel,�right�(not�US)
SMFA Seat�module,�driver
SWW Lane�change�warning
TPMS Tire�Pressure�Monitoring�System
TRSVC Control�unit�for�all-round�vision�camera
VDM Vertical�Dynamics�Management
ZGM Central�gateway�module

The�FlexRay�is�shown�in�a�simplified�form�in�the�overview�of�the�bus�systems.�The�following�system
wiring�diagram�shows�the�actual�physical�layout�(topology).

6
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
2.�Vehicle�Electrical�System

F30�system�wiring�diagram,�FlexRay

7
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
2.�Vehicle�Electrical�System
Index Explanation
1 Dynamic�Stability�Control�DSC
2 Digital�Engine�Electronics�(DME)�or�Digital�Diesel�Electronics�(DDE)�(not�US)
3 Electronic�Power�Steering�(electromechanical�power�steering)�EPS
4 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
5 Vertical�Dynamics�Management�(VDM)
6 Lane�change�warning�SWW
7 Integrated�Chassis�Management�(ICM)

FlexRay�is�used�in�the�F30�as�the�system�bus�for�networking�of�the�systems�that�control�the�dynamic
handling�characteristics�and�engine�control.�A�so-called�star�coupler�with�four�bus�drivers�is�located
in�the�central�gateway�module�(ZGM),�which�is�integrated�in�the�new�Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM).
The�bus�drivers�forward�the�data�of�the�control�units�via�the�communication�controller�to�the�ZGM.�The
FlexRay�control�units�are�connected�to�these�bus�drivers.

Terminating�resistors�are�used�on�both�ends�of�the�data�lines�to�avoid�reflections�on�the�lines.

The�body�controller�area�network�2�(K-CAN2)�facilitates�communication�between�control�units�with
a�high�data�transfer�rate�(500 kBit/s).�The�K-CAN2�is�also�connected�to�the�other�bus�systems�via�the
central�gateway�module�(ZGM).

The�powertrain�controller�area�network�2�(PT-CAN2)�creates�a�redundancy�to�the�powertrain�controller
area�network�(PT-CAN)�in�the�area�of�engine�and�transmission�control.

The�F30�has�Ethernet�access�in�order�to�be�able�to�program�the�complete�vehicle�quickly.�Due�to
the�very�high�data�transfer�rate�of�the�Ethernet�(100 MBit/s),�the�programming�access�via�the�MOST
system�could�be�discontinued.�The�headunit�also�obtains�an�Ethernet�connection,�via�which�the
programming�for�MOST�devices�is�effected.

The�FEM/ZGM�assumes�the�task�in�the�F30�of�distributing�the�telegrams�internally�within�the�vehicle
to�the�buses�and�of�forwarding�to�the�headunit�via�K-CAN2.�The�headunit�then�provides�for�distribution
on�the�MOST.

The�navigation�data�of�the�CIC�High�(Navigation�Professional�option�609)�are�stored�on�its�hard�disk.
These�navigation�data�are�updated�via�the�Ethernet�access�at�the�OBD�II�connection�and�the�internal
vehicle�Ethernet�connection�between�ZGM�and�CIC.

The�D-CAN�at�the�OBD�II�connection�is�used�in�the�dealer�organization�to�program�vehicles�at
"authorized�third�parties".�Legal�provisions�stipulate�that�all�control�units�must�be�able�to�be
programmed�via�the�D-CAN.�HDD�update�is�an�exception.

2.3.�OBD�II�diagnostic�access
The�diagnostic�socket�is�situated�as�in�other�BMW�vehicles�on�the�left�A-pillar.�Both�vehicle�diagnosis
via�the�D-CAN�and�programming�access�via�the�Ethernet�to�the�vehicle�are�made�available�via�the�OBD
II�interface.

8
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
3.�Voltage�Supply
3.1.�System�wiring�diagram

F30�system�wiring�diagram,�voltage�supply

9
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
3.�Voltage�Supply
Index Explanation
1 Power�Distribution�Module�(PDM)
2 Alternator
3 Digital�Engine�Electronics�(DME)�or�Digital�Diesel�Electronics�(DDE)�not�US
4 Starter�motor
5 Electric�fan
6 Relay�for�electric�fan
7 B+�jump�start�terminal�point
8 Power�distribution�box,�front
9 Power�distribution�box,�engine�compartment
10 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
11 Rear�Electronic�Module�(REM)
12 Power�distribution�box,�luggage�compartment
13 Safety�battery�terminal�(SBK)
14 Battery
15 Intelligent�battery�sensor�(IBS)
16 Battery�power�distribution�box
17 Crash�Safety�Module�(ACSM)
Kl.30 Terminal�30
Kl.30B Terminal�30�basic�operation
Kl.15N Ignition�(after-run)
Kl.30F Terminal�30,�fault-dependent

3.2.�Components
The�voltage�supply�of�the�F30�comprises�the�following�components:

• Battery
• Intelligent�battery�sensor�(IBS)
• Safety�battery�terminal�(SBK)
• Power�Distribution�Module�(PDM)
• Power�distribution�box,�front,�with�B+�jump�start�terminal�point
• Power�distribution�box,�engine�compartment
• Power�distribution�box,�luggage�compartment
• Battery�power�distribution�box

10
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
3.�Voltage�Supply
• Battery�cables
• Starter�motor
• Alternator.

Voltage�supply�components

11
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
3.�Voltage�Supply
Index Explanation
A Voltage�supply�components,�front
B Voltage�supply�components,�rear
1 Main�battery�cables
2 Power�distribution�box,�front
3 Power�distribution�box,�engine�compartment
4 B+�jump�start�terminal�point
5 Starter�motor
6 Alternator
7 Power�Distribution�Module�(PDM)
8 Safety�battery�terminal�(SBK)
9 Battery�power�distribution�box
10 Power�distribution�box,�luggage�compartment
11 Intelligent�battery�sensor�(IBS)
12 Battery

3.2.1.�Battery
The�battery�is�located�in�the�luggage�compartment�to�the�right�behind�a�removable�oddments�tray.�It�is
a�wear-resistant�90�Ah�AGM�battery.

Index Explanation
1 Removable�oddments�tray
2 Battery

12
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
3.�Voltage�Supply
3.2.2.�Wiring�harness
There�is�an�increasing�use�of�aluminium�lines�for�the�voltage�supply�in�the�F30.�Lower�weight�and
lower�costs�are�the�reason�for�the�increased�use�of�aluminium.�The�B+�underfloor�cable�made�from
solid�aluminium�with�a�flat�59�mm²�profile�section�runs�from�the�B+�transfer�terminal�point�(rear)�to�the
B+�jump�start�terminal�point�(front).

Connectors�with�a�secondary�lock�(CPA,�Connector�Position�Assurance)�are�used�at�both�the�engine
compartment�power�distribution�box�and�the�luggage�compartment�power�distribution�box.�This
provides�for�significantly�more�reliable�contacting.�Thinner�cables�with�a�cross-section�of�just�0.22
mm²�are�used�in�the�F30.

The�following�tables�shows�the�distribution�of�copper�and�aluminium�cables�in�the�vehicle:

Location Copper�cables Aluminium�cables


Supply,�battery�power�distribution�box�to 10�mm²
luggage�compartment�power�distribution�box
Supply,�battery�power�distribution�box�to�REM 6�mm²
Supply,�battery�power�distribution�box�to�FEM 27�mm²
Supply,�battery�power�distribution�box�to 27�mm²
engine�compartment�power�distribution�box
Supply,�battery�power�distribution�box�to�units 17�mm²
compartment�partition�wall�(PDM�line)

The�cross-section�of�the�line�from�the�power�distribution�box�at�the�front�to�the�EPS�and�the�ground
line�EPS�depends�on�the�steering�of�the�vehicle:

• 27�mm²�aluminium�lines�for�EPS�High�(for�BMW�328i�and�335i)�or�for�EPS+�(for�vehicles�with
variable�sport�steering�(option�2VL).

For�more�information�on�the�Electronic�Power�Steering�EPS,�please�refer�to�the�training�information
“F30�Chassis�and�Suspension".

3.2.3.�Power�distribution�boxes
Two�separate�power�distribution�boxes�-�adapted�to�the�FEM/REM�concept�-�are�installed.�The�engine
compartment�power�distribution�box�is�located�on�the�right�side�of�the�engine�compartment�directly
on�the�front�bulkhead.�The�battery�power�distribution�box�is�no�longer�located�at�the�battery,�but�is
secured�in�front�of�the�battery�at�the�wheel�arch.

A�few�functions�where�load�relays�are�integrated�in�the�FEM/REM�are�fuse-protected�directly�in�the
FEM�or�REM.�This�also�applies�to�the�terminal�30F�controlled�exclusively�by�the�FEM.

13
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
3.�Voltage�Supply

Power�distribution�box,�engine�compartment

Index Explanation
1 Terminal�15N
2 Terminal�30B

When�working�on�the�engine�compartment�power�distribution�box,�it�is�essential�to�ensure�when
closing�the�cover�that�the�four�fastenings�engage�correctly�so�that�the�power�distribution�box�is�safely
protected�against�leaks.

Power�distribution�box,�luggage�compartment

Index Explanation
1 Terminal�15N
2 Terminal�30F
3 Terminal�30B

14
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
3.�Voltage�Supply
3.3.�Stabilization�of�the�vehicle�electrical�system
In�vehicles�equipped�with�the�automatic�engine�start-stop�function�(MSA),�starting�operations,�and
therefore�voltage�dips�in�the�vehicle�electrical�system,�occur�more�frequently.�A�DC/DC�converter
is�installed�in�these�vehicles,�depending�on�the�vehicle�equipment�specification,�to�protect�specific
voltage-sensitive�electrical�components.

The�DC/DC�converter�supplies�a�constant�voltage�to�terminals�30B_DC/DC,�also�during�the�starting
operation.

One�DC/DC�converter�is�installed�in�conjunction�with�one�of�the�following�items�of�optional�equipment:

• Navigation�system�Professional�(optional�extra 609)
• Harman�Kardon�Surround�Sound�System�(option�688).

3.4.�Energy�management
The�energy�management�of�the�F30�has�been�extended�to�include�the�functions�already�added�in�the
F25.

3.4.1.�Charge�state�indicator
If�the�F30�is�in�transport�mode,�the�battery's�state�of�charge�is�continuously�displayed�when�in
operation.�The�carrier�can�therefore�charge�the�battery�on�time�in�order�to�prevent�deep�discharging
of�the�battery,�and�therefore�damage�to�the�battery.�Before�the�vehicle�is�handed�over,�the�dealer�can
check�whether�the�battery�is�sufficiently�charged�or�whether�it�needs�to�be�replaced.

3.4.2.�Influence�of�steering�power
The�power�consumption�of�the�electronic�power�steering�(electromechanical�power�steering)�EPS
is�extremely�high.�In�order�to�avoid�a�brief�reduction�in�the�steering�servo�availability,�the�energy
management�of�the�F30�anticipates�and�responds�to�steering-intensive�driving�manoeuvres�(parking
or�three-point�turns).�To�do�this,�specific�input�variables�(e.g.�driving�speed,�brake�pedal�operation�and
steering�angle)�are�evaluated.�The�energy�management�can�implement�the�following�measures:

• Raise�the�idling�speed�and�adjust�the�ignition�timing�to�increase�the�engine�torque
• Increase�the�vehicle�voltage�via�the�alternator
• Turn�off�convenience�functions�(heated�rear�window,�outside�mirror�heating�system�and�seat
heating).

3.4.3.�Power�distribution�box,�front
A�condenser�is�installed�in�the�front�power�distribution�box�to�reduce�the�harmonic�content�in�the
vehicle�voltage�caused�by�the�alternator.

If�a�faulty�electric�fan�is�replaced,�the�harmonic�content�of�the�voltage�must�also�be�measured.�If�the
harmonic�content�is�too�high,�this�indicates�that�a�condenser�is�faulty�and�must�be�replaced.

15
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
3.�Voltage�Supply
3.5.�Supply�to�EPS
The�F30�is�equipped�as�standard�with�electromechanical�power�steering�(EPS)�with�servotronic�or
variable�sport�steering�(option 2VL)�which�can�be�ordered�as�optional�equipment.

The�EPS�makes�possible�a�reduction�of�the�average�fuel�consumption�by�approx.�3 %�in�comparison�to
conventional�hydraulic�steering.�This�helps�reduce�carbon�dioxide�emissions.

16
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
3.�Voltage�Supply
3.5.1.�System�wiring�diagram

F30�System�wiring�diagram,�EPS�(electromechanical�power�steering)

17
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
3.�Voltage�Supply
Index Explanation
1 Dynamic�Stability�Control�DSC
2 Digital�Engine�Electronics�(DME)�or�Digital�Diesel�Electronics�(DDE)�not�US
3 Electronic�Power�Steering�(electromechanical�power�steering)�EPS
4 Power�distribution�box,�front
5 Power�distribution�box,�engine�compartment
6 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
7 Integrated�Chassis�Management�(ICM)
8 Steering�column�switch�cluster�(SZL)
9 Instrument�cluster�(KOMBI)
Kl.30 Terminal�30
Kl.15N Ignition�(after-run)

3.6.�Battery�Guard
The�Battery�Guard�function�detects�critical�states�of�charge�which�could�jeopardize�engine�starting
and�sends�this�relevant�information�directly�to�the�BMW�Service�authorized�workshop.�The�customer�is
then�notified�by�BMW�Service�department�(via�phone�or�email)�of�the�required�service.

The�optional�equipment�BMW�Assist�with�enhanced�Bluetooth�and�USB�(option�6NL)�and�an�active
BMW�ConnectedDrive�agreement�are�required�for�the�Battery�Guard�function.

The�BMW�TeleServices�Battery�Guard�Call�is�automatically�activated�by�the�vehicle�under�the�following
conditions:

• If�the�battery�voltage�reaches�the�bottom�of�the�starting�ability�limit�because�a�bus�wake-up
signal�is�present,�sleep�mode�is�prevented�or�there�is�a�standby�current�violation�the�BMW
TeleServices�Battery�Guard�informs�the�BMW�Service�authorized�workshop�in�defined�cases
at�the�next�vehicle�start-up�(terminal�15�active).�It�can�then�proactively�contact�the�customer
and�arrange�a�service�appointment�to�eliminate�the�cause.�This�function�is�available�for�the
series�launch�of�the�F30�in�Germany,�the�Netherlands�and�Austria,�the�USA�and�Canada.

18
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
4.�Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
The�Front�Electronic�Module�FEM�is�used�in�the�F30,�similar�to�the�F20.�The�FEM�replaces�the
following�control�units:

• Junction�box�(JB)
• Car�Access�System�(CAS)
• Comfort�Access�(CA)
• Footwell�module�(FRM).

The�ZGM�is�integrated�as�an�independent�control�unit�in�the�FEM.

The�FEM�is�located�at�the�A-pillar�of�the�front�passenger�side.

F30�FEM�installation�location

19
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
4.�Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)

Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)

Index Explanation
1 Connector�(54-pin)
2 Connector�(12-pin)
3 Connector�(42-pin)
4 Connector�(54-pin)
5 Fuses
6 Connector�(1-pin,�B+�supply)
7 Relay
8 Connector�(54-pin)
9 Connector�(54-pin)
10 Connector�(54-pin)

The�following�functions�are�protected�by�fuses�in�the�FEM:

• Steering�column�switch�cluster�(SZL),�operating�facility�for�driver�assistance�systems,
operating�facility�for�lights
• Headlight�driver�module�for�LED,�Rear�Electronic�Module�(REM)
• OBD�II�connector,�IHKA

20
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
4.�Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
• Outside�door�handle�electronics
• Power�window�regulator
• Central�lLocking�system.

The�following�functions�are�switched�by�relays�in�the�FEM:

• Power�window�regulator,�driver
• Power�window�regulator,�front�passenger
• Central�locking�system
• Headlight�cleaning�system
• Starter�motor
• Horn
• Wiper�speed�1/2.

The�following�table�provides�an�overview�of�the�FEM�functions�when�compared�with�the�relevant
control�units:

Function�in�FEM Control�unit�in�E90
A/C�activation�(actuators,�sensors) JB
Wash/wipe�system JB
Steering�column�switch�cluster�(SZL) JB
Central�locking�system�(ZV) JB
Rain-light-solar-condensation�sensor JB
Inside�mirror FZD
Interior�lighting FRM
Exterior�lights FRM
Headlight�beam�throw�adjustment FRM
Power�window�regulators,�front FRM
Exterior�mirrors FRM
Switch�block,�driver's�door FRM
Mirror�heating FRM
Comfort�Access�(CA) CAS
Remote�control�services�(FBD) CAS
Electronic�immobilizer�(EWS) CAS
Terminal�control CAS
Intelligent�battery�sensor�(IBS) CAS
Central�gateway�module�(ZGM) ZGM

21
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
4.�Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
4.1.�Central�gateway�module�(ZGM)
The�task�of�the�ZGM�is�to�connect�all�the�data�bus�systems�to�each�other.�By�connecting�them�in�this
way,�it�is�possible�to�use�information�from�the�individual�bus�systems�on�a�generalized�level.�The�ZGM
is�able�to�implement�different�protocols�and�speeds�on�other�bus�systems.�The�programming�data�are
transmitted�by�Ethernet�to�the�vehicle�via�the�ZGM.

The�ZGM�is�integrated�as�a�module�in�the�FEM�in�the�electrical�system�architecture�2020.�It�is�viewed
as�a�control�unit�within�a�control�unit.

The�ZGM�has�its�own�complete�software�unit,�comprising�bootloader�and�application,�and�its�own
diagnosis�address.�The�ZGM�is�not�codable.�The�bootloader�and�the�application�software�can�be
flashed�independently�of�the�FEM.

4.2.�Control�unit�replacement
A�counter�exchange�with�control�units�from�other�vehicles�is�not�possible.�A�control�unit�can�only�be
ordered�as�a�spare�part.�It�is�important�to�bear�in�mind�in�this�respect�that�the�FEM�and�the�DME�are
supplied�already�coded�to�the�vehicle.�The�advantage�of�this�is�that�only�the�control�unit�is�replaced
and�there�is�no�need�to�adjust�the�electronic�immobilizer.

In�contrast,�an�adjustment�must�be�made�to�the�electronic�transmission�control�after�the�control�unit
is�replaced.�In�the�course�of�this�adjustment�the�FEM�transmits�the�individual�code�to�the�electronic
transmission�control�unit.

22
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
5.�Rear�Electronic�Module�(REM)
The�Rear�Electronic�Module�(REM)�assumes�the�functions�of�JB�and�PDC�in�the�right�of�the�luggage
compartment�of�the�F30.

F30�REM�installation�location

Rear�Electronic�Module�(REM)

23
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
5.�Rear�Electronic�Module�(REM)
Index Explanation
1 Connector�(54-pin)
2 Connector�(26-pin)
3 Connector�(26-pin)
4 Fuses
5 Connector�(1-pin,�B+�supply)

The�following�table�provides�an�overview�of�the�REM�functions�when�compared�with�the�relevant
control�units:

Function�in�REM Control�unit�in�E90
Fill�level�sensor JB
Heated�rear�window JB
Power�window�regulators,�rear JB
Seat�heating JB
Rear�lights FRM
Park�Distance�Control�(PDC) PDC

The�following�functions�are�protected�by�fuses�in�the�REM:

• Heated�rear�window
• Power�window�regulators,�rear
• Roller�sunblind.

The�following�functions�are�switched�by�relays�in�the�REM:

• Heated�rear�window
• Power�window�regulators,�rear
• Roller�sunblind.

24
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
6.�CAS�Functions
There�are�two�distinct�systems�concerned�with�vehicle�access:

• Basic�access,�central�locking�system
• Comfort�Access�(option�322).

The�entire�access�control�of�the�previous�CAS�control�unit�is�integrated�entirely�in�the�FEM.
Mechanical�access�to�the�vehicle�is�confined�to�opening�the�driver's�door�lock.�Complete�locking�of�the
vehicle�is�thus�not�possible�(except�with�option 302�Alarm�system).

25
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
6.�CAS�Functions
6.1.�System�wiring�diagram

F30�system�wiring�diagram,�Car�Access�System

26
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
6.�CAS�Functions
Index Explanation
1 Dynamic�Stability�Control�DSC
2 Digital�Engine�Electronics�(DME)�or�Digital�Diesel�Electronics�(DDE)�not�US
3 Electronic�transmission�control�(EGS)
4 Engine�compartment�lid�contact�switch
5 Hotel�position�switch�(only�in�US�version)
6 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
7 Remote�control�receiver
8 Interior�antenna�(front)
9 Integrated�Chassis�Management�(ICM)
10 START-STOP�button
11 Ring�antenna�(transponder�coil)
12 Brake�light�switch
13 Clutch�switch�(with�manual�gearbox�only)
14 Electronic�steering�lock�(ELV)�not�US
15 Button�for�central�locking�system/hazard�warning�switch
16 Steering�column�switch�cluster�(SLZ)
17 Trunk�pushbutton
18 Instrument�cluster�(KOMBI)
19 Crash�Safety�Module�(ACSM)

27
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
6.�CAS�Functions

F30�Input/output,�Car�Access�System

Index Explanation
1 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
2 Relay,�term.�15N,�term.�30B,�term.�30F
3 Electronic�transmission�control�(EGS)�(start�enable)
4 Digital�Engine�Electronics�(DME)�or�Digital�Diesel�Electronics�not�US�(DDE)
(start�enable)
5 Engine�compartment�lid�contact�switch
6 Interior�antenna�(front)
7 Remote�control�receiver
8 Clutch�switch�(with�manual�gearbox�only)
9 Integrated�Chassis�Management�(ICM)
10 Brake�light�switch�(BLS)
11 Dynamic�Stability�Control�DSC
12 Ring�antenna�(transponder�coil)
13 START-STOP�button

28
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
6.�CAS�Functions
Index Explanation
14 Button�for�central�locking�system/hazard�warning�switch
15 Electronic�steering�lock�(ELV)�(start�enable)�not�US
16 Steering�column�switch�cluster�(SZL)
17 Trunk�pushbutton
Kl.15N Ignition�(after-run)
Kl.30B Terminal�30�basic�operation
Kl.30F Terminal�30,�fault-dependent

6.2.�Overview�of�functions
There�is�no�longer�an�insertion�slot�in�the�F30.�The�vehicle�can�already�be�started�without�a�key�as
standard.�This�function�is�called�"Passive�Go"�(drive�authorization).�However,�to�gain�access�to�the
vehicle,�it�is�still�necessary�to�actuate�the�ID�transmitter.

The�following�CAS�functions�are�integrated�in�the�F30:

• Comfort�Access
The�optional�equipment�Comfort�Access�contains�the�"Comfort�Entry"�and�"Comfort�Exit"
functions.�The�"Passive�Go"�function�comes�as�standard.
• Central�locking�system
• Power�window�regulators
• Slide/tilt�sunroof
• Terminal�control
• Electronic�immobilizer.

Further�CAS�functions�are�among�others:

• Vehicle�data�storage
• Data�transfer�for�Condition�Based�Service�(CBS).

The�CAS�functions�correspond�to�those�in�the�F01�and�are�described�in�the�"Car�Access�System�F01/
F02"�training�information.

With�regard�to�start�enable�by�the�electronic�immobilizer�(also�called�Challenge�Response),�some
changes�have�been�made�from�the�F01.�What�is�new�is�the�omission�of�the�CAS�bus,�because�PT-CAN
and�FlexRay�already�provide�redundancy�of�data�transfer�between�FEM�and�DME.

The�emergency-start�function�(stopping�the�ID�transmitter�at�the�ring�antenna�on�the�steering�column)
is�already�known�from�the�F01.

29
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
6.�CAS�Functions

F30�Redundancy�in�data�transfer

Index Explanation
1 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
2 Digital�Engine�Electronics�(DME)�or�Digital�Diesel�Electronics�(DDE)�not�US
3 Electronic�transmission�control�(EGS)
4 START-STOP�button
5 Ring�antenna�(transponder�coil)

30
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
7.�Comfort�Access
The�Comfort�Access�function�is�integrated�in�the�Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM).

Comfort�Access�contains�the�following�functions:

• Passive�Entry�(access�authorization)
facilitates�access�to�the�vehicle�without�active�use�of�the�ID�transmitter
• Passive�Go�(drive�authorization)
enables�the�vehicle�to�be�started�when�there�is�a�valid�ID�transmitter�in�the�passenger
compartment
• Passive�Exit�(locking�authorization)
enables�the�vehicle�to�be�locked�without�active�use�of�the�ID�transmitter
• Hands-free�trunk�lid�opening
makes�it�possible�for�hands-free�opening�of�the�trunk�lid�by�a�foot�movement�under�the�rear
bumper.

31
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
7.�Comfort�Access
7.1.�System�wiring�diagram

F30�system�wiring�diagram,�Comfort�Access

32
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
7.�Comfort�Access
Index Explanation
1 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
2 Door�contact,�front�passenger�side
3 Outside�door�handle�electronics�(TAGE)�on�front�passenger�side
4 Comfort�Access�antenna,�side�sill,�right
5 Comfort�Access�antenna,�bumper,�rear
6 Comfort�Access�antenna,�luggage�compartment
7 Remote�control�receiver
8 Comfort�Access�antenna,�passenger�compartment,�rear
9 Comfort�Access�antenna,�side�sill,�left
10 Outside�door�handle�electronics�(TAGE)�on�driver's�side
11 Door�contact,�driver's�side
12 Comfort�Access�antenna,�passenger�compartment,�front
Kl.30F Terminal�30,�fault-dependent

For�the�Comfort�Access�function�the�Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)�activates�the�transmitter
antennae�for�the�exterior�and�passenger�compartment.

The�outside�door�handle�electronics�(TAGE)�are�also�read�in�by�the�FEM.

Input/output,�Comfort�Access

33
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
7.�Comfort�Access
Index Explanation
1 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
2 Door�contact,�front�passenger�side
3 Outside�door�handle�electronics�(TAGE)�on�front�passenger�side
4 Comfort�Access�antenna,�side�sill,�right
5 Comfort�Access�antenna,�passenger�compartment,�rear
6 Comfort�Access�antenna,�luggage�compartment
7 Comfort�Access�antenna,�bumper,�rear
8 Comfort�Access�antenna,�passenger�compartment,�front
9 Comfort�Access�antenna,�side�sill,�left
10 Outside�door�handle�electronics�(TAGE)�on�driver's�side
11 Door�contact,�driver's�side

The�components�and�functionality�of�Comfort�Access�are�familiar�from�the�current�BMW�models.

34
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
7.�Comfort�Access
7.2.�Hands-free�trunk�lid�opening

7.2.1.�System�wiring�diagram

F30�system�wiring�diagram�for�hands-free�trunk�lid�opening
35
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
7.�Comfort�Access
Index Explanation
1 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
2 Power�distribution�box,�luggage�compartment
3 Rear�Electronic�Module�(REM)
4 Control�unit�for�hands-free�trunk�lid�opening
5 Sensor�at�top�for�hands-free�trunk�lid�opening
6 Sensor�at�bottom�for�hands-free�trunk�lid�opening
7 Comfort�Access�antenna,�bumper,�rear
8 Trunk�lock
Kl.30F Terminal�30,�fault-dependent

7.2.2.�Functional�description
The�hands-free�trunk�lid�opening�is�another�operating�element�for�the�trunk�for�the�customer.

The�operation�is�effected�by�means�of�targeted�foot�movement�to�and�from�the�bumper.�Two�sensors
detect�the�movement�via�a�capacitive�measurement.

F30�hands-free�trunk�lid�opening�by�foot�movement

36
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
7.�Comfort�Access
Index Explanation
1 Rear�bumper
2 Control�unit�for�hands-free�trunk�lid�opening
3 Sensor�at�top�for�hands-free�trunk�lid�opening
4 Sensor�at�bottom�for�hands-free�trunk�lid�opening

The�following�components�are�involved�in�the�function:

• FEM
• REM
• Trunk�lock
• Control�unit�for�hands-free�trunk�lid�opening
• Comfort�Access�antenna,�bumper,�rear
• Two�sensors.

F30�sensor�for�hands-free�trunk�lid�opening

Index Explanation
1 Control�unit�for�hands-free�trunk�lid�opening
2 Trunk�lock
3 Sensor�at�top�for�hands-free�trunk�lid�opening
4 Sensor�at�bottom�for�hands-free�trunk�lid�opening
5 Comfort�Access�antenna,�bumper,�rear

37
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
7.�Comfort�Access
The�two�sensors�are�connected�to�the�evaluation�electronics�and�constantly�measure�the�capacity.�A
comparison�of�the�time�characteristic�of�the�measured�capacities�permits�the�identification�of�a�certain
movement�pattern.

A�targeted�foot�movement�to�and�from�the�bumper�can�be�detected�herefrom.�The�top�sensor�detects
the�shin,�the�bottom�sensor�the�toes.

The�detection�range�is�between�the�rear�lights.

The�sensors�are�secured�in�the�inside�of�the�rear�bumper.

The�trunk�opens�regardless�if�it�was�locked�or�unlocked.

This�system�might�also�be�referred�to�in�ISTA�as:

• Smart�Opener
• Contact-less�Tailgate
• Contact-free�Tailgate
• Non-contact�Rear�Lid
• Touch-less�Tailgate�Opening
• Hands-free�Trunk�Lid�Opening

38
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
8.�Central�Locking�System
8.1.�System�wiring�diagram

F30�system�wiring�diagram,�central�locking�system

39
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
8.�Central�Locking�System
Index Explanation
1 Trunk�pushbutton�(fitted�as�standard,�depending�on�version)
2 Instrument�cluster�(KOMBI)
3 Button�for�central�locking�system/hazard�warning�switch
4 Hotel�position�switch�(only�in�US�version)
5 Engine�compartment�lid�contact�switch
6 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
7 Door�contact,�central�locking�system�on�front�passenger�side,�front
8 Door�contact,�central�locking,�passenger�side,�rear
9 Central�locking�system,�fuel�filler�flap
10 Rear�Electronic�Module�(REM)
11 Power�distribution�box,�luggage�compartment
12 Trunk�contact�with�trunk�lock
13 Trunk�light
14 Trunk�light
15 Trunk�light
16 Trunk�pushbutton�on�the�outside�of�the�trunk
17 Luggage�compartment�light
18 Remote�control�receiver
19 Door�contact,�central�locking�system,�driver's�side,�rear
20 Door�contact,�central�locking�system,�driver's�side,�front
Kl.30B Terminal�30�basic�operation

The�radio�signal�from�the�ID�transmitter�is�received�by�the�remote�control�receiver.

After�the�remote�control�receiver�has�verified�the�signal,�it�forwards�it�to�the�Front�Electronic�Module
FEM.�The�signal�causes�the�FEM�to�activate�the�central�locking�system�and�the�interior�lighting.

The�FEM�evaluates�the�status�of�all�door�contacts.�In�this�way,�for�example,�the�vehicle�can�be
prevented�from�being�locked�while�the�driver's�door�is�open.

The�status�of�the�central�locking�system�button/hazard�warning�switch�is�also�evaluated�by�the�FEM.
The�FEM�activates�the�central�locking�system,�depending�on�the�status.

The�Rear�Electronic�Module�(REM)�is�responsible�for�sensing�the�status�and�activating�the�central
locking�system�in�the�trunk.�The�FEM�is�responsible�for�the�activation�of�the�fuel�filler�flap.

40
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
8.�Central�Locking�System

Input/output,�central�locking�system

Index Explanation
1 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
2 Engine�compartment�lid�contact�switch
3 Button�for�central�locking�system/hazard�warning�switch
4 Trunk�pushbutton
5 Door�contact,�central�locking�system,�front�passenger�side,�front
6 Door�contact,�central�locking�system,�front�passenger�side,�rear
7 Central�locking�system,�fuel�filler�flap
8 Rear�Electronic�Module�(REM)
9 Trunk�contact�with�trunk�lock
10 Trunk�pushbutton�on�the�outside�of�the�trunk
11 Luggage�compartment�light

41
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
8.�Central�Locking�System
Index Explanation
12 Remote�control�receiver
13 Door�contact,�central�locking�system,�driver's�side,�rear
14 Door�contact,�central�locking�system,�driver's�side,�front
15 Instrument�cluster�(KOMBI)

The�remote�control�receiver�checks�the�data�telegrams�of�the�ID�transmitter�and�transmits�them�when
identified�correctly�via�the�LIN�bus�to�the�FEM.�The�FEM�evaluates�the�signal�and�causes�the�vehicle�to
be�unlocked�or�locked.

The�central�locking�system�functions�for�the�doors�and�the�trunk�are�controlled�by�the�FEM.�The�REM
controls�the�trunk�central�locking�system.

The�central�locking�system�can�be�operated�from�various�positions:

• inside�the�vehicle
via�the�central�locking�system�button�on�the�dashboard
• outside�the�vehicle
via�the�ID�transmitter�or
via�the�door�handle�on�the�driver�or�front�passenger�door�or
the�trunk�pushbutton�on�the�outer�trunk,�for�Comfort�Access�including�Smart�Opener�(option
322).

42
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
9.�Power�Window�Regulators
9.1.�System�wiring�diagram

F30�system�wiring�diagram,�power�window�regulators

43
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
9.�Power�Window�Regulators
Index Explanation
1 Power�distribution�box,�engine�compartment
2 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
3 Power�window�motor�with�indirect�anti-trap�mechanism,�passenger�side,�front
4 Power�window�switch,�front�passenger�side,�front
5 Power�window�motor�with�indirect�anti-trap�mechanism,�passenger�side,�rear
6 Power�window�switch,�front�passenger�side�rear
7 Rear�Electronic�Module�(REM)
8 Remote�control�receiver
9 Power�window�switch�driver's�side,�rear
10 Power�window�motor�with�indirect�anti-trap�mechanism,�driver's�side,�rear
11 Switch�block,�driver's�door
12 Power�window�motor�with�indirect�anti-trap�mechanism,�driver's�side,�front
Kl.30B Terminal�30�basic�operation

The�front�power�window�regulators�are�activated�by�the�FEM.�The�REM�assumes�the�activation�of�the
rear�power�window�regulators.�The�power�window�regulators�at�the�front�are�protected�directly�via�the
FEM�and�the�power�window�regulators�at�the�rear�are�protected�directly�via�the�REM.�The�relevant�load
relays�are�integrated�directly�in�the�FEM/REM.�There�is�therefore�no�need�for�power�to�be�supplied�via
a�power�distribution�box.

The�functions�with�regard�to�comfort�and�anti-trap�protection�are�already�familiar�from�the�E90.

44
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
9.�Power�Window�Regulators

Input/output,�power�window�regulators

Index Explanation
1 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
2 Power�window�motor�with�indirect�anti-trap�mechanism,�passenger�side,�front
3 Power�window�switch,�front�passenger�side,�front
4 Remote�control�receiver
5 Power�window�motor�with�indirect�anti-trap�mechanism,�passenger�side,�rear
6 Power�window�switch,�front�passenger�side�rear
7 Rear�Electronic�Module�(REM)
8 Power�window�switch�driver's�side,�rear
9 Power�window�motor�with�indirect�anti-trap�mechanism,�driver's�side,�rear
10 Switch�block,�driver's�door
11 Power�window�motor�with�indirect�anti-trap�mechanism,�driver's�side,�front

45
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
10.�Exterior�Mirrors
10.1.�System�wiring�diagram

F30�system�wiring�diagram,�exterior�mirrors

46
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
10.�Exterior�Mirrors
Index Explanation
1 Outside�temperature�sensor
2 Power�distribution�box,�engine�compartment
3 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
4 Exterior�mirror,�front�passenger�side�(turn�indicator�light,�mirror�heating,�motors
for�folding�up�and�down�and�for�adjustment)
5 Switch�block,�driver's�door
6 Exterior�mirror,�driver's�side�(turn�indicator�light,�mirror�heating,�motors�for
folding�up�and�down�and�for�adjustment)
7 Instrument�cluster�(KOMBI)
8 Inside�mirror
Kl.30B Terminal�30�basic�operation

The�additional�side�turn�indicator�is�already�integrated�as�standard�in�the�exterior�mirror.�The�side
repeater�is�operated�using�a�LED�fibre-optic�conductor.

The�exterior�mirror�of�the�F30�is�equipped�without�a�local�interconnect�network�bus�connection�in�the
standard�equipment.

The�exterior�mirror�with�a�local�interconnect�network�bus�connection�is�available�in�the�F30�with�the
following�optional�equipment:

• Interior�and�exterior�mirrors�with�automatic�anti-dazzle�function�(option�430)
• Electrical�seat�adjustment�with�memory�(option�459)
• Surround�View�(option�5DL)
• Lane�change�warning�(option�5AG)

47
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
10.�Exterior�Mirrors

F30�Input/output,�exterior�mirrors

Index Explanation
1 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
2 Inside�mirror
3 Exterior�mirror,�front�passenger�side
4 Switch�block,�driver's�door
5 Exterior�mirror,�driver's�side
6 Outside�temperature�sensor
7 Instrument�cluster

48
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
11.�Glass�Slide/Tilt�Sunroof
11.1.�System�wiring�diagram

F30�system�wiring�diagram,�glass�slide/tilt�sunroof

49
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
11.�Glass�Slide/Tilt�Sunroof
Index Explanation
1 Power�distribution�box,�engine�compartment
2 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
3 Remote�control�receiver
4 Roof�function�center�(FZD)
5 Glass�slide/tilt�sunroof�motor
Kl.30 Terminal�30

The�control�and�monitoring�of�the�motors�of�the�slide/tilt�sunroof�takes�place�in�the�roof�function�center
FZD.

The�FZD�is�connected�to�the�Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM),�which�enables�or�disables�operation�of
the�slide/tilt�sunroof.�The�engine�compartment�power�distribution�box�delivers�the�voltage�supply�to
the�motors�via�terminal�30.

F30�Input/output,�glass�slide/tilt�sunroof

Index Explanation
1 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
2 Remote�control�receiver
3 Roof�function�center�(FZD)
4 Glass�slide/tilt�sunroof�motor

50
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
12.�Alarm�System
In�addition�to�the�monitoring�of�doors�and�the�engine�compartment�lid�and�the�trunk,�the�passenger
compartment�is�also�monitored�in�the�F30�with�the�alarm�system.�Together�with�an�ultrasonic�interior
movement�detector�(USIS),�it�is�fully�integrated�in�the�roof�function�center�(FZD).

51
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
12.�Alarm�System
12.1.�System�wiring�diagram

F30�system�wiring�diagram,�alarm�system

52
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
12.�Alarm�System
Index Explanation
1 Engine�compartment�lid�contact�switch
2 Power�distribution�box,�engine�compartment
3 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
4 Door�contact,�front�passenger�side,�front
5 Door�contact�on�front�passenger�side,�rear
6 Rear�Electronic�Module�(REM)
7 Power�distribution�box,�luggage�compartment
8 Trunk�contact�with�trunk�lock
9 Siren�with�tilt�alarm�sensor�SINE
10 Door�contact�on�driver's�side,�rear
11 Door�contact,�driver's�side,�front
12 Roof�function�center�(FZD)�USIS
13 Alarm�system�LED�in�the�inside�mirror
Kl.30 Terminal�30

The�status�of�the�following�components�is�monitored:

• Door�contacts,�from�Front�Electronic�Module�FEM
• Engine�compartment�lid�contact�switch,�from�Front�Electronic�Module�FEM
• Rear�lid�contact�switch,�from�Rear�Electronic�Module�REM.

As�soon�as�a�status�changes,�the�control�unit�for�the�ultrasonic�interior�movement�detector�USIS
receives�a�corresponding�signal�via�the�K-CAN2.�If�the�alarm�system�is�activated,�an�alarm�is�triggered.

53
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
13.�Exterior�Lights
The�exterior�lights�of�the�F30�are�based�on�the�current�BMW�models.

The�F30�is�equipped�with�halogen�headlights�as�standard.�Bi-xenon�headlights�are�available�as
optional�equipment�(option 522).

With�the�optional�equipment�bi-xenon�headlight,�LEDs�are�used�for�the�daytime�running�lights,�side
lights�and�positioning�lights.

With�halogen�headlights,�the�headlight�beam�throw�is�regulated�manually.

Adaptive�headlights�are�available�as�optional�equipment�(option�524)�for�the�F30.�This�is�only�available
in�conjunction�with�bi-xenon�headlights�(option 522).

The�FEM�as�the�master�control�unit�is�responsible�for�the�exterior�light�functions.�It�decides�which
lighting�functions�have�to�be�activated�or�deactivated�and�makes�this�information�available�to�the�REM
via�the�K-CAN2.�The�REM�in�turn�signals�the�status�of�the�activated�function�in�each�case�back�to�the
FEM.

The�additional�LED�turn�indicators�are�in�the�exterior�mirror.�The�additional�turn�indicators�in�the�side
panel�are�therefore�omitted.

For�more�information�on�exterior�lights,�please�refer�to�the�"Exterior�Lights�F01/F02"�training
information.

54
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
13.�Exterior�Lights
13.1.�System�wiring�diagram

F30�system�wiring�diagram,�front�exterior�lights�(with�halogen�headlights)

55
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
13.�Exterior�Lights
Index Explanation
1 Headlight,�left
2 Fog�light,�left�)
3 Fog�light,�right
4 Headlight,�right
5 Power�distribution�box,�engine�compartment
6 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
7 Additional�turn�indicator,�exterior�mirror,�front�passenger�side
8 Battery�power�distribution�box
9 Additional�turn�indicator,�exterior�mirror,�driver's�side
10 Steering�column�switch�cluster�(SZL)
11 Operating�facility,�light�switch
12 Button�for�central�locking�system/hazard�warning�switch
13 Rain-light-solar-condensation�sensor
Kl.30 Terminal�30
Kl.30F Terminal�30,�fault-dependent

56
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
13.�Exterior�Lights

F30�system�wiring�diagram,�front�exterior�lights�(with�xenon�light,�option�522)

57
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
13.�Exterior�Lights
Index Explanation
1 Headlight,�left
1

2 Fog�light,�left
3 Fog�light,�right
4 Headlight,�right
1

5 Power�distribution�box,�engine�compartment
6 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
7 Additional�turn�indicator,�exterior�mirror,�front�passenger�side
8 Battery�power�distribution�box
9 Ride�height�sensor,�rear
10 Integrated�Chassis�Management�(ICM)
11 Additional�turn�indicator,�exterior�mirror,�driver's�side
12 Operating�facility,�light�switch
13 Button�for�central�locking�system/hazard�warning�switch
14 Rain-light-solar-condensation�sensor
15 Steering�column�switch�cluster�(SZL)
16 Dynamic�Stability�Control�DSC
17 Ride�height�sensor,�front

1
�Second�stepper�motor�only�with�adaptive�headlight�(option 524).

58
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
13.�Exterior�Lights

F30�system�wiring�diagram,�rear�exterior�lights

59
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
13.�Exterior�Lights
Index Explanation
1 Dynamic�Stability�Control�(DSC)
2 Electronic�transmission�control�(EGS)
3 Reversing�light�switch
4 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
5 Trailer�module�(AHM)�not�US
6 Power�distribution�box,�luggage�compartment
7 Rear�Electronic�Module�(REM)
8 Battery�power�distribution�box
9 Outer�rear�light,�right
10 Inner�rear�light,�right�(in�trunk)
11 Number-plate�light,�right
12 Number-plate�light,�left
13 Inner�rear�light,�left�(in�trunk)
14 Outer�rear�light,�left
15 Interference�suppression�filter
16 Additional�brake�light
17 Integrated�Chassis�Management�(ICM)
18 Brake�light�switch
19 Operating�facility,�light�switch
20 Steering�column�switch�cluster�(SZL)
21 Button�for�central�locking�system/hazard�warning�switch
22 Rain-light-solar-condensation�sensor
Kl.30 Terminal�30
Kl.30F Terminal�30,�fault-dependent

13.2.�Adaptive�headlights
In�the�F30�the�adaptive�headlight�(option�524)�is�only�available�with�the�following�optional�equipment:

• Rain�sensor�(option 521)
• Xenon�light�(option�522)
• High-beam�assistant�(option 5AC).

The�adaptive�headlight�enables�dynamic�lighting�of�the�roadway�thanks�to�a�variable�headlight�control
unit.

So�as�not�to�dazzle�oncoming�traffic�the�adaptive�headlight�is�not�active�when�reversing�or�when
steering�in�stationary�mode�to�the�left�(for�left-hand�drive�vehicles).

60
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
13.�Exterior�Lights
The�high-beam�assistant/automatic�high-beams�(option�5AC)�is�dazzle-free�with�the�adaptive
headlight�optional�equipment.�More�information�on�the�dazzle-free�high-beam�assistants�can�be�found
in�the�training�information�"Driver�Assist�Systems�of�the�F30".

13.2.1.�Function
The�headlight�follows�the�course�of�the�road�depending�on�the�steering�angle�and�other�parameters.

For�further�information�on�the�adaptive�headlight,�please�refer�to�the�training�information�"F01/F02
Exterior�Lights".

13.2.2.�Operation
The�adaptive�headlight�is�activated�in�switch�position�"A"�when�the�ignition�is�switched�on.

The�cornering�light�is�automatically�activated�depending�on�the�steering�angle�or�turn�indicator.

13.2.3.�Cornering�light
The�cornering�light�function�is�included�in�the�adaptive�headlight�optional�equipment.�At�narrow�bends
or�when�turning,�one�of�the�two�fog�lights�is�activated�as�a�cornering�light�up�to�a�speed�of�65�km/h.
This�illuminates�the�inner�area�of�the�bend�better.�So�as�not�to�dazzle�oncoming�traffic,�the�adaptive
headlight�points�to�the�front�passenger�side�when�the�vehicle�is�stationary.

Index Explanation
1 Without�cornering�light
2 With�cornering�light

13.2.4.�Malfunction
If�there�is�a�fault�with�the�function,�the�following�Check�Control�message�is�displayed:

Adaptive�headlight�is�faulty�or�has�failed.�Have�the�system�checked�as�soon�as�possible.

For�further�information�on�the�adaptive�headlight,�please�refer�to�the�training�information�"F01/F02
Exterior�Lights".

61
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
13.�Exterior�Lights
13.3.�Front�lights
The�following�graphic�shows�the�layout�of�the�front�headlight.

F30�halogen�headlight,�front

Index Explanation
1 Side�lights
2 High-beam�headlight
3 Low-beam�headlight
4 Turn�indicator
5 Daytime�lights

F30�bi-xenon�headlight,�front

Index Explanation
1 LED�for�side�light/daytime�driving�light
2 Low-beam�and�high-beam�headlight
3 Turn�indicator

62
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
13.�Exterior�Lights
For�vehicles�with�a�xenon�light�(option�522)�the�side�lights/daytime�driving�lights�are�realized�via�LED-
operated�corona�rings.

13.4.�Rear�lights
The�F30�features�a�two-part�rear�light.�One�part�is�located�in�the�quarter�panel,�the�other�in�the�trunk.
The�layout�of�the�rear�lights�is�shown�in�the�following�graphic.

F30�rear�light

Index Explanation
1 Turn�indicator
2 Reversing�light
3 Tail�light
4 Rear�fog�light�(not�US)
5 Brake�light

The�bulbs�of�the�rear�light�in�the�side�wall�are�replaced�by�removing�the�lights�from�the�vehicle.�Access
is�done�via�an�opening�in�the�panel�of�the�water�channel.

63
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
14.�Interior�Lighting
The�ambient�light�package�which�is�standard.�The�luggage�compartment�lights�are�controlled�by�the
REM.�The�FEM�is�responsible�for�the�activation�of�all�interior�lighting.

The�components�of�the�interior�lighting�in�the�front�roof�area�are�integrated�in�the�roof�function�center
and�in�the�sun�visors.�The�footwell�lighting�is�located�on�the�underside�of�the�dashboard.�Voltage�is
supplied�to�the�rear�interior�lighting�via�the�roof�function�center.

F30�roof�function�center

Index Explanation
1 Emergency�call�button�(only�with�option 6NL)
2 Switch�for�panorama�glass�roof
3 Indicator�lamp�for�front�passenger�airbag�deactivation
4 Reading�light�button,�right
5 Reading�light,�right
6 Ambient�lighting
7 Interior�light
8 Ambient�lighting
9 Reading�light�on�left
10 Reading�light�button,�left

In�connection�with�the�line�package�BMW�Line�Sport�(PA�7AC),�BMW�Line�Luxury�(PA�7S2)�or�BMW
Line�Modern�(PA�7S1),�the�color�of�the�ambient�lighting�can�be�changed�depending�on�the�line.�The
changeover�of�the�color�and�the�brightness�of�the�ambient�lighting�are�effected�in�a�menu�in�the�CID.
Depending�on�the�vehicle�line�some�of�the�lights�are�installed�as�switchable�two-colored�LEDs.

64
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
14.�Interior�Lighting
14.1.�System�wiring�diagram

F30�system�wiring�diagram�for�interior�lighting

65
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
14.�Interior�Lighting
Index Explanation
1 Footwell�light�on�driver's�side,�front
2 Glove�box�light
3 Glove�box�switch
4 Footwell�light�on�front�passenger�side,�front
5 Power�distribution�box,�engine�compartment
6 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
7 Inside�door�handle�light�on�front�passenger�side
8 Ground�lights�on�outer�door�handle�on�front�passenger�side
9 Entrance�lighting�on�front�passenger�side,�front
10 Door�contact,�front�passenger�side,�front
11 Lighting,�B-pillar,�front�passenger�side
12 Inside�door�handle�light�on�rear�passenger�side
13 Ground�lights�on�outer�door�handle�on�rear�passenger�side
14 Entrance�lighting�passenger's�side,�rear
15 Door�contact�on�front�passenger�side,�rear
16 Power�distribution�box,�luggage�compartment
17 Rear�Electronic�Module�(REM)
18 Luggage�compartment�light
19 Trunk�contact�with�trunk�lock
20 Interior�light�unit,�rear
21 Door�contact�on�driver's�side,�rear
22 Entrance�lighting�driver's�side,�rear
23 Ground�lights�on�outer�door�handle�on�rear�driver's�side
24 Inside�door�handle�light�on�rear�driver's�side
25 Lighting,�B-pillar,�driver's�side
26 Roof�function�center�(FZD)�with�front�interior�light�unit
27 Door�contact,�driver's�side,�front
28 Entrance�lighting�on�driver's�side,�front
29 Ground�lights�on�outer�door�handle�on�front�driver's�side
30 Inside�door�handle�light�on�front�driver's�side
31 Switch�for�vanity�mirror�light�on�driver's�side
32 Vanity�mirror�light�on�driver's�side

66
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
14.�Interior�Lighting
Index Explanation
33 Lighting,�dashboard
34 Vanity�mirror�light�on�passenger�side
35 Switch�for�vanity�mirror�light�on�passenger�side
Kl.30B Terminal�30�basic�operation

67
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
15.�Seats
15.1.�Front�seats

15.1.1.�System�wiring�diagram
4
�Only�with�seat�heating�for�driver�and�front�passenger�(option 494).

68
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
15.�Seats

F30�system�wiring�diagram,�front�seat,�driver's�side�(with�electric�seat�adjustment,�with�memory,�option 459)

69
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
15.�Seats
Index Explanation
1 Power�distribution�box,�engine�compartment
2 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
3 Exterior�mirror,�front�passenger�side
4 Integrated�automatic�heating�/�air�conditioning�(IHKA)
5 Seat�heating�switch,�driver's�side
4

6 Driver's�seat�module (SMFA)
7 Electric�motor,�forward/back�seat�adjustment
8 Electric�motor,�seat�angle�adjustment
9 Electric�motor,�seat�height�adjustment
10 Electric�motor,�backrest�angle�adjustment
11 Solenoid�valves,�backrest�width�adjustment
1

12 Lumbar�support�pump2
13 Solenoid�valves,�lumbar�support�adjustment
3

14 Switch�block,�seat�adjustment
15 Seat�heating,�backrest
4

16 Seat�heating,�seat�surface
4

17 Switch�block,�driver's�door
18 Exterior�mirror,�driver's�side
Kl.30B Terminal�30�basic�operation

1
�Only�with�sports�seats�for�driver�and�front�passenger�(option 481).
2�
Only�with�sports�seats�for�driver�and�front�passenger�(option 481)�or�with�lumbar�support�for�driver
and�front�passenger�(option 488).
3
�Only�with�lumbar�supports�for�driver�and�front�passenger�(option 488).
4
�Only�with�seat�heating�for�driver�and�front�passenger�(option 494).

70
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
16.�Heating/Air�Conditioning�Systems
In�the�F30�an�integrated�heating�and�air-conditioning�system�(IHKA)�is�used�as�standard�equipment�for
the�heating�and�air-conditioning�system.�In�the�E90�an�integrated�heating�/�air-conditioning�regulation
(IHKR)�was�used�as�standard�equipment.

With�an�integrated�heating�/�air-conditioning�regulation�the�duct�temperature�is�adjusted�to�the�value
set�using�the�control�panel.�In�contrast,�with�an�integrated�heating�/�air-conditioning�system�the�interior
temperature�of�the�vehicle�is�also�taken�into�consideration�when�controlling�the�duct�temperature.
If�the�interior�temperature�deviates�greatly�from�the�set�temperature,�the�duct�temperature�is�then
controlled�at�a�lower�or�higher�value�than�the�set�temperature�in�order�to�quickly�reach�the�set
temperature.

The�IHKA�of�the�F30�therefore�has�an�additional�interior�temperature�sensor�installed�in�the�control
panel.�The�sensor�data�is�digitized�in�the�control�panel�and�the�information�transmitted�to�the�IHKA
control�unit�via�the�local�interconnect�network�bus.�Thanks�to�a�computer�model�integrated�in�the�IHKA
controls,�the�forced�ventilation�of�the�interior�temperature�sensor�in�the�F30�could�be�discontinued.
The�duct�temperature�is�measured�using�sensors�in�the�ventilation�system,�which�are�connected
directly�to�the�IHKA�control�unit.

• Integrated�automatic�heating�/�air�conditioning�(IHKA),�2/1-zone.

In�the�zone�specification�the�first�number�denotes�the�number�of�controllable�temperature�zones
(temperature�selector�wheels)�and�the�second�number�the�number�of�controllable�airflow�volume�and
air�distribution�zones�(separate�fan�settings).

16.1.�Sensors�and�actuators
Sensors�and�actuators�which�are�connected�to�the�FEM�control�unit�are�involved�in�the�function�of
the�heating�and�air�conditioning�system�in�the�F30.�The�following�list�provides�an�overview�of�these
components:

• Refrigerant�circuit�pressure�sensor
The�FEM�evaluates�the�pressure�sensor�signal�and�makes�it�available�to�the�IHKA�control�unit
via�K-CAN
• Blower
The�IHKA�control�unit�request�is�sent�via�the�LIN�bus�to�the�blower
• A/C�compressor
The�A/C�compressor�is�controlled�via�a�pulse-width�modulated�signal�by�the�FEM.�The�FEM
can�also�actuate�the�A/C�compressor�clutch.�The�request�is�always�effected�however�through
the�IHKA�control�unit.�In�the�event�of�a�fault,�a�fault�entry�is�made�by�the�FEM.
• Heat�exchanger�water�valve
• Stepper�motors
- Nine�stepper�motors�for�IHKA�2/1�zones

• Rear-seat�area�ventilation�sensor
The�FEM�evaluates�the�signal�from�the�rear-seat�area�ventilation�sensor�and�makes�it�available
to�the�IHKA�control�unit�via�the�K-CAN.

71
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
16.�Heating/Air�Conditioning�Systems
16.2.�Features

16.2.1.�IHKA�features

• Improved�protection�of�the�blower�motor�through�closed�area�of�the�blower�wheel
- Protection�of�the�blower�motor�against�water�and�contaminants

• One-piece�microfilter�on�the�pressure�side�of�the�blower
- Air�filtering�also�in�air�recirculation�function,�thus�improved�air�quality
- Reduced�build-up�of�odors,�as�well�as�less�corrosion�on�evaporator

• Separation�of�IHKA�controls�and�IHKA�control�unit
- The�IHKA�control�unit�is�now�located�at�the�heating�and�air-conditioning�unit
- Communication�between�IHKA�controls�and�IHKA�control�unit�by�means�of�local
interconnect�network�bus�via�the�audio�control�panel

• Air-conditioning�with�clutch
In�the�case�of�a�switched-off�air-conditioning�system�the�compressor�is�separated�from�the
belt�drive�by�a�clutch,�the�load�on�the�engine�is�therefore�less�thus�saving�on�fuel
• ECO�PRO�function
- Climate�control
Less�air-drying�and�cooling,�thus�less�drive�power�required�for�A/C�compressor
A/C�compressor�is�switched�off�if�required�temperature�is�reached�also�without�cold-air
generation
- Heating�mode
Dispensed�with�operating�mode�of�combustion�engine�with�increased�heat�dissipation.

16.2.2.�Additional�Functions�of�the�IHKA

• Operable�stratification
• Air�flaps�are�individually�activated�using�9�stepper�motors
• Temperature�for�rear-seat�area�ventilation�can�be�adjusted
The�FEM�evaluates�the�signal�from�the�rear-seat�area�ventilation�sensor�and�makes�it�available
to�the�IHKA�control�unit�via�the�K-CAN.

72
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
16.�Heating/Air�Conditioning�Systems
16.3.�2/1-zone�IHKA

16.3.1.�Control�panel
In�the�F30�the�IHKA�2/1�zones�control�panel�is�installed.

F30�control�panel,�IHKA�2/1�zones

73
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
16.�Heating/Air�Conditioning�Systems
16.3.2.�System�wiring�diagram

F30�system�wiring�diagram,�IHKA�2/1�zones

74
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
16.�Heating/Air�Conditioning�Systems
Index Explanation
1 Refrigerant�circuit�pressure�sensor
2 Heat�exchanger�water�valve
3 A/C�compressor
4 Power�distribution�box,�front
5 Power�distribution�box,�engine�compartment
6 Automatic�air�recirculation�control�sensor
7 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
8 Rear�Electronic�Module�(REM)
9 Heated�rear�window
10 Stratification�potentiometer�for�rear-seat�area�ventilation
11 Temperature�sensor�for�evaporator
12 Temperature�sensor,�footwell,�front�right
13 Temperature�sensor,�footwell,�front�left
14 Stepper�motor,�mixing�air�flap,�left
15 Stepper�motor,�mixing�air�flap,�right
16 Stepper�motor,�fresh�air/ram�air/recirculated�air
17 Stepper�motor,�stratification,�front�right
18 Stepper�motor,�stratification,�front�left
19 Stepper�motor,�temperature,�air�quantity,�rear�passenger�compartment
20 Stepper�motor,�footwell,�right
21 Stepper�motor,�footwell,�left
22 Stepper�motor,�defrost
23 Electric�auxiliary�heater�(only�for�diesel�fuel�vehicles)
24 IHKA�control�unit
25 Audio�control�panel
26 IHKA�controls�with�interior�temperature�sensor
27 Rain-light-solar-condensation�sensor
28 Ventilation�temperature�sensor,�left
29 Stratification�potentiometer�for�front�ventilation
30 Ventilation�temperature�sensor,�right
31 Blower
32 Blower�output�stage
Kl.30 Terminal�30
Kl.30B Terminal�30�basic�operation
Kl.15N Ignition�(after-run)

75
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
16.�Heating/Air�Conditioning�Systems
16.4.�Microfilter
The�microfilter�is�installed�on�the�pressure�side�of�the�blower.�This�reduces�air�contaminants�in�both
fresh-air�and�air�recirculation�modes.�Evaporator�corrosion�and�the�build-up�of�odors�are�also�reduced.

Air�route�in�the�heating�and�air�conditioning�system�(air�recirculation�mode)

Index Explanation
1 Evaporator
2 Filter
3 Recirculated�air�flap
4 Blower
5 Recirculated�air�inlet�flap�(opened)

76
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
16.�Heating/Air�Conditioning�Systems

Air�route�in�the�heating�and�air�conditioning�system�(fresh-air�mode)

Index Explanation
1 Evaporator
2 Filter
3 Recirculated�air�flap
4 Blower
5 Recirculated�air�inlet�flap�(closed)
6 Fresh�air�inlet

The�one-part�microfilter�is�located�in�the�F30�behind�the�glove�box�and�can�be�easily�replaced�through
the�footwell�on�the�passenger�side.

77
F30�General�Vehicle�Electronics
16.�Heating/Air�Conditioning�Systems

Microfilter

Index Explanation
1 Microfilter
2 Filter�cover

78
Bayerische�Motorenwerke�Aktiengesellschaft
Qualifizierung�und�Training
Röntgenstraße�7
85716�Unterschleißheim,�Germany
Technical�training.
Product�information.
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems

BMW�Service
General�information

Symbols�used

The�following�symbol�is�used�in�this�document�to�facilitate�better�comprehension�or�to�draw�attention
to�very�important�information:

Contains�important�safety�information�and�information�that�needs�to�be�observed�strictly�in�order�to
guarantee�the�smooth�operation�of�the�system.

Information�status�and�national-market�versions

BMW�Group�vehicles�meet�the�requirements�of�the�highest�safety�and�quality�standards.�Changes�in
requirements�for�environmental�protection,�customer�benefits�and�design�render�necessary�continu-
ous�development�of�systems�and�components.�Consequently,�there�may�be�discrepancies�between
the�contents�of�this�document�and�the�vehicles�available�in�the�training�course.

This�document�basically�relates�to�the�European�version�of�left-hand�drive�vehicles.�Some�operating
elements�or�components�are�arranged�differently�in�right-hand�drive�vehicles�than�shown�in�the�graph-
ics�in�this�document.�Further�differences�may�arise�as�a�result�of�the�equipment�specification�in�specif-
ic�markets�or�countries.

Additional�sources�of�information

Further�information�on�the�individual�topics�can�be�found�in�the�following:

• Owner's�Handbook
• Integrated�Service�Technical�Application.

Contact:�[email protected]

©2011�BMW�AG,�Munich,�Germany

Reprints�of�this�publication�or�its�parts�require�the�written�approval�of�BMW�AG,�Munich

The�information�contained�in�this�document�forms�an�integral�part�of�the�technical�training�of�the�BMW
Group�and�is�intended�for�the�trainer�and�participants�in�the�seminar.�Refer�to�the�latest�relevant�infor-
mation�systems�of�the�BMW�Group�for�any�changes/additions�to�the�technical�data.

Information�status:�September�2011
VH-23/International�Technical�Training
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
Contents
1. Introduction............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 1
1.1. Bus�overview................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 2

2. KAFAS................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................5
2.1. System�wiring�diagram................................................................................................................................................................................. 6
2.2. Operating�facility..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7
2.3. Lane�departure�warning.............................................................................................................................................................................. 8
2.4. Collision�warning.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8
2.4.1. Operation........................................................................................................................................................................................... 8
2.4.2. Operating�principle............................................................................................................................................................ 9
2.4.3. Warning�function................................................................................................................................................................... 9
2.5. Speed�Limit�Information......................................................................................................................................................................... 10

3. High-beam�Assistant........................................................................................................................................................................................................ 12
3.1. System�wiring�diagram,�high-beam�assistant�without�KAFAS�control�unit.............13

4. Lane�Change�Warning.....................................................................................................................................................................................................15
4.1. Operating�principle..........................................................................................................................................................................................15
4.2. System�wiring�diagram............................................................................................................................................................................. 16
4.3. Operation........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 17
4.4. Warning�function................................................................................................................................................................................................ 17
4.4.1. Information�level.................................................................................................................................................................17
4.4.2. Warning............................................................................................................................................................................................ 18
4.5. System�limits............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 18

5. TRSVC.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 19
5.1. Installation�locations..................................................................................................................................................................................... 19
5.2. System�wiring�diagram� ........................................................................................................................................................................... 21
5.3. Reversing�camera.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 22
5.3.1. System�wiring�diagram............................................................................................................................................23
5.3.2. Camera�replacement.................................................................................................................................................. 24
5.3.3. Installation�location....................................................................................................................................................... 25
5.4. Top�View.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 25
5.4.1. Operation.......................................................................................................................................................................................25
5.4.2. Display............................................................................................................................................................................................... 25
5.4.3. Camera�replacement.................................................................................................................................................. 26
5.5. Side�View........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 26
5.5.1. Operation.......................................................................................................................................................................................26
5.5.2. Display............................................................................................................................................................................................... 27
5.5.3. Camera�replacement.................................................................................................................................................. 27
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
Contents
6. Park�Distance�Control..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 28
6.1. System�wiring�diagram............................................................................................................................................................................. 29

7. Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant................................................................................................................................................................... 31
7.1. System�components.................................................................................................................................................................................... 31
7.1.1. System�wiring�diagram............................................................................................................................................33
7.1.2. Sensors............................................................................................................................................................................................ 34
7.1.3. Control�unit................................................................................................................................................................................ 35
7.2. Notes�for�Service............................................................................................................................................................................................... 36

8. DCC.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 38

9. Head-Up�Display....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 39
9.1. Operating�principle..........................................................................................................................................................................................39
9.2. Installation�location......................................................................................................................................................................................... 40
9.3. System�wiring�diagram............................................................................................................................................................................. 42
9.4. Operation........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 43
9.4.1. Switching�on/off..................................................................................................................................................................43
9.4.2. Settings............................................................................................................................................................................................43
9.5. Display................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 43
9.5.1. Recognizability�of�the�display....................................................................................................................... 44
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
1.�Introduction
BMW�has�long�since�offered�a�comprehensive�range�of�driver�assist�systems.�The�driver�assist�sys-
tems�facilitate�driving�of�the�vehicle�by

• Providing�the�driver�with�information
• Giving�the�driver�suggestions
• Automatically�intervening�in�the�driving�process.

This�section�contains�an�overview�of�all�driver�assist�systems�available�in�the�F30.�There�are�also�new
features�such�as�lane�change�warning.

The�centralization�of�many�control�units�in�the�FEM�and�REM.�However,�the�basic�principle�and�the
functions�of�the�driver�assist�systems�correspond�for�the�most�part�to�the�counterpart�systems�in�the
current�BMW�models.

For�further�information�on�the�individual�systems,�please�refer�to�the�training�material�for�the�F01/F02:

• DCC�F01/F02
• KAFAS�F01/F02.

1
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
1.�Introduction
1.1.�Bus�overview

F30�Bus�overview

2
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
1.�Introduction
Index Explanation
1 Control�units�with�wake-up�authorization
2 Start-up�node�control�units�for�starting�and�synchronizing�the�FlexRay�bus
system
ACSM Advanced�Crash�Safety�Module
AMPT Top-HiFi�amplifier
COMBOX Combox�(Combox�emergency�call,�Multimedia�Combox)
CON Controller
D-CAN Diagnosis-on-Controller�Area�Network
DME Digital�Engine�Electronics�(DME)
DSC Dynamic�Stability�Control
DVDC DVD�changer
EGS Electronic�transmission�control
EKPS Electronic�fuel�pump�control
EPS Electromechanical�Power�Steering
Ethernet Cable-based�data�network�technology�for�local�data�networks
FEM Front�Electronic�Module
FLA High-beam�assistant
FlexRay Fast,�preset�and�fault-tolerant�bus�system�for�use�in�automotive�sector
FZD Roof�function�center
GWS Gear�selector�lever
HEADUNIT/CIC Headunit�(Car�Information�Computer�or�Basic�headunit)
ICM Integrated�Chassis�Management
IHKA Integrated�automatic�heating�/�air�conditioning
K-CAN Body�controller�area�network
K-CAN2 Body�controller�area�network�2
KAFAS Camera-based�driver�assistance�systems
KOMBI Instrument�cluster�(MOST�only�with�option 6WA)
MOST Media�Oriented�System�Transport
OBD On-board�diagnosis�(diagnostic�socket)
PDC Park�Distance�Control�(with�option�5DP,�parking�manoeuvring�assistant:
integrated�in�the�parking�manoeuvring�assistant�control�unit,�otherwise
integrated�in�the�Rear�Electronic�Module�control�unit)
PMA Parking�manoeuvring�assistant
PT-CAN Powertrain�controller�area�network
PT-CAN2 Powertrain�controller�area�network�2
RAD Radio

3
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
1.�Introduction
Index Explanation
REM Rear�Electronic�Module
REMA�LI Reversible�electromotive�automatic�reel,�left�(not�US)
REMA�RE Reversible�electromotive�automatic�reel,�right�(not�US)
SMFA Seat�module,�driver
SWW Lane�change�warning
TPMS Tire�Pressure�Monitoring�System
TRSVC Control�unit�for�all-round�vision�camera
VDM Vertical�Dynamics�Management
ZGM Central�gateway�module

4
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
2.�KAFAS
The�following�camera-based�driver�support�systems�are�available�as�optional�equipment�in�the�F30:

• Lane�departure�warning�including�collision�warning�(option�5AD)
• Road�sign�recognition�(option 8TH�Speed�Limit�Information)
• High-beam�assistant�(FLA)�(option 5AC)

If�the�customer�chooses�exclusively�the�high-beam�assistant�(FLA)�from�the�optional�equipment�range,
the�system�is�implemented�with�its�own�FLA�video�camera�and�its�own�FLA�control�unit�electronics�in
the�inside�mirror.

5
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
2.�KAFAS
2.1.�System�wiring�diagram

F30�System�wiring�diagram,�KAFAS

6
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
2.�KAFAS
Index Explanation
1 Dynamic�Stability�Control�(DSC)
2 KAFAS�video�camera
3 Video�camera�heater
4 Power�distribution�box,�front
5 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
6 Central�information�display�(CID)
7 Headunit
8 Reversible�electromotive�automatic�reel,�right�REMABF�(not�US)
9 Integrated�Chassis�Management�(ICM)
10 Reversible�electromotive�automatic�reel,�left�REMAFA�(not�US)
11 Operating�facility,�light�switch
12 Operating�facility,�driver�assist�systems
13 Steering�column�switch�cluster�(SZL)
14 Instrument�cluster�(KOMBI)
15 Head-Up�Display�HUD
16 KAFAS�control�unit
Kl.15N Ignition�(after-run)
Kl.30F Terminal�30,�fault-dependent

2.2.�Operating�facility

F30�Operating�facility,�driver�assist�systems

Index Explanation
1 Lane�change�warning
2 Collision�warning
3 Lane�departure�warning
4 Head‐Up�Display�(HUD)�button�not�installed,�now�in�the�CIC�under
“Settings”�“Head-Up�Display”

7
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
2.�KAFAS
2.3.�Lane�departure�warning
The�lane�departure�warning�(option�5AD)�warns�the�driver�by�vibrations�in�the�steering�wheel�of�the�in-
advertent�departure�from�a�given�lane.�The�prerequisite�for�this�is�the�presence�of�suitable�roadway�or
lane�markings,�that�can�be�recognized�with�the�KAFAS�video�camera�of�the�control�unit.�The�KAFAS
video�camera�is�accommodated�in�the�mirror�base.

The�system�can�thus�support�the�driver�in�maintaining�his�attention.�The�responsibility�for�the�vehicle
remains�exclusively�with�the�driver.

The�system�is�designed�to�support�the�driver�on�highways�and�high-quality�country�roads.�Warnings
are�therefore�only�issued�at�speeds�greater�than�70�km/h�or�43�mph.

The�system�is�activated�or�deactivated�by�pressing�the�button�"Lane�change�warning"�in�the�operating
facility�of�the�driver�assist�systems:

• Activate:�LED�lights�up�over�the�button
• Deactivate:�LED�goes�out�over�the�button.

The�state�is�saved�for�the�ID�transmitter�currently�used.

You�can�obtain�more�information�on�the�lane�departure�warning�system�in�the�"KAFAS�F01/F02"�train-
ing�information.

The�system�cannot�replace�a�personal�assessment�of�the�roads�and�traffic�situation.�If�the�warning�is
issued,�do�not�respond�by�moving�the�steering�wheel�with�unnecessary�force�as�this�could�result�in
control�over�the�vehicle�being�lost.

2.4.�Collision�warning
The�collision�warning�for�equipment�without�ACC�is�an�integral�part�of�the�lane�departure�warning�sys-
tem�(option�5AD)�and�warns�the�driver�of�a�possible�risk�of�collision.�The�collision�warning�is�realized
with�help�of�the�KAFAS�system.

2.4.1.�Operation
The�system�is�activated�or�deactivated�by�pressing�the�button�"Collision�warning"�in�the�operating�fa-
cility�of�the�driver�assist�systems:

• Activate:�LED�lights�up�over�the�button
• Deactivate:�LED�goes�out�over�the�button.

The�state�is�saved�for�the�ID�transmitter�currently�used.

A�display�on�the�CID�is�opened�upon�activation�of�the�function.�Here�the�driver�can�configure�the�time
of�the�early�warning�in�two�stages,�or�deactivate�and�reactivate�the�early�warning.�The�state�is�saved�for
the�ID�transmitter�currently�used.

8
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
2.�KAFAS
2.4.2.�Operating�principle
The�system�warns�of�a�possible�collision�from�a�speed�of�approx.�15�km/h�or�10�mph�in�two�stages.

The�KAFAS�video�camera�records�the�scenery�ahead�of�the�vehicle�and�uses�image�processing�to�de-
tect�vehicles�and�stationary�objects�in�the�field�of�view.�The�corresponding�warning�stages�are�output
in�critical�situations�on�the�basis�of�the�calculated�positions,�distances�and�relative�speeds�of�the�oth-
er�vehicles.�In�addition�to�the�warnings,�the�vehicle's�brakes�are�prepared�for�emergency�braking�in�the
event�of�an�acute�warning.�In�contrast�to�forward�collision�warning�with�braking�function,�there�is,�how-
ever,�no�brake�intervention�by�the�system.

When�an�object�is�deliberately�approached/driven�into,�the�collision�warning�is�issued�later�so�as�to
avoid�unauthorized�warnings.

2.4.3.�Warning�function
The�warning�function�corresponds�to�the�collision�warning�with�brake�function.�The�warning�function�is
divided�into�two�stages.�It�is�displayed�in�the�instrument�cluster.

Collision�warning�display�in�the�instrument�cluster

Early�warning

The�early�warning�is�issued�for�example�in�the�event�of�an�approaching�risk�of�collision�or�if�the�vehicle
is�very�close�to�the�vehicle�in�front.

The�early�warning�is�indicated�by�a�vehicle�permanently�illuminated�in�red�in�the�instrument�cluster.

The�time�of�the�early�warning�can�be�configured�in�the�CID.

Acute�warning

The�acute�warning�is�issued�in�the�event�of�an�immediate�risk�of�collision�when�the�vehicle�is�approach-
ing�another�object�at�a�relatively�high�differential�speed.�The�acute�warning�cannot�be�deactivated.

An�acute�warning�is�indicated�to�the�driver�by�a�red�flashing�vehicle�in�the�instrument�cluster.�In�addi-
tion,�an�acoustic�warning�signal�is�sounded.�The�acute�warning�is�a�prompt�for�braking�intervention�and
if�necessary�for�an�evasive�maneuver.

The�acute�warning�does�not�relieve�the�driver�of�their�responsibility�to�adapt�their�driving�speed�and
driving�style�to�the�road�and�traffic�conditions.

9
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
2.�KAFAS

System�limitations�mean�that�warnings�may�under�certain�circumstances�not�be�issued�or�are�issued
too�late�or�without�authorization.�The�driver�must�therefore�always�remain�alert�and�observant�so�that
they�can�actively�intervene�at�any�time�so�as�to�avoid�the�risk�of�an�accident.

2.5.�Speed�Limit�Information
The�Speed�Limit�Detection�system�is�introduced�for�the�first�time�to�the�US�market�with�the�launch�of
the�F30�in�2012.�The�option�8TH�Speed�Limit�Information�is�only�available�in�combination�with�ZDA
option.

Note:�The�Driver�Assistance�(ZDA)�option�is�necessary�because�it�includes�the�KAFAS�control
unit.�The�KAFAS�system�also�incorporates�LDW,�SLI,�Front�Collision�Warning�and�High�Beam
Assistant.

The�current�posted�speed�limit�signs�are�displayed�in�the�instrument�cluster�and�in�the�Head-Up�Dis-
play�in�order�to�remind�the�driver�not�to�exceed�the�legal�speed�limit.�Speed�Limit�Information�function
works�in�combination�with�the�Navigation�system�(option�609).

Note:�Remember�that�the�driver�assumes�full�responsibility�for�the�vehicle�and�the�speed�at
which�it�is�operated�at�all�times.

The�control�unit�for�the�Speed�Limit�Information�function�is�the�KAFAS�control�unit.

The�KAFAS�video�camera�monitors�the�road�signs�at�the�side�of�the�road�and�takes�into�account�the
information�from�the�Navigation�system�(when�necessary).�The�display�of�the�top�speed�limit�signs�is
based�on�the�evaluation�of�data�from�the�navigation�system�and�the�evaluation�of�image�data�recorded
by�the�KAFAS�video�camera.

The�KAFAS�unit�will�request�the�speed�limit�information�from�the�Navigation�only�if�there�are�no�speed
limit�signs�detected.�If�the�data�is�not�available�3�dashes�will�be�displayed.

The�maximum�speed�allowed�of�the�road�currently�driven�is�displayed�in�the�instrument�cluster�and�in
the�Head-Up�Display.�If�the�vehicle�does�not�have�HUD,�the�end�user�can�display�the�speed�limit�info�by
using�the�BC�button.�This�is�similar�to�how�the�mpg�or�miles�to�empty�is�displayed�(in�the�same�cluster
display).�If�the�vehicle�has�HUD,�then�it�has�to�be�activated�in�the�HUD�menu�via�iDrive.�It�is�important�to
note�here�that�the�option�8TH�Speed�Limit�Information�pertains�only�to�the�maximum�or�top�speed�lim-
it�posted�on�the�highway.�This�has�nothing�to�do�with�ACC�or�the�speed�limit�warning�which�can�be�set
via�the�iDrive.

10
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
2.�KAFAS

Option�8TH�Speed�Limit�Information�displayed�in�HUD

Option�8TH�Speed�Limit�Information�displayed�in�Kombi

The�system�cannot�replace�the�driver's�personal�assessment�of�the�road�and�traffic�situation.�Speed
Limit�Information�supports�the�driver�and�does�not�replace�the�human�eye.

This�system�was�specially�adapted�to�the�US�market�to�recognize�road�speed�signs�only�and�thus�will
not�recognize�stop�signs,�yield�signs�or�any�other�signs.

11
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
3.�High-beam�Assistant
The�high-beam�assistant�FLA�(option�5AC)�assists�the�customer�in�the�use�of�the�high-beam�head-
lights.�Depending�on�the�traffic�situation,�the�prevailing�ambient�light�conditions�and�which�lights�on
the�vehicle�have�been�switched�on,�the�FLA�switches�on�the�high-beam�headlights�automatically�and
thereby�relieves�the�driver�of�having�to�switch�on�the�high-beam�headlight�manually.

The�high-beam�headlight�can�still�be�switched�on�and�off�manually�as�usual.�The�driver�always�has�the
capability,�and�indeed�the�obligation,�to�override�the�system�whenever�the�situation�requires�it.

The�high-beam�assistant�is�only�activated�in�the�F30�if�the�light�switch�is�in�the�switch�position�"A".

The�identification�of�other�road�users�for�automatic�dipping�of�the�high-beam�headlight�is�effected�with
help�of�a�video�camera.�The�video�camera�or�control�used�depends�on�whether�other�KAFAS�system
components�are�installed:

• In�the�combination�with�a�lane�departure�warning�,�the�high-beam�assistant�function�is�realized
with�the�KAFAS�video�camera�and�the�KAFAS�control�unit.
• If�the�customer�only�selects�the�high-beam�assistant�option,�this�functionality�is�implemented
with�a�separate�FLA�video�camera�and�a�separate�FLA�control�unit.�The�video�camera�and�the
control�unit�are�installed�in�a�shared�housing�in�the�inside�mirror.

The�FLA�video�camera�is�a�simplified�image�sensor�that�can�identify�the�color�and�intensity�of�light.

For�more�information�on�the�high-beam�assistant�system,�please�refer�to�the�"KAFAS�F01/F02"�train-
ing�information.

The�high-beam�assistant�cannot�replace�a�personal�decision�on�the�use�of�the�high-beam�headlight.�In
some�situations,�manual�dipping�is�required�as�otherwise�there�is�a�safety�risk.

12
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
3.�High-beam�Assistant
3.1.�System�wiring�diagram,�high-beam�assistant�without�KAFAS
control�unit

F30�System�wiring�diagram,�high-beam�assistant�without�KAFAS�control�unit

13
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
3.�High-beam�Assistant
Index Explanation
1 FLA�video�camera�and�FLA�control�unit�in�the�inside�mirror
2 Power�distribution�box,�front
3 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
4 Operating�facility,�light�switch
5 Steering�column�switch�cluster�(SZL)
6 Instrument�cluster�(KOMBI)
Kl.15N Ignition�(after-run)
Kl.30F Terminal�30,�fault-dependent

The�system�wiring�diagram�for�the�high-beam�assistant�function�with�KAFAS�is�included�in�the�KAFAS
system�wiring�diagram�in�this�training�information.

14
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
4.�Lane�Change�Warning
The�lane�change�warning�(option�5AG)�informs�the�driver�at�speeds�above�50�km/h�or�31�mph�of�possi-
ble�collisions�in�the�event�of�a�lane�change.

4.1.�Operating�principle
Two�24�GHz�radar�sensors�located�under�the�rear�bumper�monitor�at�speeds�above�50�km/h�or�31�mph
the�space�behind�and�beside�the�vehicle.�The�radar�sensors�are�largely�weather-dependent�and�can
reliably�identify�vehicles�up�to�a�distance�of�approx.�60�m.�In�the�blind�spot�range,�the�radar�sensors�for
the�lane�change�warning�identify�other�vehicles�on�the�Neighboring�lane�up�to�roughly�the�center�of
own�vehicle.

Typical�traffic�situation�for�lane�change�warning

Index Explanation
1 Approaching�vehicle�in�the�left�neighboring�lane
2 Vehicle�in�the�left�neighboring�lane�driving�at�the�same�speed
3 Own�vehicle�planning�to�change�lane�to�the�left
4 Identification�range�of�the�lane�change�warning�in�the�area�of�the�blind�spot
(left/right)
5 Faster�vehicle�in�the�neighboring�lane�to�the�right
6 Identification�range�of�the�lane�change�warning�behind�the�F30

15
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
4.�Lane�Change�Warning
4.2.�System�wiring�diagram

F30�System�wiring�diagram�for�lane�change�warning

16
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
4.�Lane�Change�Warning
Index Explanation
1 Rain-light-solar-condensation�sensor�(RLSBS)
2 Power�distribution�box,�front
3 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
4 Light�in�the�exterior�mirror�on�front�passenger�side
5 Trailer�module�AHM�(not�US)
6 Power�distribution�box,�luggage�compartment
7 Lane�change�warning�radar�sensor,�SWW�master�control�unit
8 Lane�change�warning�radar�sensor,�slave�control�unit�SWW2
9 Integrated�Chassis�Management�(ICM)
10 Switch�block�for�driver's�side�door
11 Light�in�the�exterior�mirror�on�driver's�side
12 Operating�facility�for�driver�assist�systems
13 Instrument�cluster�(KOMBI)
14 Steering�column�switch�cluster�(SZL)
Kl.15N Ignition�(after-run)
Kl.30B Terminal�30�basic�operation

4.3.�Operation
The�system�is�activated�or�deactivated�by�pressing�the�button�"Lane�change�warning"�in�the�operating
facility�of�the�driver�assistant�systems:

• Activate:�LED�lights�up�over�the�button
• Deactivate:�LED�goes�out�over�the�button.

The�state�is�saved�for�the�ID�transmitter�currently�used.

4.4.�Warning�function

4.4.1.�Information�level
The�LED�warning�light�in�the�mirror�housing�displays�if�vehicles�are�in�the�blind�spot�or�are�approaching
from�behind.

17
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
4.�Lane�Change�Warning

LED�warning�light�in�the�mirror�housing

4.4.2.�Warning
If�the�turn�indicator�is�set,�while�a�vehicle�is�in�the�critical�area,�the�steering�wheel�vibrates�temporarily
and�the�light�in�the�mirror�housing�flashes�brightly.�The�warning�ends�if�the�turn�indicator�is�reset�to�the
initial�position�or�the�other�vehicle�leaves�the�critical�area.

4.5.�System�limits

The�system�cannot�replace�the�driver's�personal�assessment�of�the�road�and�traffic�situation.

If�warnings�are�issued,�do�not�respond�by�moving�the�steering�wheel�with�unnecessary�force�as�this
could�result�in�control�over�the�vehicle�being�lost.

The�function�can�be�restricted�in�the�following�situations�for�example:

• Sharp�bends�or�on�narrow�roadways
• Heavy�fog,�rain�or�snow
• Dirty�or�frozen�bumper
• Labels�are�attached�to�the�bumper
• The�speed�of�the�approaching�vehicle�is�a�great�deal�higher�than�own�speed.

18
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
5.�TRSVC
Surround�View�provides�support�for�parking,�manoeuvring�and�for�complex�exits�and�junctions.�In�the
F30�the�Surround�View�optional�equipment�(option 5DL)�is�only�available�in�conjunction�with�the�fol-
lowing�optional�equipment�(option 3AG,�option 430�and�option 508).

The�Surround�View�optional�equipment�comprises�the�following�systems:

• Reversing�camera
• Side�View
• Top�View.

Top�View�and�Side�View�are�part�of�the�Surround�View�(option 5DL)�optional�equipment�and�are�not
available�individually.�The�reversing�camera�can�be�ordered�separately�as�optional�equipment�(option
3AG).

The�video�cameras�are�connected�to�the�TRSVC�control�unit�via�4-pole�low-voltage�differential�sig-
nalling�lines.�The�control�unit�is�connected�to�the�FEM�via�K-CAN.

The�TRSVC�control�unit�in�integrated�in�the�dashboard.

There�are�two�variants�of�the�TRSVC�control�unit:

• Control�unit�with�a�connection�for�reversing�camera
• Control�unit�with�five�connections.

The�Surround�View�(SA5DL)�optional�equipment�with�five�video�cameras�requires�the�control�unit�with
five�connections.�If�only�one�reversing�camera�(option�3AG)�without�Surround�View�(option�5DL)�is�in-
stalled,�a�control�unit�with�one�connection�is�used.

5.1.�Installation�locations

Installation�places�of�TRSVC�components

19
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
5.�TRSVC
Index Explanation
1 Bumper�camera
2 TRSVC�control�unit
3 Exterior�mirror�camera
4 Reversing�camera

20
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
5.�TRSVC
5.2.�System�wiring�diagram

System�wiring�diagram�for�Surround�View

21
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
5.�TRSVC
Index Explanation
1 Bumper�camera,�right
2 Bumper�camera,�left
3 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
4 Exterior�mirror�camera,�right
5 Rear�Electronic�Module�(REM)
6 Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant�(PMA)_�control�unit�(only�vehicles�with�option
5DP�Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant)
7 Power�distribution�box,�luggage�compartment
8 Reversing�camera
9 Parking�assistance�button�in�the�center�console
10 Integrated�Chassis�Management�(ICM)
11 Headunit
12 Central�Information�Display�(CID)
13 TRSVC�control�unit
14 Exterior�mirror�camera,�left
Kl.15N Ignition�(after-run)

5.3.�Reversing�camera
The�reversing�camera�(option�3AG)�supports�the�driver�in�parking�and�manoeuvring.�The�reversing
camera�is�only�available�in�connection�with�the�Park�Distance�Control�PDC�(option�508).

The�image�from�the�reversing�camera�is�displayed�with�additional�extension�lines�in�the�CID.

22
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
5.�TRSVC
5.3.1.�System�wiring�diagram

System�wiring�diagram,�reversing�camera

23
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
5.�TRSVC
Index Explanation
1 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
2 Rear�Electronic�Module�(REM)
3 Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant�(PMA)�control�unit�(only�vehicles�with�option
5DP�Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant)
4 Power�distribution�box,�luggage�compartment
5 Reversing�camera
5 Parking�assistance�button�in�the�center�console
7 Integrated�Chassis�Management�(ICM)
8 Headunit
9 Central�Information�Display�(CID)
10 TRSVC�control�unit
Kl.15N Ignition�(after-run)

5.3.2.�Camera�replacement
These�must�be�taught�in�after�the�reversing�camera�is�replaced.�The�reversing�camera�of�the�F30�does
not�need�to�be�calibrated�after�teaching-in,�as�it�is�self-calibrating.�The�calibration�is�effected�during�the
journey�by�the�TRSVC�control�unit�by�means�of�a�steering�angle�sensor�and�known�road�markings.�Cal-
ibration�compensates�for�installation�tolerances�by�shifting�and�rotating�the�image.

The�maximum�time�required�for�a�full�calibration�is�five�hours.�A�Check�Control�message�is�displayed�in
the�CID�if�the�reversing�camera�could�not�be�successfully�calibrated.�Reasons�for�failed�calibration�may
be�incorrect�installation,�dirt�contamination�or�a�defect�with�the�reversing�camera.�The�reversing�cam-
era�is�also�constantly�readjusted�after�a�full�calibration�in�order�to�ensure�an�optimum�image.

The�opening�angle�of�the�reversing�camera's�lens�is�130°.

24
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
5.�TRSVC
5.3.3.�Installation�location

Installation�location,�reversing�camera

Index Explanation
1 Reversing�camera

5.4.�Top�View
Top�View�provides�support�when�parking�and�manoeuvring.�For�this�the�door�and�road�area�of�the�vehi-
cle�is�shown�on�the�CID.

The�Top�View�function�is�realized�with�the�reversing�camera�and�the�two�exterior�mirror�cameras.

The�opening�angle�of�the�lens�of�the�exterior�mirror�camera,�which�is�installed�in�the�two�exterior�mir-
rors,�is�173°.

5.4.1.�Operation
The�operation�is�effected�similar�to�the�reversing�camera.�The�function�is�automatically�switched�on�if
the�reverse�gear�is�engaged�when�the�engine�is�running.�The�images�of�the�exterior�mirror�camera�and
PDC�are�shown�when�the�system�has�been�switched�on�via�iDrive.�The�system�automatically�switch-
es�off�after�20 m�travelled�or�a�speed�above�20�km/h�or�12�mph.�The�function�can�also�be�manually
switched�on�and�off�via�the�PDC�button.

5.4.2.�Display
The�images�of�the�reversing�camera�and�the�exterior�mirror�camera�are�shown�on�the�CID.�In�addition,
the�turning�circle�lines�and�driving�lane�lines�known�from�the�reversing�camera�view�are�also�shown.

25
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
5.�TRSVC

Also�check�the�traffic�situation�around�the�vehicle�by�looking�directly.�Otherwise�there�is�a�risk�of�acci-
dents�for�example�from�road�users�or�objects�that�lie�outside�the�image�range�of�the�camera.

5.4.3.�Camera�replacement
These�must�be�taught�in�after�the�exterior�mirror�camera�is�replaced.�The�exterior�mirror�camera�of�the
F30�does�not�need�to�be�calibrated�after�teaching-in,�as�it�is�self-calibrating.�The�calibration�is�effected
during�the�journey�by�the�TRSVC�control�unit.�Installation�tolerances�are�compensated�by�the�calibra-
tion.

5.5.�Side�View
Side�View�makes�possible�an�early�view�of�the�transverse�traffic�at�complex�exits�and�junctions.

Two�bumper�cameras,�which�are�installed�in�the�wheel�arches�of�the�front�bumper,�record�the�traffic
space�at�the�front�side.�The�two�video�images�of�these�bumper�cameras�are�shown�at�the�same�time
on�the�CID�(split�screen�display).�Extension�lines�on�the�lower�edge�of�the�image�show�the�position�of
the�front�of�the�vehicle.

The�bumper�camera�is�a�common�part�for�the�exterior�mirror�camera�with�another�lens.�The�opening
angle�of�the�lens�is�55°.

5.5.1.�Operation
To�activate�the�function�press�the�Side�View�button�of�the�controller.�To�deactivate�press�the�button
again.�At�speeds�above�20�km/h�or�12�mph�the�Side�View�function�is�automatically�deactivated.

Side�View�button

Index Explanation
1 Side�View�button

26
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
5.�TRSVC
5.5.2.�Display

F30�screen�Side�View�on�the�CID

Index Explanation
1 Split�Screen�display�of�the�bumper�cameras
2 Screen�display�of�the�bumper�camera,�left
3 Screen�display�of�the�bumper�camera,�right
4 Projected�front�of�vehicle�in�the�left�view
5 Projected�front�of�vehicle�in�the�right�view

Objects�may�be�outside�the�range�of�the�bumper�camera.

For�this�reason,�also�check�the�traffic�situation�at�exits�in�complex�locations�by�taking�a�direct�look.

5.5.3.�Camera�replacement
These�must�be�taught�in�after�the�bumper�camera�is�replaced.�The�bumper�camera�of�the�F30�does
not�need�to�be�calibrated�after�teaching-in,�as�it�is�self-calibrating.�The�calibration�is�effected�during�the
journey�by�the�TRSVC�control�unit.�Installation�tolerances�are�compensated�by�the�calibration.

27
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
6.�Park�Distance�Control
Park�Distance�Control�(PDC)�assists�the�driver�when�manoeuvring�in�and�out�of�a�parking�space.�The
current�distance�from�an�obstruction�is�indicated�by�acoustic�signals�and�on�a�visual�display.�PDC�is
available�in�the�F30�in�two�variants:

• The�PDC�front�and�rear�(option�508)�utilizes�the�measured�data�from�four�ultrasonic�sensors
on�both�the�front�and�rear�bumpers.

For�vehicles�with�Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant�(option�5DP)�the�PDC�sensors�are�evaluated�by�the
PMA�control�unit�and�not�the�REM.

The�PDC�is�activated�by�engaging�the�reverse�gear�or�by�operation�of�the�PDC�button�next�to�the�gear
selector�switch.

The�driver�obtains�the�results�of�the�distance�measurement�and�the�distance�warning�acoustically�via
the�speaker�system�and�optically�via�the�display�in�the�CID.

Further�information�on�the�PDC�can�be�found�in�the�training�information�titled�"PDC,�TRSVC�F01/F02".

The�PDC�cannot�replace�the�driver's�personal�judgement�of�the�traffic�situation.�Also�check�the�traffic
situation�by�taking�a�look�around�the�vehicle.�Otherwise�there�is�a�risk�of�accidents�occurring,�due�to
other�road�users�or�objects�that�are�outside�the�detection�range�of�the�PDC�for�example.�Loud�sound
sources�outside�and�inside�the�vehicle�could�drown�out�the�PDC�signal.

28
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
6.�Park�Distance�Control
6.1.�System�wiring�diagram

System�wiring�diagram,�PDC

29
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
6.�Park�Distance�Control
Index Explanation
1 Ultrasonic�sensors,�front
2 Electronic�transmission�control�(EGS)�(automatic�transmission)
3 Reversing�switch�(manual�gearbox)
4 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
5 Rear�Electronic�Module�(REM)
6 Ultrasonic�sensors,�rear
7 Parking�assistance�button�in�the�center�console
8 Integrated�Chassis�Management�(ICM)
9 Headunit
10 Central�information�display�(CID)
11 Instrument�cluster�(KOMBI)

30
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
7.�Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant
In�the�F30�the�Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant�(PMA)�is�available�as�optional�equipment�(option�5DP)�in
association�with�the�optional�equipment�Park�Distance�Control�front�and�rear�(option�508).

The�Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant�facilitates�parking�in�gaps�between�cars�parallel�to�the�roadway.�In
the�case�of�straight�forwards�travel�up�to�approx.�35�km/h�or�22�mph,�parking�spaces�are�measured�re-
gardless�if�the�PMA�is�activated�or�deactivated.�As�soon�as�a�parking�space�that�is�approx.�1.2�m�longer
than�the�vehicle�length�is�found and�the�system�is�already�activated,�this�space�is�shown�to�the�driver
on�CID.�Later�on�in�the�parking�process,�the�Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant�takes�over�the�steering,
with�the�driver�remaining�responsible�for�the�acceleration�and�braking�of�the�vehicle.�With�instructions
and�if�applicable�additional�acoustic�acknowledgements,�the�driver�is�guided�through�the�parking�pro-
cedure.

The�Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant�does�not�relieve�the�driver�of�personal�responsibility�during�park-
ing.

Directly�monitor�gaps�and�the�parking�procedure�and�intervene�if�necessary,�as�otherwise�there�is�a
risk�of�accidents.

7.1.�System�components

F30�System�components�of�the�Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant�(PMA)

31
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
7.�Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant
Index Explanation
1 Ultrasonic�sensors�of�Park�Distance�Control
2 Digital�Engine�Electronics�(DME)
3 Central�information�display�(CID)
4 Car�Information�Computer
5 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
6 Controller
7 Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant�(PMA)
8 Rear�Electronic�Module�(REM)
9 Integrated�Chassis�Management�(ICM)
10 Operating�facility,�center�console
11 Steering�column�switch�cluster
12 Instrument�cluster�(KOMBI)
13 Electromechanical�power�steering
14 Dynamic�Stability�Control�(DSC)
15 Ultrasonic�sensor�of�PMA�in�wheel�arch

32
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
7.�Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant
7.1.1.�System�wiring�diagram

F30�System�wiring�diagram�for�Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant

33
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
7.�Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant
Index Explanation
1 Dynamic�Stability�Control�(DSC)
2 Ultrasonic�sensor�of�Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant�in�wheel�arch
3 Ultrasonic�sensors,�Park�Distance�Control,�front
4 Electronic�Power�Steering�(electromechanical�power�steering)�EPS
5 Reversing�switch�(manual�gearbox)
6 Electronic�transmission�control�(EGS)�(automatic�transmission)
7 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
8 Power�distribution�box,�luggage�compartment
9 Rear�Electronic�Module�(REM)
10 Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant�(PMA)
11 Trailer�module�(AHM)
12 Ultrasonic�sensors,�Park�Distance�Control,�rear
13 Parking�assistance�button�in�the�center�console
14 Integrated�Chassis�Management�(ICM)
15 Headunit
16 Central�information�display�(CID)
17 Steering�column�switch�cluster�(SZL)
18 Instrument�cluster�(KOMBI)
Kl.15N Ignition�(after-run)

7.1.2.�Sensors
The�two�ultrasonic�sensors�for�the�PMA�are�integrated�in�the�front�wheel�arches.

The�function�of�the�two�ultrasonic�sensors�is�similar�to�that�of�the�PDC.�Ultrasonic�pulses�are�transmit-
ted�and�echo�signals�are�received.�The�signals�are�evaluated�by�the�PMA.�The�length�and�width�of�the
gap�is�calculated�from�the�distance�travelled�data�from�the�DSC.

In�the�F30�the�ultrasonic�sensors�for�the�Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant�are�connected�individually�to
the�PMA.

34
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
7.�Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant

F30�Installation�location�of�ultrasonic�sensor�for�Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant

Index Explanation
1 Ultrasonic�sensor�for�Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant

7.1.3.�Control�unit
The�control�unit�for�the�Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant�is�the�PMA.�The�PMA�is�located�in�the�luggage
compartment�behind�the�side�trim�panel.�It�evaluates�signals�from�the�sensor�and�thus�identifies�pos-
sible�parking�gaps.�It�also�calculates�the�optimum�path�into�a�gap�and�monitors�the�parking�process.�In
addition,�it�controls�the�electromechanical�steering�via�the�ICM.

35
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
7.�Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant

F30�Installation�location�of�PMA

7.2.�Notes�for�Service
After�the�PMA�or�an�ultrasonic�sensor�has�been�replaced�no�start-up�is�necessary.�However,�the�PMA
checks�with�every�start-up�procedure�whether�the�sensor�software�is�compatible�with�the�control�unit
software.�If�this�is�not�compatible,�a�corresponding�fault�code�is�set�in�the�PMA�control�unit.�In�this
case�the�service�function�"update�software�of�ultrasonic�sensors"�must�be�performed.

The�PMA�itself�monitors�faults�and�if�required�makes�the�corresponding�fault�code�entries.�In�excep-
tional�cases,�this�is�not�always�possible.�Thus�the�control�unit�cannot�determine�if�the�ultrasonic�sen-
sors�(including�of�the�sealing�ring)�are�incorrectly�installed�or�connected,�of�if�there�is�damage�in�the
vicinity�of�the�ultrasonic�sensors.�This�can�lead�to�customer�complaints�without�fault�entries:

• Small�gaps�are�rarely�identified
• During�parking,�the�vehicle�drives�too�close�or�far�away�from�the�vehicle�in�front
• The�vehicle�is�either�too�far�away,�too�close�or�against�the�kerb�after�the�parking�procedure
• The�vehicle�is�parked�in�the�gap�at�an�angle.

In�this�case�it�must�be�ensured�that�the�ultrasonic�sensors�are�correctly�installed�and�the�possibility�of
damage�of�the�bumper�panel�in�the�vicinity�of�the�ultrasonic�sensors�must�be�excluded.

36
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
7.�Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant
The�Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant�relieves�the�driver�in�two�ways.�On�the�one�hand,�from�the�task�of
having�to�estimate�the�size�of�the�gap�and�on�the�basis�of�this�estimate�of�deciding�whether�the�gap�is
large�enough.�On�the�other�hand,�from�the�task�of�having�to�steer�into�the�gap�itself.�The�vehicle�is�di-
rected�solely�by�the�driver.�When�looking�for�a�parking�space�and�during�the�actual�parking�process,�all
relevant�information�is�made�available�to�the�driver�via�the�PDC�picture�in�an�integrated�screen�mask.
This�includes:

• Results�of�the�parking�space�measurement
• Status�of�the�Parking�Manoeuvring�Assistant�and�corresponding�handling�information
• Distances�to�other�objects.

This�makes�it�especially�easy�to�monitor�the�parking�procedure�and�at�the�same�time�to�check�the�ac-
celeration.

37
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
8.�DCC
The�cruise�control�with�braking�function�has�been�used�in�many�BMW�models�since�the�BMW�3�Series
(E9x).�It�is�also�referred�to�as�"Dynamic�Cruise�Control"�(DCC).�It�relieves�the�burden�on�the�driver�on
quiet�roads�by�maintaining�a�constant�speed�regardless�of�the�resistance�to�vehicle�motion�(gradient,
payload).�The�driver�is�still�responsible�for�driving�the�vehicle�when�using�this�support.�The�driver�can
override�the�DCC�function�at�any�time�by�braking�or�accelerating.

The�operation�is�effected�via�a�keypad�in�the�left�steering�wheel�spoke.�The�current�speed�is�saved
by�pressing�the�SET�button.�The�speed�is�increased�or�reduced�by�1�km/h�or�.6�mph�by�touching�the
rocker�switch.�Each�time�the�rocker�switch�is�pressed�above�the�pressure�point�the�speed�is�increased
or�reduced�by�10�km/h�or�6�mph

DCC�constantly�maintains�a�selected�speed�from�approx.�30�km/h�or�18�mph

The�brakes�are�activated�during�steep�downhill�driving�if�sufficient�deceleration�is�not�achieved�by�en-
gine�drag�torque�alone.

In�the�F30�the�cruise�control�with�braking�function�is�implemented�in�the�ICM�control�unit.

38
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
9.�Head-Up�Display
The�name�"Head-Up"�describes�the�principle�benefit�of�this�system.�The�Head-Up�Display�(HUD)
projects�a�virtual�image�into�the�driver's�field�of�view.

The�Head-Up�Display�(option�610)�offers�the�driver�the�option�of�viewing�all�information�relevant�for
driving�directly�in�the�field�of�view�freely�floating�over�the�roadway.

the�Head-Up�Display�used�in�the�F30�can�project�the�colors�red,�green�and�blue�and�by�mixing�these
colors�enables�the�projection�of�image�content�in�all�colors�of�the�red/green/blue�spectrum.�The�HUD
is�not�a�slave�in�the�K-CAN�in�the�F30,�but�has�no�data�bus�systems.�The�HUD�receives�the�control�sig-
nals�and�the�image�content�from�the�instrument�cluster�via�an�APIX�interface.�The�power�supply�of�the
HUD�is�also�effected�in�the�F30�by�the�instrument�cluster.

9.1.�Operating�principle
The�HUD�is�similar�to�a�projector.�A�light�source�is�required�to�project�the�HUD�information.�Using�15
white�LEDs�the�information�is�shown�on�a�one�color,�transparent�red/green/blue�1.8"�display.�The�reso-
lution�is�480x240�pixels.�The�image�obtained�is�projected�into�the�area�of�vision�of�the�driver�using�sev-
eral�deflection�mirrors�and�the�windshield.

HUD�operating�principle

39
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
9.�Head-Up�Display
Index Explanation
1 Light�source
2 Lens
3 TFT�projection�display
4 Plane�mirror
5 Curved�mirror
6 Windshield
7 Observer's�point�of�vision
8 Projected�image

The�screen�mask�appears�freely�floating�over�the�roadway.

F30�HUD�screen�mask

A�special�windshield�is�required�for�the�system,�whose�form�enables�precise�representation.�A�wedge-
shaped�windshield�prevents�the�illustration�of�double�images.�If�the�standard�windshield�was�used,
double�images�would�be�displayed.

9.2.�Installation�location
The�head-up�display�is�fitted�above�the�steering�column,�immediately�behind�the�instrument�cluster.�It
is�secured�to�the�bulkhead�supporting�structure�using�three�screws.

40
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
9.�Head-Up�Display

F30�Installation�location�of�HUD

Index Explanation
1 Screw
2 Head-Up�Display�(HUD)
3 Carrier�bracket

41
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
9.�Head-Up�Display
9.3.�System�wiring�diagram

System�wiring�diagram�of�Head-Up�Display

42
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
9.�Head-Up�Display
Index Explanation
1 Head-Up�Display�(HUD)
2 Power�distribution�box,�front
3 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
4 Controller�(CON)
5 Headunit
6 Central�Information�Display�(CID)
7 Instrument�cluster�(KOMBI)
Kl.30B Terminal�30�basic�operation

9.4.�Operation

9.4.1.�Switching�on/off
The�system�is�activated�or�deactivated�by�accessing�Settings�then�"Head-Up�Display"�in�the�CIC�:

• Activate:�with�tick�mark
• Deactivate:�tick�mark�removed.

9.4.2.�Settings
The�following�settings�can�be�changed�using�the�controller:

• Head-Up�Display�ON/OFF
• Brightness�of�display
• Rotation�of�display
• Height�of�display
• Displayed�information.

9.5.�Display
The�changeover�of�day�design�to�night�design�is�the�same�for�the�display�in�the�instrument�cluster.

The�following�content�can�be�displayed:

• Speed
• Speed�setting�control�of�DCC
• Collision�warning
• Navigation�system
• Check�Control�messages

43
F30�Driver�Assistance�Systems
9.�Head-Up�Display
• Speed�limit�information
• Lane�departure�warning.
• Entertainment�lists.

With�the�exception�of�the�current�vehicle�speed�and�the�driver�assist�warning�messages,�the�informa-
tion�displayed�can�be�deselected�by�the�controller.

9.5.1.�Recognizability�of�the�display
The�recognizability�of�the�displays�in�the�Head-Up�Display�is�influenced�by:

• The�seat�position
• Objects�on�the�cover�of�the�Head-Up�Display
• Sunglasses�with�certain�polarizing�filters
• Wet�roadway
• Inadequate�lighting�conditions.

If�the�image�is�displayed�blurred,�the�basic�setting�should�be�checked.

44
Bayerische�Motorenwerke�Aktiengesellschaft
Händlerqualifizierung�und�Training
Röntgenstraße�7
85716�Unterschleißheim,�Germany
Technical�training.
Product�information.
F30�Displays,�Indicators�and�Controls

BMW�Service
General�information

Symbols�used

The�following�symbol�is�used�in�this�document�to�facilitate�better�comprehension�or�to�draw�attention
to�very�important�information:

Contains�important�safety�information�and�information�that�needs�to�be�observed�strictly�in�order�to
guarantee�the�smooth�operation�of�the�system.

Information�status�and�national-market�versions

BMW�Group�vehicles�meet�the�requirements�of�the�highest�safety�and�quality�standards.�Changes�in
requirements�for�environmental�protection,�customer�benefits�and�design�render�necessary�continu-
ous�development�of�systems�and�components.�Consequently,�there�may�be�discrepancies�between
the�contents�of�this�document�and�the�vehicles�available�in�the�training�course.

This�document�basically�relates�to�the�European�version�of�left-hand�drive�vehicles.�Some�operating
elements�or�components�are�arranged�differently�in�right-hand�drive�vehicles�than�shown�in�the�graph-
ics�in�this�document.�Further�differences�may�arise�as�a�result�of�the�equipment�specification�in�specif-
ic�markets�or�countries.

Additional�sources�of�information

Further�information�on�the�individual�topics�can�be�found�in�the�following:

• Owner's�Handbook
• Integrated�Service�Technical�Application.

Contact:�[email protected]

©2011�BMW�AG,�Munich,�Germany

Reprints�of�this�publication�or�its�parts�require�the�written�approval�of�BMW�AG,�Munich

The�information�contained�in�this�document�forms�an�integral�part�of�the�technical�training�of�the�BMW
Group�and�is�intended�for�the�trainer�and�participants�in�the�seminar.�Refer�to�the�latest�relevant�infor-
mation�systems�of�the�BMW�Group�for�any�changes/additions�to�the�technical�data.

Information�status:�September�2011
VH-23/International�Technical�Training
F30�Displays,�Indicators�and�Controls
Contents
1. System�Overview.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1
1.1. Introduction..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1

2. System�Components............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 2
2.1. Instrument�cluster................................................................................................................................................................................................. 2
2.1.1. Basic�version�of�instrument�cluster......................................................................................................... 3
2.1.2. Instrument�cluster,�high�version.................................................................................................................... 4
2.1.3. On-board�computer..........................................................................................................................................................5
2.2. Central�Information�Display................................................................................................................................................................... 6
2.2.1. CID�with�6.5“�screen�diagonal......................................................................................................................... 6
2.2.2. CID�with�8.8“�screen�diagonal......................................................................................................................... 6
2.3. Head‐Up�Display� ...................................................................................................................................................................................................7
2.4. Operating�elements�on�the�steering�wheel.................................................................................................................. 8
2.5. Operating�elements�in�the�center�console.................................................................................................................... 9
2.5.1. Driving�experience�switch.................................................................................................................................. 10
2.6. Operating�facility�for�driver�assistance�systems............................................................................................... 13
2.7. Service�functions............................................................................................................................................................................................... 14
2.7.1. Resetting�the�scope�of�maintenance�work.............................................................................. 14
2.7.2. Test�functions........................................................................................................................................................................ 14
F30�Displays,�Indicators�and�Controls
1.�System�Overview
1.1.�Introduction
As�with�all�other�BMW�models,�the�operating�concept�of�the�new�BMW�3-Series�center�is�based�on�a
clear�and�optimized�layout�of�the�driving�area.�The�number�of�switches�has�been�reduced�in�order�to
simplify�logical�operation.�The�display�and�operating�elements�are�organized�corresponding�to�their
function.

F30�overview�of�displays�and�operating�elements

Index Explanation
1 Instrument�cluster�(KOMBI)
2 Head‐Up�Display
3 Central�Information�Display�(CID)
4 Favorite�buttons�for�individual�assignment
5 Gear�selector�lever�(GWS)
6 Controller�(CON)
7 Driving�experience�switch
8 Control�buttons,�steering�wheel
9 Operating�facility�for�driver�assistance�systems

1
F30�Displays,�Indicators�and�Controls
2.�System�Components
2.1.�Instrument�cluster
The�central�display�unit�with�speedometer,�rev�counter,�fuel�gauge,�engine�oil�temperature,�and�indica-
tor�and�warning�lights�is�referred�to�as�the�instrument�cluster.

The�instrument�cluster�receives�information�on�the�wiring�harness�in�the�form�of�analogue�and�digital
electrical�signals.�These�signals�are�processed�and�then�displayed�in�the�instrument�cluster,�or�passed
on�as�information�to�other�control�units.

Depending�on�the�equipment,�two�different�instrument�cluster�versions�are�used�in�the�F30.

As�a�control�unit,�the�basic�version�of�the�instrument�cluster�is�a�bus�user�on�the�PT-CAN.

As�a�control�unit,�the�high�version�of�the�instrument�cluster�is�a�bus�user�on�the�MOST�bus�and�on�the
PT-CAN.

F30�versions�of�instrument�clusters

Index Explanation
A Basic�version�of�instrument�cluster
B High�version�of�instrument�cluster

In�addition,�there�are�different�versions�of�the�two�variants�of�the�instrument�cluster�depending�on�the
vehicle�line.�In�the�following�image�you�see�the�instrument�cluster�of�the�different�lines�using�the�exam-
ple�of�the�high-version�instrument�cluster.

F30�line�versions,�instrument�cluster,�high-version

2
F30�Displays,�Indicators�and�Controls
2.�System�Components
Index Explanation
A Instrument�cluster�without�line�package�or�with�BMW�Luxury�Line�package�PA
7S2
B Instrument�cluster�with�BMW�Modern�Line�package�PA�7S1
C Instrument�cluster�with�BMW�Sport�Line�package�PA�7AC

2.1.1.�Basic�version�of�instrument�cluster

F30�basic�instrument�cluster

Index Explanation
1 TFT�display

The�basic�instrument�cluster�in�the�F30�has�five�analogue�instrument�dials�in�four�tubes.�The�basic�ver-
sion�of�the�instrument�cluster�incorporates�a�TFT�display�with�a�resolution�of�320�x�120�pixels�at�the
bottom�between�the�round�instruments.�It�has�a�screen�diagonal�of�2.7“.

The�basic�instrument�cluster�is�installed�in�the�F30�for�vehicles�without�Professional�navigation�system
(optional�equipment�609),�without�Lane�departure�warning�(optional�equipment�5AD),�without�Head‐
Up�Display�(optional�equipment�610),�and�without�speed�limit�information�(optional�equipment�8TH).

The�two�large�round�instruments�show�the�road�speed�and�engine�speed.�The�indication�of�the�status
of�the�automatic�engine�start-stop�function�(MSA)�(READY/OFF)�is�integrated�in�the�rev�counter.�The
current�fuel�consumption�is�displayed�at�the�bottom�of�the�rev�counter.

The�two�small�round�instruments�on�the�left-�and�right-hand�side�show�the�fuel�tank�capacity�and�en-
gine�oil�temperature�respectively.

The�indicator�lights�are�located�centrally�at�the�top�between�the�two�large�round�instruments�and�be-
low�the�speedometer.

3
F30�Displays,�Indicators�and�Controls
2.�System�Components
2.1.2.�Instrument�cluster,�high�version

F30�instrument�cluster,�high�version�option�6WA

Index Explanation
1 TFT�display

The�instrument�cluster�high-version�has�been�designed�for�the�F30�and�has�four�analogue�instrument
dials�in�four�tubes.�Each�of�the�scales�in�the�instrument�cluster�is�specific�to�the�country,�vehicle�and
engine.

The�two�large�round�instruments�show�the�road�speed�and�engine�speed.�The�indication�of�the�status
of�the�automatic�engine�start-stop�function�(MSA)�(READY/OFF)�is�integrated�in�the�rev�counter.�The
current�consumption�is�shown�on�the�display�under�the�rev�counter�and�the�energy�recovery�is�shown
in�the�coasting�(overrun)�mode.

The�two�small�round�instruments�on�the�left-�and�right-hand�side�show�the�fuel�tank�capacity�and�en-
gine�oil�temperature�respectively.

The�high�version�of�the�instrument�cluster�is�available�as�the�optional�equipment�instrument�cluster
with�extended�functional�scope�(optional�equipment�6WA).�The�high�version�of�the�instrument�cluster
incorporates�a�TFT�display�with�a�resolution�of�640�x�160�pixels�below�the�round�instruments.�Its�diag-
onal�screen�size�is�5.7“.

The�high�version�of�the�instrument�cluster�is�required�for�some�items�of�optional�equipment.�This�in-
cludes�the�Professional�navigation�system�(optional�equipment�609),�the�Lane�departure�warning�(op-
tional�equipment�5AD),�the�Head‐Up�Display�(optional�equipment�610)�and�the�speed�limit�information
(optional�equipment�8TH).�A�variant�of�the�instrument�cluster�is�used�in�connection�with�the�Head‐Up
Display�and�has�an�APIX�interface.

4
F30�Displays,�Indicators�and�Controls
2.�System�Components
2.1.3.�On-board�computer
The�F30�is�equipped�as�standard�with�an�on-board�computer.

The�on-board�computer�functions�can�be�called�up�by�briefly�pressing�the�on-board�computer�button
on�the�steering�column�switch.

Pressing�the�on-board�computer�button�again�displays�information�in�the�following�order:

• Range
• Average�consumption
• Average�speed
• Distance�(with�activated�route�guidance)
• Arrival�time�(with�activated�route�guidance)
• Arrow�display�of�the�navigation�system�(for�activated�route�guidance�and�deactivated�display�in
the�Head‐Up�Display)
• Date
• Speed�limit�information.
• ECO�PRO�bonus�range.

The�functions�to�be�displayed�in�the�CID�can�be�selected�via�"Settings"�->�"Information�Display".

F30�buttons�on�steering�column�switch

Index Explanation
1 On-board�computer�button
2 High-beam�assistant�button
3 Steering�column�switches

More�detailed�information�can�be�obtained�from�the�current�Owner's�Handbook�for�the�BMW�3-Series
sedan.

5
F30�Displays,�Indicators�and�Controls
2.�System�Components
2.2.�Central�Information�Display
Depending�on�the�equipment�installed,�two�different�versions�of�a�freestanding�Central�Information
Display�(CID)�are�installed�in�the�F30.�.

The�Central�Information�Display�(CID)�in�the�F30�no�longer�has�a�bus�connection.�The�CID�is�direct-
ly�connected�to�the�headunit�via�an�APIX�interface.�APIX�(Automotive�Pixel�Link)�is�a�bit-serial�1�Gbit/s
video�link�with�just�one�copper�core�pair.�The�CID�is�connected�by�2�APIX�video�links�to�the�headunit.
The�APIX�link�is�an�EMC-optimized�physical�layer�for�real�time�video�transfer�via�copper�cables.�The
CID�can�be�supplied�with�power�via�two�leads�directly�by�the�headunit.

As�with�all�new�BMW�models,�the�system�is�operated�by�means�of�the�central�operating�element,�the
controller.

The�Central�Information�Display�is�an�integrated�display�and�operating�facility�for�the�following�func-
tions:

• Audio�functions,�such�as�radio,�CD,�MP3
• Telephone
• Navigation
• On-board�computer,�journey�computer
• Vehicle�information,�Interactive�Owner's�Handbook�IBA
• Vehicle�settings
• Vehicle�functions,�such�as�PDC�for�example
• BMW�Services.

2.2.1.�CID�with�6.5“�screen�diagonal
A�CID�with�6.5"�screen�diagonal�is�installed�in�conjunction�with�out�navigation.�The�display�resolution�is
800�x�480�pixels.

A�CID�with�a�black�high-gloss�clasp�is�used�in�vehicles�with�BMW�Professional�radio�(standard�equip-
ment).

F30�CID�with�6.5“�screen�diagonal

2.2.2.�CID�with�8.8“�screen�diagonal
A�CID�with�8.8“�screen�diagonal�is�installed�in�conjunction�with�the�Professional�navigation�system�(op-
tion�609).�The�display�resolution�is�1280�x�480�pixels.�The�CID�with�8.8“�screen�diagonal�also�has�a
cover�made�from�anti-reflecting�laminated�safety�glass�which�stretches�to�the�edge�of�the�CID.

6
F30�Displays,�Indicators�and�Controls
2.�System�Components

F30�CID�with�8.8“�screen�diagonal

2.3.�Head‐Up�Display
The�name�"Head-Up"�describes�the�principle�benefit�of�this�system.�The�Head‐Up�Display�(HUD)
projects�a�virtual�image�into�the�driver's�field�of�view.�Important�information,�e.g.�from�the�cruise�control
or�navigation�system�with�activated�arrow�display,�is�reflected�on�the�windscreen�and�is�therefore�per-
manently�available�in�the�driver's�field�of�view.

The�Head‐Up�Display�(optional�equipment�610)�in�the�F30�contains�various�functions�aimed�at�en-
hancing�road�safety�and�ride�comfort.�This�includes�display�of:

• Speed
• Speed�setting�control�of�DCC
• Collision�warning
• Navigation�system
• Check�Control�messages
• Speed�limit�information
• Lane�departure�warning.
• Entertainment�lists.

The�HUD�used�in�the�F30�has�been�developed�further�to�include�the�following�functions:

• Intersection�view
• Road�symbol�in�the�junction�view.

The�HUD�in�the�F30�can�now�also�project�the�color�blue,�in�addition�to�red�and�green.�Contents�can�be
displayed�in�all�colors�of�the�RGB�color�spectrum,�as�is�the�case�with�an�LCD�monitor,�by�mixing�the
three�colors.

Having�the�displays�in�the�driver's�direct�field�of�view�increases�safety,�as�this�allows�the�driver�to�keep
his�eyes�on�the�road�at�all�times.

7
F30�Displays,�Indicators�and�Controls
2.�System�Components

F30�Head‐Up�Display

Further�information�on�the�Head‐Up�Display�can�be�taken�from�the�training�information�F30�Assist
Systems.

2.4.�Operating�elements�on�the�steering�wheel
A�switch�block�is�integrated�into�the�steering�wheel�on�the�left-�and�right-hand�side�respectively.

The�operating�elements�for�the�cruise�control�with�braking�function�(Dynamic�Cruise�Control�-�DCC)
are�on�the�left-hand�side�of�the�steering�wheel.

The�operating�elements�for�operation�of�the�radio�and�telephone�functions�are�on�the�right.

F30�operating�elements�on�the�steering�wheel

8
F30�Displays,�Indicators�and�Controls
2.�System�Components
Index Explanation
1 Increase�distance�button�(only�with�optional�equipment�5DF�ACC)�not�US
2 Rocker�switch�±,�change�speed,�set�speed
3 Knurled�wheel,�select/set�radio�station�or�track
4 MODE�button,�change�between�audio�sources
5 Shift�paddle�for�upshifting�(only�with�SA�2TB)
6 Rocker�switch�+,�increase�volume
7 Rocker�switch�-,�reduce�volume
8 Voice�recognition�system�button
9 Telephone�button
10 Reduce�distance�button�(only�with�optional�equipment�5DF�ACC)�not�US
11 Switch�DCC�on/off,�interrupt
12 Resume�button,�call-up�stored�speed
13 Set�speed�button
14 Shift�paddle�for�downshifting�(only�with�SA�2TB)

2.5.�Operating�elements�in�the�center�console
The�center�console�of�the�F30�features�the�following�operating�elements:

F30�operating�elements�in�the�center�console

9
F30�Displays,�Indicators�and�Controls
2.�System�Components
Index Explanation
1 Gear�selector�switch
2 Controller
3 Park�Distance�Control�/�Reversing�camera�/�Top�view
4 Side�View
5 Driving�experience�switch
6 Dynamic�Stability�Control

2.5.1.�Driving�experience�switch
The�F30�is�equipped�as�standard�with�the�driving�experience�switch.

F30�driving�experience�switch

Index Explanation
1 Driving�experience�switch

10
F30�Displays,�Indicators�and�Controls
2.�System�Components
The�driver�can�use�the�driving�experience�switch�to�select�different�programs�which�alter�various�prop-
erties�of�the�vehicle�depending�on�the�vehicle's�equipment�specification.�The�following�programs�are
available:

• SPORT+�(only�in�vehicles�with�sport�automatic�transmission�option�2TB,�variable�sport�steer-
ing�option�2VL�or�Sport�Line�PA�7AC)
• SPORT
• COMFORT
• ECO�PRO.

When�the�driver�switches�to�a�different�program,�the�selected�program�is�displayed�in�the�instrument
cluster.�In�vehicles�with�CID�a�pop-up�also�appears�for�the�selected�program.

SPORT�mode

In�conjunction�with�the�optional�equipment�Professional�navigation�(option�609)�additional�SPORT
mode�displays�can�be�called�up�in�the�CID.

SPORT�mode�displays�in�the�CID

Index Explanation
1 Power�output
2 Torque

ECO�PRO�mode

The�ECO�PRO�mode�supports�the�driver�in�adopting�an�optimized-consumption�driving�style�and�re-
duces�fuel�consumption�through�intelligent�control�of�energy�and�A/C�management.�Essentially�the
following�measures�help�to�reduce�fuel�consumption:

• The�driver�is�supported�in�adopting�an�optimized-consumption�driving�style�by�means�of�an
alteration�of�the�accelerator�pedal�characteristic�and�the�shift�program�in�automatic�transmis-
sions�or�the�shift�point�indicator�in�manual�gearboxes.
• The�A/C�system�is�placed�in�the�ECO�PRO�operating�state.�Here�the�A/C�system�operates�at
reduced�air�drying�and�cooling.�If�the�required�temperature�can�be�achieved�without�cold�pro-
duction,�the�A/C�compressor�is�switched�off.�During�heating�mode�the�engine�operating�mode
with�increased�heat�dissipation�is�to�the�greatest�possible�extent�dispensed.

11
F30�Displays,�Indicators�and�Controls
2.�System�Components
The�ECO�PRO�operating�condition�of�the�heating/air-conditioning�unit�can�be�reset�by�the�driv-
er�in�the�COMFORT�operating�condition.�The�setting�of�the�operating�state�of�the�heating�and
A/C�system�is�stored�and�re-established�when�the�ECO�PRO�mode�is�called�up�again.
• The�exterior�mirror�heating�is�switched�off�and�the�seat�heating�temperature�is�limited�to�37.5
°C�instead�of�42�°C.�These�measures�are�allied�to�the�ECO�PRO�operating�state�of�the�heating
and�A/C�program.
• The�driver�is�prompted�by�various�displays�to�adopt�an�optimized-consumption�driving�style
and�is�supported�in�optimizing�their�driving�style.

Displays�of�the�ECO�PRO�mode�in�the�instrument�cluster�with�extended�functional�scope�(extended�cluster�function�optional�equipment�6WA)

Index Explanation
1 ECO�PRO�display
2 ECO�PRO�driving�instructions
3 Display�of�the�bonus�range

The�bonus�range�is�the�actual�additional�range�which�was�achieved�through�your�ECO�PRO�driving
style.�The�bonus�range�is�calculated�in�the�BC�according�to�the�personal�driving�style�and�the�resulting
consumption.�The�BC�gets�to�know�the�personal�long-term�consumption�of�the�driver.�To�determine
the�range�the�current�consumption�in�ECO�PRO�mode�is�compared�to�your�'learnt'�consumption�in�the
instrument�cluster�outside�of�the�ECO�PRO�mode.�This�creates�a�difference�in�liters�which�is�recalcu-
lated�into�the�bonus�range.

12
F30�Displays,�Indicators�and�Controls
2.�System�Components

ECO�PRO�mode�displays�in�the�CID

Index Explanation
1 ECO�PRO�information�in�the�EfficientDynamics�menu
2 Configure�ECO�PRO�mode
3 Consumption�history�in�the�EfficientDynamics�menu�(only�with�optional
equipment�6WA)
4 Technology�experience�monitor�in�the�EfficientDynamics�menu

Through�these�measures�a�reduction�of�the�practical�consumption�of�up�to�20%�can�be�reached�de-
pending�on�the�driving�style

Upon�activation�of�the�ECO�PRO�mode�the�automatic�engine�start-stop�function�is�automatically
switched�on.

2.6.�Operating�facility�for�driver�assistance�systems
The�individual�driver�assistance�systems�can�be�activated�or�deactivated�via�the�driver�assistance�sys-
tems�operating�facility,�which�is�located�next�to�the�steering�wheel�in�the�dashboard.

F30�operating�facility�for�driver�assistance�systems

Index Explanation
1 Lane�change�warning
2 Collision�warning
3 Lane�departure�warning
4 Head‐Up�Display�(HUD)�button�not�installed,�now�in�the�CIC�under
“Settings”�“Head-Up�Display”

13
F30�Displays,�Indicators�and�Controls
2.�System�Components
2.7.�Service�functions

2.7.1.�Resetting�the�scope�of�maintenance�work
If�the�service�has�been�carried�out�for�one�or�more�scopes�of�maintenance�work,�replacement�of�front
brake�pads�for�example,�the�full�service�interval�must�be�reset�for�these�scopes.

When�resetting�the�scopes�of�maintenance�work,�a�differentiation�is�made�between�two�types:

• Statutory�scopes�of�maintenance�work,�such�as�the�vehicle�inspection,�area�specific,�which
can�only�be�reset�in�the�"Service"�menu.
• All�service-related�scopes�of�maintenance�work,�such�as�changing�the�spark�plugs�for�exam-
ple,�are�reset�via�the�reset�mode�in�the�instrument�cluster�or�via�the�BMW�workshop�system.

Activating�reset�mode

• Terminal�15�ON
• Press�and�hold�down�the�reset�button�in�the�instrument�cluster�for�between�five�and�ten�sec-
onds.

Keep�the�reset�button�pressed�for�longer�than�ten�seconds�to�call�up�the�test�functions.

Press�the�reset�button�briefly�once�to�scroll�through�the�scopes�of�maintenance�work.�Keep�the�re-
set�button�pressed�for�longer�to�access�the�reset�menu�for�the�selected�scope�of�maintenance�work.
Press�and�hold�the�button�again�to�reset�the�scope�of�maintenance�work.�It�is�only�possible�to�reset�the
scopes�of�maintenance�work�once�thresholds�for�specific�scopes�of�maintenance�work�have�been�un-
dercut.

Exiting�reset�mode

• Terminal�15�OFF
• Start�engine
• Do�not�press�button�for�15�seconds.

2.7.2.�Test�functions
The�test�functions�are�shown�in�the�TFT�display�of�the�instrument�cluster.�The�test�functions�also�pro-
vide�BMW�Service�with�help�in�troubleshooting�without�a�BMW�diagnosis�system.

To�start�functional�check

• Terminal�15�ON
• Press�and�hold�down�the�reset�button�in�the�instrument�cluster�for�ten�seconds.

14
F30�Displays,�Indicators�and�Controls
2.�System�Components
Locking�and�unlocking�the�test�functions�(test�function�04)

Only�the�first�four�test�functions�are�freely�accessible.�All�test�functions�are�locked�from�the�fifth�test
function�onwards.�The�test�functions�can�be�unlocked�via�test�function�04.

The�test�functions�are�unlocked�by�entering�the�cross�total�of�the�last�five�digits�of�the�vehicle�identifi-
cation�number.

Display�of�test�functions

The�test�functions�are�faded�into�the�center�of�the�TFT�display,�between�the�two�round�instruments.

The�main�test�functions�are�listed�below.�In�addition�to�the�majority�of�test�functions,�there�are�further
equivalent�functions�for�which�a�similar�display�appears�in�the�instrument�cluster.

Test�function Description
01 Identification
02 System�test
03 Test�end
04 Unlock�test�functions
05 Current�consumption
06 Range�/�Consumption
07 Fuel�gauge�values
08 Coolant�temperature,�ambient�temperature,�engine�oil�temperature
09 On-board�computer�average�values
10 Speedometer�/�Rev�counter
11 Display�of�vehicle�voltage
12 Acoustics,�triggering�of�audio�signals
13 Read�fault�codes�(“DTC”)
14 Dim�LCD
15 Dim�PWM�signal
16 Condition�Based�Service
17 Check�Control
18 Correction�factor,�consumption�figures
19 Software�reset�/�RAM�reload

Operation�of�test�functions

The�test�functions�are�operated�with�the�assistance�of�the�reset�button�in�the�instrument�cluster.

Press�the�reset�button�briefly�once�to�scroll�through�the�test�functions.�Keep�the�reset�button�pressed
down�for�longer�to�access�the�selected�test�function.

15
F30�Displays,�Indicators�and�Controls
2.�System�Components
Exit�test�functions

• Terminal�15�OFF
• Keep�reset�button�pressed�for�longer�than�ten�seconds.
The�main�menu�fades�into�the�instrument�cluster
• Call�up�test�function�03�(end�test)
• Call�up�test�function�19�(RESET).

To�protect�against�unauthorized�access,�all�but�the�first�four�test�functions�are�locked�again�when�the
test�functions�are�exited.

16
Bayerische�Motorenwerke�Aktiengesellschaft
Händlerqualifizierung�und�Training
Röntgenstraße�7
85716�Unterschleißheim,�Germany
Technical�training.
Product�information.
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication

BMW�Service
General�information

Symbols�used

The�following�symbol�is�used�in�this�document�to�facilitate�better�comprehension�or�to�draw�attention
to�very�important�information:

Contains�important�safety�information�and�information�that�needs�to�be�observed�strictly�in�order�to
guarantee�the�smooth�operation�of�the�system.

Information�status�and�national-market�versions

BMW�Group�vehicles�meet�the�requirements�of�the�highest�safety�and�quality�standards.�Changes�in
requirements�for�environmental�protection,�customer�benefits�and�design�render�necessary�continu-
ous�development�of�systems�and�components.�Consequently,�there�may�be�discrepancies�between
the�contents�of�this�document�and�the�vehicles�available�in�the�training�course.

This�document�basically�relates�to�the�European�version�of�left-hand�drive�vehicles.�Some�operating
elements�or�components�are�arranged�differently�in�right-hand�drive�vehicles�than�shown�in�the�graph-
ics�in�this�document.�Further�differences�may�arise�as�a�result�of�the�equipment�specification�in�specif-
ic�markets�or�countries.

Additional�sources�of�information

Further�information�on�the�individual�topics�can�be�found�in�the�following:

• Owner's�Handbook
• Integrated�Service�Technical�Application.

Contact:�[email protected]

©2011�BMW�AG,�Munich,�Germany

Reprints�of�this�publication�or�its�parts�require�the�written�approval�of�BMW�AG,�Munich

The�information�contained�in�this�document�forms�an�integral�part�of�the�technical�training�of�the�BMW
Group�and�is�intended�for�the�trainer�and�participants�in�the�seminar.�Refer�to�the�latest�relevant�infor-
mation�systems�of�the�BMW�Group�for�any�changes/additions�to�the�technical�data.

Information�status:�September�2011
VH-23/International�Technical�Training
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
Contents
1. Introduction............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 1
1.1. F30�bus�overview.................................................................................................................................................................................................. 2

2. Radio�and�Headunits............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 5
2.1. Overview�of�headunits�F30.................................................................................................................................................................... 5
2.2. Basic�headunit............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 5
2.2.1. Block�diagram............................................................................................................................................................................ 8
2.2.2. System�wiring�diagram................................................................................................................................................ 9
2.3. Car�Information�Computer�(CIC)............................................................................................................................................... 11
2.3.1. System�wiring�diagram............................................................................................................................................13

3. Speaker�Systems..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 15
3.1. Overview.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 15
3.2. Components.............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 15
3.2.1. HiFi�system................................................................................................................................................................................ 15
3.2.2. Top�HiFi�system................................................................................................................................................................. 17

4. Telephone�Systems..............................................................................................................................................................................................................21
4.1. Overview.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 21
4.2. System�components.................................................................................................................................................................................... 21
4.3. General�information........................................................................................................................................................................................ 22
4.3.1. Compatibility............................................................................................................................................................................ 23
4.4. Hands-free�system�with�USB�interface.......................................................................................................................... 23
4.4.1. System�wiring�diagram............................................................................................................................................23
4.5. Mobile�phone�preparation�with�connection�for�Bluetooth�and�USB
devices................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 25
4.5.1. System�wiring�diagram............................................................................................................................................27
4.5.2. Office................................................................................................................................................................................................... 28

5. Video�System.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 32
5.1. Functional�diagram..........................................................................................................................................................................................32

6. BMW�ConnectedDrive..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 34
6.1. BMW�Online�formally�BMW�Search.................................................................................................................................... 34
6.2. HOW�TO�ACCESS�THE�SERVICES................................................................................................................................... 37

7. Personal�Profile........................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 39

8. Navigation.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 41

9. Antenna�Systems..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 42
9.1. Antenna�and�phase�diversity...........................................................................................................................................................44
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
Contents
9.2. Bluetooth�Antenna.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 45
9.3. System�wiring�diagram............................................................................................................................................................................. 46
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
1.�Introduction
The�information�and�communication�system�plays�a�significant�role�in�the�F30.�It�can�access�the�highly
advanced�technology�available�in�the�BMW�module.�which�provides�the�driver�with�a�wide�selection�of
Infotainment�systems.

The�purpose�of�this�information�bulletin�is�to�provide�an�overview�of�the�following�systems:

• Radio�and�headunits
• Speaker�systems
• Telephone�systems
• BMW�ConnectedDrive
• Antenna�Systems.

1
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
1.�Introduction
1.1.�F30�bus�overview

F30�bus�overview

2
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
1.�Introduction
Index Explanation
1 Control�units�with�wake-up�authorization
2 Start-up�node�control�units�for�starting�and�synchronizing�the�FlexRay�bus
system
ACSM Advanced�Crash�Safety�Module
AMPT Top�HiFi�amplifier
COMBOX Combox�(Combox�emergency�call,�Multimedia�Combox)
CON Controller
D-CAN Diagnosis-on-Controller�Area�Network
DME Digital�Engine�Electronics�(DME)
DSC Dynamic�Stability�Control
DVDC DVD�changer
EGS Electronic�transmission�control
EKPS Electronic�fuel�pump�control
EPS Electromechanical�Power�Steering
Ethernet Cable-based�data�network�technology�for�local�data�networks
FEM Front�Electronic�Module
FLA High-beam�assistant
FlexRay Fast,�preset�and�fault-tolerant�bus�system�for�use�in�automotive�sector
FZD Roof�function�center
GWS Gear�selector�lever
HEADUNIT/CIC Headunit�(Car�Information�Computer�or�Basic�headunit)
ICM Integrated�Chassis�Management
IHKA Integrated�automatic�heating�/�air�conditioning
K-CAN Body�controller�area�network
K-CAN2 Body�controller�area�network�2
KAFAS Camera-based�driver�assistance�systems
KOMBI Instrument�cluster�(MOST�only�with�option 6WA)
MOST Media�Oriented�System�Transport
OBD On-board�diagnosis�(diagnostic�socket)
PDC Park�Distance�Control�(with�option�5DP,�parking�manoeuvring�assistant:
integrated�in�the�parking�manoeuvring�assistant�control�unit,�otherwise
integrated�in�the�Rear�Electronic�Module�control�unit)
PMA Parking�manoeuvring�assistant
PT-CAN Powertrain�controller�area�network
PT-CAN2 Powertrain�controller�area�network�2
RAD Radio

3
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
1.�Introduction
Index Explanation
REM Rear�Electronic�Module
REMA�LI Reversible�electromotive�automatic�reel,�left�(not�US)
REMA�RE Reversible�electromotive�automatic�reel,�right�(not�US)
SMFA Seat�module,�driver
SWW Lane�change�warning
TPMS Tire�pressure�control
TRSVC Control�unit�for�all-round�vision�camera
VDM Vertical�Dynamics�Management
ZGM Central�gateway�module

4
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
2.�Radio�and�Headunits
2.1.�Overview�of�headunits�F30
Optional�equipment Headunit CID Controller Navigation
Radio�(standard) Basic�headunit 6.5" 5-button No
Navigation�system Car�Information 8.8" 7-button Yes
(option 609) Computer�(CIC)

2.2.�Basic�headunit

F30�Basic�headunit

Index Explanation
1 CID
2 Audio�system�operating�facility
3 Basic�headunit
4 Controller

The�entry�level�radio�for�F30�(w/o�navigation)�is�the�Basic�headunit�(HU-B)�and�is�offered�as�standard
equipment.

The�controller�of�the�Basic�headunit�has�only�five�function�buttons�and�can�only�be�toggled�to�the�left
and�right.�The�Favorite�buttons�only�have�a�touch�sensor�system.

5
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
2.�Radio�and�Headunits
The�Basic�headunit�comes�with�a�central�information�display�(CID)�with�6.5”�screen.

APIX�connection,�CID�to�headunit

Index Explanation
1 Basic�headunit
2 APIX�jack�to�Basic�headunit
3 Central�information�display�(CID)
4 APIX�jack�to�central�information�display�(CID)
5 APIX�data�connection�lines
6 Power�supply

The�CID�in�the�F30�is�not�connected�to�a�bus.�The�CID�is�directly�connected�to�the�headunit�via�an
APIX�interface.�APIX�(Automotive�Pixel�Link)�is�a�bit-serial�data�transfer�system�with�a�data�transfer�rate
of�1�Gbit/s�on�just�one�copper�core�pair.�Each�APIX�video�link�also�has�a�bidirectional�reverse�channel.
Data�transfer�via�the�APIX�interface�has�been�optimized�with�regard�to�electromagnetic�compatibility
and�power�consumption.

Because�of�the�CID's�low�power�consumption,�the�CID�can�be�supplied�with�power�via�2�separate�cur-
rent�leads�directly�by�the�headunit,�and�there�is�no�need�for�a�separate�power�supply�to�the�CID.�Be-
cause�of�the�high�data�transfer�rate�with�low�electromagnetic�emissions,�it�is�also�possible�to�use�cop-
per�wiring�for�applications�with�a�high�bandwidth�requirement�and�to�dispense�with�fiber�optic�net-
working.

The�CID�is�connected�via�two�APIX�links�to�the�headunit.�The�two�copper�core�pairs�and�the�two�pow-
er�supply�leads�are�connected�by�a�common�connector�to�the�headunit�and�the�CID.�An�APIX�video�link
serves�to�transfer�the�screen�content�to�the�CID.�The�bidirectional�reverse�channels�of�the�APIX�video
links�serve�to�transfer�status�information�(such�as�e.g.�CID�operating�temperature),�diagnostic�informa-
tion�and�control�signals.

6
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
2.�Radio�and�Headunits
In�the�radio�systems�area,�in�addition�to�an�AM/FM�double�tuner,�are�integrated�in�the�Basic�headunit.
In�conjunction�with�the�Basic�headunit,�phase�diversity�is�used�instead�of�the�previously�customary�an-
tenna�diversity�for�FM�radio�reception.�For�further�information�on�phase�diversity,�please�refer�to�the
chapter�entitled�antenna�Systems.

In�the�F30�the�Basic�headunit�has�-�in�conjunction�with�a�mobile�phone�preparation�with�connection�for
Bluetooth�and�USB�devices�(option�6NL)�-�a�voice�recognition�system.

The�Telephone�function�is�realized�in�the�headunit�and�the�Contact�information�is�stored�on�internal
memory�as�there�is�no�removable�SD�Card.

F30�connections,�Basic�headunit

Index Explanation
1 AM/FM
2 AM/FM
3 Bluetooth
4 APIX�and�CID�power�supply
5 USB
6 MOST
7 Main�connector
8 DAB�L�Band�(not�US)
9 DAB�Band�III�(not�US)

The�Basic�headunit�does�not�contain�any�components�that�are�replaceable�by�a�BMW�Service�agent
and�has�to�be�replaced�completely�if�defective.�The�Ethernet�connection�from�the�FEM�to�the�headunit
is�used�solely�to�update�the�headunit's�software.

7
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
2.�Radio�and�Headunits
2.2.1.�Block�diagram

F30�block�diagram,�Basic�headunit

Index Explanation
1 Central�information�display
2 Basic�headunit
3 User�interface
4 Application�software
5 Hardware�and�interfaces

8
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
2.�Radio�and�Headunits
2.2.2.�System�wiring�diagram

F30�system�wiring�diagram,�Basic�headunit

9
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
2.�Radio�and�Headunits
Index Explanation
1 Dynamic�Stability�Control�(DSC)
2 Power�distribution�box,�front
3 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
4 Power�distribution�box,�luggage�compartment
5 Integrated�Chassis�Management�(ICM)
6 Controller�(CON)
7 Integrated�automatic�heating�/�air�conditioning
8 Audio�operating�facility
9 IHKA�operating�facility
10 AUX-In�connection�with�USB�audio�interface�in�center�console
1

11 Bluetooth�antenna�in�wiring�harness
12 Basic�headunit
13 Central�information�display�(CID)
14 Steering�column�switch�cluster�(SZL)
15 Instrument�cluster�(KOMBI)

1
�In�vehicles�with�mobile�phone�preparation�with�connection�for�Bluetooth�and�USB�devices�(option
6NL)�the�AUX-In�connection�with�USB�audio�interface�is�connected�to�the�Combox.

10
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
2.�Radio�and�Headunits
2.3.�Car�Information�Computer�(CIC)

F30�Car�Information�Computer

Index Explanation
1 CID
2 Audio�system�operating�facility
3 Car�Information�Computer�(CIC)
4 Controller

The�CIC�headunit�was�installed�for�the�first�time�in�2008�in�the�BMW�1�and�3�Series�vehicles�in�con-
junction�with�the�Navigation�system�(option�609).�This�is�now�also�used�in�the�F30.

The�CID�in�the�F30�is�not�connected�to�a�bus.�The�CID�is,�as�with�the�Basic�headunit,�directly�connect-
ed�to�the�headunit�via�an�APIX�interface.�The�CID�can�be�supplied�with�power�via�two�leads�directly�by
the�headunit.

In�the�F30�the�CIC�always�has�a�voice�recognition�system.�To�be�able�to�operate�the�voice�recognition
system�with�the�buttons�on�the�steering�wheel,�it�is�necessary�for�the�Multifunction�for�steering�wheel
to�be�installed�as�standard.

The�headunit�provides,�through�data�management�on�an�80�GB�hard�disk,�for�a�multitude�of�new�possi-
bilities.

11
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
2.�Radio�and�Headunits
This�is�clearly�shown�in�the�audio�field�particularly�with�the�compiling�of�music.�Music�files�can�be�con-
verted�(ripped)�or�copied�for�compiling�music�on�the�hard�disc.�Stored�on�the�CIC-dedicated�hard�disk,
fast�access�to�these�music�files�is�ensured�at�all�times.�A�choice�of�up�to�3700�music�files�(12�GB)�is
possible�here.

For�further�information�on�the�Car�Information�Computer,�please�refer�to�the�“Car�Information�Comput-
er�CIC”�training�information.

12
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
2.�Radio�and�Headunits
2.3.1.�System�wiring�diagram

F30�system�wiring�diagram,�Car�Information�Computer�(CIC)

13
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
2.�Radio�and�Headunits
Index Explanation
1 Dynamic�Stability�Control�(DSC)
2 Power�distribution�box,�front
3 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
4 Power�distribution�box,�luggage�compartment
5 DC/DC�converter
6 Combox
7 Bluetooth�antenna�in�wiring�harness
8 AUX-In�connection�with�USB�audio�interface�in�center�console
9 Integrated�Chassis�Management�(ICM)
10 Controller�(CON)
11 Integrated�automatic�heating�/�air�conditioning
12 IHKA�operating�facility
13 Audio�operating�facility
14 USB�connection�in�glove�box
15 Car�Information�Computer
16 Central�information�display�(CID)
17 Steering�column�switch�cluster�(SZL)
18 Microphone
19 Instrument�cluster�(KOMBI)

14
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
3.�Speaker�Systems
3.1.�Overview
The�speaker�systems�in�the�F30�are�available�in�three�specification�levels:

• HiFi�system�=�HiFi�loudspeaker�system
• Top�HiFi�system�=�HiFi�loudspeaker�system�Harman�Kardon�(optional�equipment�688).

This�means�the�HiFi�system�is�standard�equipment.

The�speaker�and�amplifier�from�the�F30�have�a�similar�design�to�the�systems�currently�used�in�the�5-
Series�and�7-Series.�The�amplifier�and�headunits�have�been�optimally�adapted�to�the�passenger�com-
partment�of�the�F30�through�vehicle-specific�equalizing.

The�two�central�basses,�like�in�all�the�current�BMW�vehicles,�are�positioned�under�the�front�seats,
whereby�a�consistent�bass�reproduction�is�possible�in�the�entire�vehicle.�The�necessary�housing�vol-
ume�is�achieved�by�connecting�the�central�basses�to�the�side�sill.

All�systems�have�an�adjustable,�speed-dependent�volume�adjustment,�whereby�the�higher�driving
noise�level�is�compensated�at�higher�driving�speeds.

3.2.�Components

3.2.1.�HiFi�system
The�HiFi�loudspeaker�system�consists�of�nine�speakers.�A�seven-channel�amplifier�is�integrated�in�the
HiFi�loudspeaker�system.�The�amplifier�of�the�HiFi�system�has�no�bus�connection�and�receives�the
switch-on�signal�instead�via�a�separate�line.

Separate�speakers�are�installed�in�the�HiFi�system�for�the�treble�and�mid-tone�ranges.

The�HiFi�system�also�has�a�significantly�louder�center�bass�speaker�and�a�mid-range�speaker�posi-
tioned�centrally�in�the�instrument�cluster�as�a�center�speaker.

The�speakers�and�the�amplifier�of�the�HiFi�system�are�illustrated�in�the�following�graphic.�The�speakers
are�operated�with�a�power�output�of�5�x�25�watts�for�the�mid-range�speakers�and�tweeters�and�2�x�40
watts�for�the�bass�speakers.

15
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
3.�Speaker�Systems

F30�HiFi�loudspeaker�system

Index Explanation
1 Mid-range�speaker,�front�center
2 Tweeter,�exterior�mirror�cover,�front�right
3 Mid-range�speaker,�front�right�door
4 Bass�speaker�under�the�front�right�seat
5 Mid-range�speaker,�rear�right�door
6 HiFi�amplifier
7 Mid-range�speaker,�rear�left�door
8 Bass�speaker�under�the�front�left�seat
9 Mid-range�speaker,�front�left�door
10 Tweeter,�exterior�mirror�cover,�front�left

16
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
3.�Speaker�Systems
3.2.2.�Top�HiFi�system

F30�tweeter,�exterior�mirror�cover

The�Harman�Kardon�HiFi�loudspeaker�system�(optional�equipment�688),�which�has�been�further�opti-
mized�in�comparison�to�the�HiFi�loudspeaker�system,�is�complemented�with�two�additional�mid-range
speakers�and�five�additional�tweeters.�The�Top�HiFi�system�thus�comprises�a�total�of�16�speakers.�In-
corporated�in�the�Top�HiFi�system�is�a�nine-channel�amplifier�with�digital�equalizing.�The�AMPT�of�the
Top�HiFi�system�is�a�bus�user�in�Media�Oriented�System�Transport�(MOST).

The�mid-range�speakers�and�tweeters�of�the�Top�HiFi�system�have�high-quality�aluminium�diaphragms
for�a�clearly�differentiated�acoustic�pattern.�Thanks�to�the�additional�use�of�hexagonally�structured
metal�covers�the�damping�and�resonances�of�the�covers�are�minimized.

The�high-quality�panels�with�lettering,�which�are�made�from�anodized�aluminium,�in�the�mirror�triangles
are�a�notable�visible�difference.

The�amplifier�of�the�Top�HiFi�system�is�equipped�with�a�so-called�load�logic�separator�in�the�F30.�Here
the�amplifier�electronics�are�supplied�and�connected�with�a�separate�voltage�line.�This�is�specially�pro-
tected�against�brief�voltage�dips�which�in�turn�prevents�failure�of�the�electronics�if�a�voltage�dip�occurs
briefly.

The�speakers�and�the�amplifier�of�the�Top�HiFi�system�are�illustrated�in�the�following�graphic.�The
speakers�are�operated�with�a�power�output�of�7�x�50�watts�for�the�mid-range�speakers�and�tweeters
and�2�x�125�watts�for�the�bass�speakers.

17
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
3.�Speaker�Systems

F30�Top�HiFi�loudspeaker�system�Harman�Kardon

Index Explanation
1 Tweeter,�front�center
2 Tweeter,�exterior�mirror�cover,�front�right
3 Mid-range�speaker,�front�right�door
4 Bass�speaker�under�the�front�right�seat
5 Mid-range�speaker,�rear�right�door
6 Tweeter,�rear�right�door
7 Mid-range�speaker,�luggage�compartment�capping,�right
8 Tweeter,�luggage�compartment�capping,�right
9 Top�HiFi�amplifier
10 Tweeter,�luggage�compartment�capping,�left
11 Mid-range�speaker,�luggage�compartment�capping,�left
12 Tweeter,�rear�left�door
13 Mid-range�speaker,�rear�left�door
14 Bass�speaker�under�the�front�left�seat
15 Mid-range�speaker,�front�left�door
16 Tweeter,�exterior�mirror�cover,�front�left
17 Mid-range�speaker,�front�center

18
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
3.�Speaker�Systems
System�wiring�diagram

F30�system�wiring�diagram,�Top�HiFi�system

19
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
3.�Speaker�Systems
Index Explanation
1 Tweeter,�front�center
2 Mid-range�speaker,�front�center
3 Headunit
4 Front�Electronic�Module
5 Tweeter,�exterior�mirror�cover,�front�right
6 Mid-range�speaker,�front�right�door
7 Bass�speaker�under�the�front�right�seat
8 Mid-range�speaker,�rear�right�door
9 Tweeter,�rear�right�door
10 Power�distribution�box,�luggage�compartment
11 Top�HiFi�amplifier
12 Mid-range�speaker,�luggage�compartment�capping,�right
13 Tweeter,�luggage�compartment�capping,�right
14 Tweeter,�luggage�compartment�capping,�left
15 Mid-range�speaker,�luggage�compartment�capping,�left
16 Tweeter,�rear�left�door
17 Mid-range�speaker,�rear�left�door
18 Bass�speaker�under�the�front�left�seat
19 Mid-range�speaker,�front�left�door
20 Tweeter,�exterior�mirror�cover,�front�left

20
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
4.�Telephone�Systems
4.1.�Overview
Three�different�items�of�optional�equipment�are�available�for�the�F30�telephone�systems:

• Hands-free�system�with�USB�interface�(standard)
• Mobile�phone�preparation�with�connection�for�Bluetooth�and�USB�devices�(option�6NL�with
telematics).

The�specified�range�of�functions�is�only�achieved�with�BMW-recommended�Bluetooth-capable�mobile
phones.�A�list�of�currently�recommended�Bluetooth-capable�mobile�phones�can�be�called�up�through
the�Aftersales�Assistance�Portal�(ASAP)�or�at�http://www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth.

4.2.�System�components

System�components,�telephone

21
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
4.�Telephone�Systems
Index Explanation
1 Emergency�call�speaker�(only�with�option�6NL)
2 Microphone,�driver's�side
3 Central�information�display
4 Headunit
5 Controller
6 Base�plate�(only�with�option�6NL)
7 Microphone,�front�passenger�side�(only�with�option�6NL)
8 Roof�antenna
9 Combox�(only�with�option�6NL�or�with�option�609)
10 Emergency�call�antenna�(only�with�option�6NL)

The�Bluetooth�antenna�is�located�in�the�audio�wiring�harness�of�the�F30.�In�the�case�of�a�tele-
phone-supported�headunit,�it�is�located�in�the�center�console.�In�vehicles�with�the�Combox�control
unit,�it�is�located�in�the�C-pillar�area.

4.3.�General�information
The�telephone�functions�in�the�F30�are�provided�by�either�the�headunit�or�the�Combox.�The�following
table�summarizes�this�information:

Standard/Optional In�conjunction�with Telephone-support- Combox


equipment ed�headunit
Hands-free�Bluetooth Standard�equip- Yes No
system�with�USB�in- ment�(6NH)
terface
BMW�Assist�with�en- Option�609 No Combox�telematics
hanced�Bluetooth�and
USB�(option�6NL)
BMW�Assist�with�en- Standard�equip- No Combox�telematics
hanced�Bluetooth�and ment�(6NH) with�GPS
USB�(option�6NL)

The�optional�equipment�Navigation�System�(option�609)�always�contains�telephone�functionality�in�the
F30.

The�telephone�functions�contained�in�the�Hands-free�Bluetooth�system�with�USB�interface�(standard
equipment�6NH)�is�installed�and�realized�in�the�Basic�headunit�for�the�standard�equipment�radio�op-
tion.�In�the�Basic�headunit�the�Contact�information�is�stored�internally�as�there�is�no�removable�SD�card
installed.

22
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
4.�Telephone�Systems
4.3.1.�Compatibility
The�range�and�diversity�of�mobile�phones�available�on�the�market�is�steadily�increasing.�Not�every
Bluetooth-enabled�mobile�phone�is�automatically�compatible�with�a�hands-free�system.�The�Internet
site�http://www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth�has�been�completely�revised�to�enable�the�customer�to�make
as�easy�and�clear�an�enquiry�as�possible.

The�customer�can�now�obtain�information�regarding�the�compatibility�of�specific�mobile�phones�with
his�vehicle�(by�entering�the�vehicle�identification�number�for�example).�A�prospective�BMW�customer
can�also�find�out�which�mobile�phones�are�compatible�with�specific�BMW�models.

BMW�Bluetooth�Internet�page

4.4.�Hands-free�system�with�USB�interface
A�telephone-supported�headunit�is�used�in�conjunction�with�radio�(standard�equipment)�in�the�F30.
With�this,�no�additional�control�unit�is�required�in�order�to�provide�telephone�functions�in�the�vehicle.

In�vehicles�with�Navigation�System�(option�609)�a�Combox�is�installed�as�well�as�the�headunit�to
achieve�the�telephone�function.�In�this�case,�the�microphone,�the�Bluetooth�antenna�and�the�AUX-In
connection�with�USB�audio�interface�are�connected�not�to�the�headunit,�but�to�the�Combox.

The�functionality�and�operation�of�the�telephone�function�follow�the�established�BMW�logic.�Business
Connectivity�can�be�used�to�pair�a�wide�range�of�mobile�phones�via�Bluetooth.�A�list�of�compatible�de-
vices�is�available�at�http://www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth.

The�phone�book�and�lists�of�callers�are�transferred�from�the�mobile�phone.�Contacts�can�be�stored�in
the�address�memory�of�the�headunit�in�addition�to�the�mobile�phone's�phone�book.

During�the�call�the�telephone�function�allows�calls�to�be�held�or�extended�(conference�call),�DTMF
tones�to�be�transmitted,�and�the�microphone�to�be�muted.

4.4.1.�System�wiring�diagram
The�system�wiring�diagram�for�Business�Connectivity�in�conjunction�with�Navigation�System�(option
609)�is�depicted�in�the�system�wiring�diagram�in�the�section�entitled�Car�Information�Computer�(CIC).

23
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
4.�Telephone�Systems

F30�system�wiring�diagram,�Hands�free�and�Bluetooth/USB�standard�equipment

24
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
4.�Telephone�Systems
Index Explanation
1 Microphone
2 Instrument�cluster�(KOMBI)
3 Steering�column�switch�cluster�(SZL)
4 Central�information�display�(CID)
5 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
6 Headunit
7 Bluetooth�antenna�in�wiring�harness
8 Controller�(CON)
9 AUX-In�connection�with�USB�audio�interface�in�center�console

4.5.�Mobile�phone�preparation�with�connection�for�Bluetooth�and
USB�devices

F30�mobile�phone�preparation�with�AUX-In�connection�with�USB�audio�interface

Vehicles�are�equipped�with�a�Multimedia�Combox.�The�Multimedia�Combox�with�telematics�board�(op-
tion�6NL)�in�conjunction�with�the�Mobile�phone�preparation�with�connection�for�Bluetooth�and�USB
devices.�Vehicles�have�a�USB�audio�interface�and�two�microphones.�In�addition,�a�base�plate�with
charger�function�is�used�for�the�connection�of�the�telephone�antenna�on�the�roof.�In�vehicles�with�the
optional�equipment�Music�interface�for�smartphones�(optional�equipment�6NF)�the�base�plate�is�also
extended�to�include�a�USB�data�connection�to�the�Combox.

In�vehicles�with�the�standard�radio�equipment�the�Combox�also�has�a�GPS�receiver.

25
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
4.�Telephone�Systems
The�following�functions�are�available�in�the�F30�with�the�Combox:

• Connection�of�external�audio�players�(e.g.�smartphones)�via�Bluetooth
• Simultaneous�pairing�of�several�mobile�phones�and�audio�devices�via�Bluetooth
• Contacts�with�pictures
• Software�updating�directly�by�customer
• Connection�of�certain�iPods�via�a�cable�(omission�of�Y-cable)
• Album�cover�display�(with�iPod/MTP�player/MP3�via�USB)
• Office�with�email,�calendar�and�notes�from�mobile�phone

26
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
4.�Telephone�Systems
4.5.1.�System�wiring�diagram

F30�system�wiring�diagram,�Connectivity

27
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
4.�Telephone�Systems
Index Explanation
1 Dynamic�Stability�Control�(DSC)
2 Crash�Safety�Module�(ACSM)
3 Emergency�call�button�in�roof�function�center�FZD�(option�6NL�only)
4 Microphone�1
5 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
6 USB�connection�in�glove�box
7 Integrated�Chassis�Management�(ICM)
8 Power�distribution�box,�luggage�compartment
9 Combox
10 Emergency�GSM�antenna�(option�6NL�only)
11 Roof�antenna
12 Base�plate�(USB�data�connection�and�antenna�connections�only�with�option
6NF)
13 CVBS�video�connection�to�headunit�(only�in�conjunction�with�option�6NR�and
option�609)
14 AUX-In�connection�with�USB�audio�interface
15 Controller�(CON)
16 Bluetooth�antenna�in�wiring�harness
17 Headunit
18 Central�information�display�(CID)
19 Emergency�call�speaker�(option�6NL�only)
20 Steering�column�switch�cluster�(SZL)
21 Microphone�2
22 Instrument�cluster�(KOMBI)

4.5.2.�Office
With�the�optional�equipment�Mobile�phone�preparation�with�connection�to�Bluetooth�and�USB�devices
(6NL),�the�Combox�allows�the�customer�to�use�the�Office�function.

The�customer�can�use�the�Office�function�to�access�the�SMS,�calendar,�notes,�aimless,�tasks�and
reminders�in�a�compatible�mobile�phone.�The�Contacts�menu�item�has�been�replaced�by�the�Office
menu�item�in�the�central�information�display.

The�data�on�the�mobile�phone�can�only�be�read.�This�means�that�the�data�on�the�mobile�phone�cannot
be�modified�by�the�Combox.

The�"Office�update"�display�tells�the�user�about�the�number�of�new�messages,�which�tasks�are�active
and�forthcoming�deadlines.

28
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
4.�Telephone�Systems

Office�update�display

The�calendar�can�display�deadlines�of�the�last�30�days�and�for�the�next�90�days.

If�an�appointment�contains�phone�numbers�or�email�addresses,�they�can�be�used�directly�or�saved�to
the�Contacts.

Appointment�view

SMS,�aimless,�appointment�entries,�tasks�and�notes�can�be�read�out.

Information�on�the�Office�functions�supported�on�your�mobile�phone�can�be�found�online�at
http://www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth.

Office�for�iPhone

On�an�iPhone�the�Office�functions�calendar�and�email�are�not�supported.�The�calendar�display�is�cur-
rently�only�possible�using�an�App�in�connection�with�optional�equipment�BMW�Apps�(optional�equip-
ment�6NR).

29
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
4.�Telephone�Systems
Office�for�Blackberry

When�using�the�Office�function�on�Blackberry�devices�please�take�note�of�the�following�four�points:

1)�Office�functions�must�be�supported�by�the�mobile�phone.�More�information�is�available�online�at
http://www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth.

BMW�Bluetooth�Internet�page

2)�Office�function�must�be�activated�in�the�headunit.

Activation�of�Office�function�in�Central�Information�Display�(CID)

3)�The�coding�setting�of�the�Blackberry�must�be�deactivated.

4)�There�must�be�no�more�than�500�emails�in�the�inbox�of�the�Blackberry.

30
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
4.�Telephone�Systems
When�using�the�calendar�function�an�App�also�has�to�be�installed�for�the�Blackberry.

App�for�calendar�function�with�Blackberry

If�the�Office�functions�are�not�available�although�all�known�points�are�fulfilled,�deactivate�the�Bluetooth
connection�in�the�headunit�and�on�the�mobile�phone.�Then�reactivate�the�Bluetooth�connection.�Infor-
mation�on�deactivating�and�activating�the�Bluetooth�connections�is�available�in�the�Owner's�Handbook
and�online�at�http://www.bmwusa.com/bluetooth.

31
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
5.�Video�System
Video�from�Digital�Versatile�Disc�(DVD)�can�be�viewed�in�the�Central�Information�Display�(CID)�of�the
F30.�For�safety�reasons,�the�video�picture�in�the�CID�is�switched�off�during�the�journey�and�a�note�is
displayed�instead.

The�following�optional�equipment�is�offered:

• DVD�changer�for�6�DVDs.

Playing�video�DVDs�with�the�DVD�changer�for�6�DVDs�is�only�possible�in�connection�with�Navigation
System�(optional�equipment�609).

As�well�as�playing�back�films,�interactive�media�such�as�travel�guides,�reference�works,�catalogues,�etc.
can�be�displayed.�Multiple�channel�audio�formats�are�supported�in�conjunction�with�the�Top�HiFi�ampli-
fier�(optional�equipment�688�HiFi�loudspeaker�system�Harman�Kardon).

5.1.�Functional�diagram

F30�system�wiring�diagram�video�function

32
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
5.�Video�System
Index Explanation
1 Central�information�display�(CID)
2 Car�Information�Computer�(CIC)
3 6-disc�DVD�changer,�in�glove�box
4 Base�plate�with�video�integration
5 TRSVC�control�unit
6 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
7 Controller

Three�systems�are�involved�as�video�sources�in�connection�with�the�Navigation�headunit�(optional
equipment�609)�in�the�F30:

• DVD�changer
• TRSVC�control�unit�(with�optional�equipment�3AG�reversing�camera�or�optional�equipment
5DL�Surround�View)
• Base�plate�with�video�integration�(with�optional�equipment�6NR�BMW�Apps).

The�transmission�of�the�video�data�is�realized�via�color�Video�Blanking�Signal�(FBAS).�The�Car�Informa-
tion�Computer�(CIC)�headunit�with�optional�equipment�609�used�in�the�F30�only�has�three�(FBAS)�Sig-
nal�connections,�however.�As�no�video�switch�is�available�in�the�F30�only�three�video�sources�can�be
installed.

33
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
6.�BMW�ConnectedDrive
BMW�ConnectedDrive�is�effectively�a�personal�assistant�to�the�driver.�It�utilizes�the�latest�technologies
with�the�aim�of�supplying�the�driver�with�all�the�information�that�he/she�wants�and�needs.�With�the�mar-
ket�introduction�of�the�F01�the�BMW�ConnectedDrive�has�been�enhanced�with�a�further�innovation:
use�of�the�Internet�inside�the�vehicle.

In�the�F30�many�of�the�BMW�ConnectedDrive�functions�already�familiar�from�current�BMW�models�are
used,�such�as�e.g.:

• “BMW�Assist”�(option�6NL)�adds�BMW�Online�service�(option�615)
• “Apps”�(option�6NR)�adds�“BMW�Assist”�(option�6NL)
• “BMW�Online�service”�(option�615)

For�some�BMW�ConnectedDrive�services�the�optional�equipment�Mobile�phone�preparation�with�con-
nection�for�Bluetooth�and�USB�devices�with�telematics�services�(option�6NL)�and�an�active�BMW�Con-
nectedDrive�agreement�are�required.

For�further�information�on�the�optional�equipment�“Apps”�(option�6NR)�and�the�associated�video�con-
nection�of�smartphones,�please�refer�to�the�“Apps/ConnectedDrive”�training�information.

6.1.�BMW�Online�formally�BMW�Search
A�new�improved�interface�for�the�service�is�used�in�the�F30�with�the�optional�equipment�BMW�Online.
The�interface�can�be�personalized�by�the�customer�better�than�before�and�new�features�and�services
can�be�added�by�the�customer.

The�optional�equipment�Mobile�phone�preparation�with�connection�for�Bluetooth�and�USB�devices
with�telematics�services�(option�6NL)�and�an�active�BMW�ConnectedDrive�agreement�are�required�for
BMW�Online�functionality.

BMW�Online�display�in�the�CID

The�ConnectedDrive�Services�team�is�pleased�to�announce�exciting�changes�to�the�BMW�Online�ex-
perience��The�BMW�Online�service�brings�the�latest�Stock�Indexes,�News,�Weather,�Google�Local
Search�results,�Send�to�Mail,�and�Fuel�Prices�to�your�vehicle’s�navigation�system.�These�will�be�avail-
able�in�the�basic�view�depending�on�the�vehicle�equipment.�Other�applications�are�available�under�"Ap-
plications".

34
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
6.�BMW�ConnectedDrive
The�respective�information�is�transferred�to�the�vehicle�by�means�of�an�Internet�connection�via�an�on-
line�portal�developed�and�made�available�by�BMW�and�shown�on�the�control�display�of�the�iDrive�op-
erating�system.�The�enhanced�offering�is�available�without�any�additional�cost�to�not�only�future�cus-
tomers,�but�also�to�a�variety�of�customers�already�registered�for�BMW�ConnectedDrive.

SERVICES�INCLUDED:

Stock�Indexes�-�Want�to�know�the�Dow�Jones,�S&P�500�or�NASDAQ�indices?�BMW�Online�provides
these�indices�right�on�your�control�display.�News�–�With�BMW�Online,�the�latest�US,�Business,�World,
Sports,�Entertainment,�and�BMW�news�headlines�are�available�to�you.�They�can�even�be�read�out�auto-
matically�by�the�vehicle’s�Text-to-Speech�feature.

BMW�Online�News�display�in�the�CID

Weather�-�BMW�Online�provides�the�latest�5-day�weather�forecast�and�even�provides�weather�advi-
sories�and�warnings.�You�can�search�for�weather�at�your�current�location,�your�destination,�or�any�other
location�in�the�US.

BMW�Online�Weather�display�in�the�CID

Google�Local�Search�-�With�Google�Local�Search,�you�can�search�for�a�business�listing�to�get�impor-
tant�information�like�the�address�and�phone�number.�Then,�you�can�set�the�address�as�a�destination�in
your�navigation�or�call�the�business�via�your�Bluetooth-connected�phone.

BMW�Online�Google�display�in�the�CID

35
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
6.�BMW�ConnectedDrive
Fuel�Prices�-�The�latest�fuel�price�information�is�just�a�few�clicks�away��With�BMW�Online,�you�can
search�for�fuel�stations�nearby�and�sort�by�price�or�distance.

BMW�Online�Fuel�price�display�in�the�CID

Send�to�Mail�-�With�the�Send�to�Mail�application,�you�can�email�your�vehicle’s�current�location�and
destination�to�any�email�address.

BMW�Online�Send�to�Mail�display�in�the�CID

The�F30�will�have�the�updated�BMW�Online�display�screen�from�the�start�of�production.�All�current
BMW�vehicles�with�this�option�will�have�these�new�screens�starting�December�1,�2011.�This�will�be�au-
tomatically�updated�when�opening�the�online�features�after�December�1st�on�all�vehicles.

Changes�Starting�December�1,�2011

Display�Before�December�1,�2011

Display�Starting�December�1,�2011

36
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
6.�BMW�ConnectedDrive
HOW�TO�START�BMW�ONLINE:

For�all�cars�produced�before�March�2011,�and�X�vehicles�produced�before�April�2011:

Step�1:�From�the�main�iDrive�menu,�select�BMW�Assist

Step�2:�Once�in�the�BMW�Assist�menu,�select�BMW�Search

Step�3:�After�a�brief�moment,�the�vehicle�connects�to�the�BMW�Online�service

Step�4:�You�may�now�see�a�Welcome�screen.�If�so,�select�the�“Now”�text�to�proceed.�Then,�you�will
now�be�connected�to�BMW�Online

Step�5:�Please�allow�a�moment�for�the�service�to�connect,�and�then�you�will�see�the�main�menu�screen

For�all�cars�produced�after�March�2011,�and�X�vehicles�produced�after�April�2011:

Step�1:�From�the�main�iDrive�menu,�select�ConnectedDrive

Step�2:�Once�in�the�ConnectedDrive�menu,�select�BMW�Online

Step�3:�After�a�brief�moment,�the�vehicle�connects�to�the�BMW�Online�service

Step�4:�You�may�now�see�a�Welcome�screen.�If�so,�select�the�“Now”�text�to�proceed.�Then,�you�will
now�be�connected�to�BMW�Online

Step�5:�Please�allow�a�moment�for�the�service�to�connect,�and�then�you�will�see�the�main�menu�screen

6.2.�HOW�TO�ACCESS�THE�SERVICES
News,�Weather,�and�Google�Local�Search�Once�you�are�connected�to�the�BMW�Online�service,�you�will
be�able�to�access�News,�Weather,�and�Google�Local�Search�directly�from�the�main�menu.

BMW�Online�Main�Menu�display�in�the�CID

Other�Applications�(Fuel�Prices,�Send�to�Mail)�Some�Applications�are�not�shown�on�the�main�menu
and�instead�are�available�via�the�Applications�menu.�To�use�these�applications,�you�must�add�them�to
your�Applications�menu.

37
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
6.�BMW�ConnectedDrive
HOW�TO�ADD�AN�APPLICATION

New�applications�will�be�added�periodically�to�BMW�Online.�In�order�to�get�these�applications,�you
must�add�them�via�the�Applications�menu.

Step�1:�Select�the�Applications�menu

Step�2:�Select�the�Applications�button�from�the�upper-right�corner

Step�3:�On�the�“Add�application”�menu,�select�the�application�to�add

Step�4:�On�the�next�screen,�you�will�see�a�description�of�the�application.�Select�“Add”�to�add�the�appli-
cation.

Step�5:�You�will�now�be�able�to�access�the�application,�under�the�“Applications”�menu�in�the�main
menu.

38
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
7.�Personal�Profile
Personal�Profile�stores�personally�input�data,�such�as�e.g.�the�automatic�setting�of�the�exterior�mirrors
or�the�speed-dependent�volume,�in�the�corresponding�control�units.

Personal�Profile�operating�principle

Index Explanation
A Import/export�via�USB�interface
B Controller
C Import/export�via�BMW�Online
1 User�profile�1�connected�with�an�ID�transmitter
2 User�profile�2�connected�with�an�ID�transmitter
3 User�profile�3�connected�with�an�ID�transmitter
4 Guest�profile�can�only�be�selected�via�the�controller

There�is�a�total�of�four�profiles�in�the�vehicle.�Three�of�these�can�be�adapted�for�different�persons�and
assigned�to�different�ID�transmitters.�Once�the�vehicle�is�unlocked�via�the�ID�transmitter,�the�system
recognizes�the�profile�assigned�to�the�ID�transmitter�and�activates�it.

A�guest�profile�can�be�activated�in�addition�to�the�three�profiles�which�can�be�assigned�to�ID�transmit-
ters.�The�guest�profile�can�be�used�to�make�individual�settings�without�affecting�the�three�personal
profiles.�The�guest�profile�can�be�activated�in�the�Settings�menu�in�the�CID.

39
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
7.�Personal�Profile

Information�for�Service:

When�receiving�a�vehicle�with�Personal�Profile,�it�is�important�to�ensure�that�the�guest�profile�is�activat-
ed.�In�this�way,�the�settings�made�by�the�vehicle�user�are�not�altered.

Profiles�can�be�imported�and�exported�by�means�of�the�USB�interface�or�BMW�Online.�Which�USB�port
can�be�used�to�import�and�export�the�profiles�is�dependent�on�the�vehicle's�equipment�specification:

Optional�equipment In�conjunction�with USB�port


Navigation�System - Glove�box
(option 609)
Radio�(standard) Hands-free�system�with�USB�inter- Center�console
face�(option�6NH)
Radio�(standard) Mobile�phone�preparation�with�con- No�import/export�via
nection�for�Bluetooth�and�USB�de- USB�possible
vices�(option�6NL)

Personal�profile�is�always�stored�in�the�headunit.�Vehicles�with�navigation�(option�609)�have�a�USB�port
in�the�glovebox�to�perform�import/export�of�data.

With�the�standard�radio�in�combination�with�the�Hands-free�system�with�USB�interface�(option�6NH),
personal�profile�can�be�imported/exported�through�the�USB�connection�in�the�center�console�because
this�is�connected�to�the�headunit.

With�the�standard�radio�in�combination�with�the�Mobile�phone�preparation�with�connection�for�Blue-
tooth�and�USB�devices�(option�6NL)�it�is�not�possible�to�import/export�through�the�USB�connection�in
the�center�console�because�this�is�connected�to�the�Combox�and�not�the�headunit.

Exported�profiles�can�also�be�imported�to�other�vehicles.�Which�settings�of�the�profiles�are�adopted
during�import�to�another�vehicle�is�dependent�on�the�vehicle�model�and�its�equipment�specification.
During�import�only�settings�of�functions�which�are�identical�in�both�vehicles�are�adopted.�If�a�setting
cannot�be�imported,�the�current�setting�of�the�existing�profile�is�retained.

Personal�Profile�settings�in�the�CID

40
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
8.�Navigation
Map�updating�for�navigation�is�performed�in�the�F30�via�a�USB�interface�which�is�connected�to�the
headunit.�The�USB�port�in�glove�box�must�be�used�for�map�updating.�In�vehicles�with�the�USB�port�in
the�center�console,�this�cannot�be�used�for�map�updating�since�the�USB�is�connected�to�the�COM-
BOX.

Optional�equipment In�conjunction�with Map�updating


Navigation�System - USB�connection�in�glove�box
(option 609)

41
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
9.�Antenna�Systems
The�F30�has�different�antenna�systems,�depending�on�the�national-market�version�and�optional�equip-
ment�used:

Antenna System Location


FM/AM�antenna Radio Lower
SDARS�antenna Radio Roof
GPS�antenna Navigation�system�or�Combox Roof�antenna
Remote�control�services�an- CAS�(remote�control�services) Partition�wall�of�luggage�com-
tenna partment,�top
Bluetooth�antenna Telephone Wiring�harness
Emergency�call�antenna Telematics�services Partition�wall�of�luggage�com-
partment,�top

Antenna�diversity�is�used�in�vehicles�with�Navigation�system�(optional�equipment�609),�while�phase�di-
versity�is�used�in�vehicles�with�the�standard�radio�equipment.

The�remote�control�service�Antenna�and�the�emergency�call�antenna�are�located�above�at�the�partition
wall�to�the�luggage�compartment�in�the�F30.

The�following�graphic�provides�an�overview�of�the�antenna�system�components.

F30�Antenna�system

42
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
9.�Antenna�Systems
Index Explanation
1 Roof�antenna
2 Antenna�diversity/Phase�diversity
3 Wave�trap,�heated�rear�window
4 Emergency�call�antenna
5 Remote�control�services�antenna
6 Interference�suppression�filter,�audio/additional�brake�light

You�can�see�the�layout�of�the�antennas�in�the�rear�window�on�the�following�graphic.

F30�Antenna�system,�rear�window

Index Explanation
1 Connection�of�heated�rear�window�to�wave�trap
2 AM�antenna
3 Antenna�diversity/Phase�diversity
4 DAB�Band�III�antenna�(not�US)
5 Antenna�FM1
6 Antenna�FM2

43
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
9.�Antenna�Systems
9.1.�Antenna�and�phase�diversity

Operating�principle,�antenna�and�phase�diversity

Index Explanation
A Antenna�diversity�with�(option�609)�Navigation
B Phase�diversity�(standard�radio)
1 Antenna�signal�strong
2 Antenna�signal�weak
3 Diversity�including�amplifier
4 Tuner�module�in�headunit
5 Digital�signal�processor�(DSP)

Vehicles�with�Navigation�(option�609)�are�equipped�with�antenna�diversity.�The�antenna�diversity
boosts�the�signals�of�the�two�FM�antennas�and�evaluates�the�signal�levels�of�the�two�radio�signals.
The�antenna�with�the�better�input�signal�is�used�for�radio�reception.�The�system�switches�to�the�other
FM�antenna�if�the�signal�quality�of�the�received�radio�station�is�inadequate�in�terms�of�quality�and�field
strength.�The�switch-on�signal�for�the�antenna�diversity�and�the�power�supply�is�made�available�to�the
antenna�diversity�via�the�interference�suppression�filter�of�the�additional�brake�light.

Vehicles�with�the�standard�radio�equipment�are�equipped�with�phase�diversity.�The�radio�signals�of�the
two�FM�antennas�are�boosted�in�the�phase�diversity�module�and�transmitted�to�the�Basic�headunit.
The�radio�signals�are�digitized�in�the�Basic�headunit.�An�improved�signal�is�then�calculated�from�the
two�radio�signals�with�the�aid�of�an�algorithm�in�a�digital�signal�processor�(DSP).�The�switch-on�signal

44
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
9.�Antenna�Systems
for�the�phase�diversity�and�the�power�supply�is�made�available�by�the�headunit.�For�updating�the�list
of�stations�only�the�signal�from�one�antenna�is�used�briefly�for�radio�reception�and�the�signal�from�the
other�antenna�is�used�for�scanning�the�frequencies.�The�interval�for�updating�the�list�of�stations�de-
pends�on�the�signal�quality�of�the�stronger�antenna,�but�occurs�at�the�latest�every�four�minutes.

9.2.�Bluetooth�Antenna
The�Bluetooth�antenna�for�the�F30�is�conceived�as�an�open�item�and�supplied�as�part�of�the�wiring�har-
ness.�A�non-connected�antenna�can�no�longer�be�identified�by�this�design.�In�vehicles�which�do�not
have�a�Combox�the�Bluetooth�antenna�is�located�under�the�center�console.�In�vehicles�which�do�have�a
Combox�the�Bluetooth�antenna�is�located�in�the�area�of�the�left�C-pillar

45
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
9.�Antenna�Systems
9.3.�System�wiring�diagram

System�wiring�diagram,�antennas�in�the�F30

46
F30�Entertainment�and�Communication
9.�Antenna�Systems
Index Explanation
1 Operating�facility,�integrated�automatic�heating�/�air�conditioning�(IHKA)
2 Integrated�automatic�heating�/�air�conditioning�(IHKA)
3 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
4 Remote�control�services�antenna
5 Power�distribution�box,�luggage�compartment
6 Rear�Electronic�Module�(REM)
7 Wave�trap,�heated�rear�window
8 Connection�of�heated�rear�window�to�wave�trap
9 Heated�rear�window
10 Connection�of�heated�rear�window�to�wave�trap
11 Combox
12 Video�Module�(not�US)
13 Antenna/phase�diversity�(with�amplifier)
14 Line�for�switch-on�signal�(only�in�vehicles�with�antenna�diversity)
15 Additional�brake�light
16 Interference�suppression�filter,�additional�brake�light
17 Bluetooth�antenna�in�vehicles�with�COMBOX
18 Emergency�call�antenna
19 Roof�antenna�(telephone,�SDARS�and�GPS)
20 Base�plate
21 Bluetooth�antenna�in�vehicles�without�COMBOX
22 Headunit
23 Antenna�in�inside�mirror�(VICS)�(for�Japan�only)

47
Bayerische�Motorenwerke�Aktiengesellschaft
Händlerqualifizierung�und�Training
Röntgenstraße�7
85716�Unterschleißheim,�Germany
Technical�training.
Product�information.
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems

BMW�Service
General�information

Symbols�used

The�following�symbol�is�used�in�this�document�to�facilitate�better�comprehension�or�to�draw�attention
to�very�important�information:

Contains�important�safety�information�and�information�that�needs�to�be�observed�strictly�in�order�to
guarantee�the�smooth�operation�of�the�system.

Information�status�and�national-market�versions

BMW�Group�vehicles�meet�the�requirements�of�the�highest�safety�and�quality�standards.�Changes�in
requirements�for�environmental�protection,�customer�benefits�and�design�render�necessary�continu-
ous�development�of�systems�and�components.�Consequently,�there�may�be�discrepancies�between
the�contents�of�this�document�and�the�vehicles�available�in�the�training�course.

This�document�basically�relates�to�the�European�version�of�left-hand�drive�vehicles.�Some�operating
elements�or�components�are�arranged�differently�in�right-hand�drive�vehicles�than�shown�in�the�graph-
ics�in�this�document.�Further�differences�may�arise�as�a�result�of�the�equipment�specification�in�specif-
ic�markets�or�countries.

Additional�sources�of�information

Further�information�on�the�individual�topics�can�be�found�in�the�following:

• Owner's�Handbook
• Integrated�Service�Technical�Application.

Contact:�[email protected]

©2011�BMW�AG,�Munich,�Germany

Reprints�of�this�publication�or�its�parts�require�the�written�approval�of�BMW�AG,�Munich

The�information�contained�in�this�document�forms�an�integral�part�of�the�technical�training�of�the�BMW
Group�and�is�intended�for�the�trainer�and�participants�in�the�seminar.�Refer�to�the�latest�relevant�infor-
mation�systems�of�the�BMW�Group�for�any�changes/additions�to�the�technical�data.

Information�status:�September�2011
VH-23/International�Technical�Training
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
Contents
1. Introduction............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 1
1.1. The�hidden�protector.......................................................................................................................................................................................1

2. Models............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2
2.1. Overview............................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2

3. System�Overview.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3
3.1. System�wiring�diagrams..............................................................................................................................................................................3
3.1.1. Bus�overview................................................................................................................................................................................4
3.1.2. System�wiring�diagram� ..............................................................................................................................................7

4. Functions..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 9
4.1. Functions�of�Crash�Safety�Module� .......................................................................................................................................... 9
4.2. Crash-relevant�functions............................................................................................................................................................................ 9
4.2.1. Evaluating�the�sensor�signals.......................................................................................................................10
4.2.2. Crash�detection...................................................................................................................................................................10
4.2.3. Trigger�time�and�trigger�sequence...................................................................................................... 11
4.2.4. Activation�of�the�ignition�circuit�output�stages..................................................................11
4.2.5. Sending�the�crash�message...........................................................................................................................11
4.2.6. Crash�documentation................................................................................................................................................ 12
4.2.7. Emergency�call�function....................................................................................................................................... 12
4.3. System-monitoring�functions........................................................................................................................................................ 13
4.3.1. System�self�test................................................................................................................................................................. 13
4.3.2. Display�of�system�operability........................................................................................................................ 13
4.3.3. Cyclic�monitoring........................................................................................................................................................... 13
4.3.4. Fault�display�and�fault�storage.................................................................................................................... 13
4.3.5. Output�of�faults�(diagnosis)............................................................................................................................. 14
4.3.6. Acoustic�and�visual�seat�belt�warning.............................................................................................14
4.3.7. CIS�Mat............................................................................................................................................................................................ 14

5. System�Components......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 15
5.1. Crash�Safety�Module� .................................................................................................................................................................................15
5.2. Sensors�and�switches................................................................................................................................................................................ 15
5.2.1. Lateral�and�longitudinal�acceleration�sensor,�B-pillar.............................................. 16
5.2.2. Door�airbag�sensor�(pressure)..................................................................................................................... 16
5.2.3. Front�sensor........................................................................................................................................................................... 17
5.2.4. Sensors�in�the�ICM....................................................................................................................................................... 18
5.2.5. CIS�mat............................................................................................................................................................................................ 18
5.2.6. Seat�belt�buckle�switch.......................................................................................................................................... 19
5.2.7. Emergency�call�button............................................................................................................................................ 19
5.2.8. Seat-position�sensors............................................................................................................................................... 19
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
Contents
5.3. Actuators......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 20
5.3.1. Overview......................................................................................................................................................................................... 20
5.3.2. Driver's�airbag........................................................................................................................................................................22
5.3.3. Front�passenger�airbag.......................................................................................................................................... 22
5.3.4. Knee�airbag............................................................................................................................................................................... 23
5.3.5. Head�airbag� ............................................................................................................................................................................. 23
5.3.6. Side�airbag,�front.............................................................................................................................................................. 24
5.3.7. Seat�belt�buckle�tensioner................................................................................................................................ 25
5.3.8. Automatic�tensioner�with�linear�mechanical�force�limiter................................. 26
5.3.9. Safety�battery�terminal............................................................................................................................................ 26
5.3.10. Airbag�indicator�light.................................................................................................................................................. 27
5.3.11. Seat�belt�warning�light.............................................................................................................................................28
5.3.12. Indicator�lamp�for�front�passenger�airbag�deactivation........................................ 28
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
1.�Introduction
1.1.�The�hidden�protector
The�passive�safety�system�of�the�F30�is�based�on�the�objectives�and�characteristics�of�current�BMW
models.�The�passive�safety�system�fulfils�all�legislative�requirements�worldwide.

For�this,�extensive�measures�were�performed�on�the�body�and�on�the�occupants'�safety�and�protection
systems.�In�addition�to�the�restraint�system,�a�special�body�structure�with�a�defined�crash�behavior�is
also�part�of�the�passive�safety�system.�In�the�event�of�an�accident,�the�forces�introduced�are�reduced�in
a�defined�manner�and�therefore�have�less�of�an�impact�on�the�occupants.

The�restraint�systems�ensure�that�the�risk�of�injury�is�further�reduced.

The�4th�generation�Advanced�Crash�Safety�Module�ACSM�is�used�as�the�central�airbag�control�unit�for
the�passive�safety�system�in�the�F30.�The�central�sensor�system�is�incorporated�in�the�ICM.

F30�Passive�safety�system

1
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
2.�Models
2.1.�Overview
In�the�4th�generation,�the�passive�safety�system�is�installed�as�a�Crash�Safety�Module�in�the�F30.�The
following�table�provides�an�overview�of�the�versions�installed�for�different�models:

Series Model Used�as�of Version


E60 5-Series�Sedan 09/2005 ACSM�1
E61 5-Series�Touring 09/2005 ACSM�1
E85 Z4�Roadster 01/2006 ACSM�1
E86 Z4�Coupé 05/2006 ACSM�1
E87 1-Series�5-door 04/2004 MRS�5
E88 1-Series�Convertible 04/2008 ACSM�2
E90 3-Series�Sedan 03/2005 MRS�5
E70 X5�SAV 11/2006 ACSM�2
E71 X6�SAC 04/2008 ACSM�2
E93 3-Series�Convertible 03/2007 ACSM�2
F01 7-Series�Sedan 11/2008 ACSM�3
F02 7-Series�Sedan�long 11/2008 ACSM�3
version
F07 5-Series�Gran�Turis- 10/2009 ACSM�3
mo
F10 5-Series�Sedan 03/2010 ACSM�3
F25 X3�SAV 11/2010 ACSM�4
F12 6-Series�Convertible 03/2011 ACSM�4
F20 1-Series�5-door 09/2011 ACSM�4
F30 3-Series�Sedan 02/2012 ACSM�4

2
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
3.�System�Overview
3.1.�System�wiring�diagrams
The�following�bus�overview�shows�the�vehicle�circuit�structure�of�the�F30�and�incorporation�of�the
modules�on�the�PT-CAN.

3
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
3.�System�Overview
3.1.1.�Bus�overview

F30�Bus�overview

4
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
3.�System�Overview
Index Explanation
1 Control�units�with�wake-up�authorization
2 Start-up�node�control�units�for�starting�and�synchronizing�the�FlexRay�bus
system
ACSM Advanced�Crash�Safety�Module
AMPT Top-HiFi�amplifier
COMBOX Combox�(Combox�emergency�call,�Multimedia�Combox)
CON Controller
D-CAN Diagnosis-on-Controller�Area�Network
DME Digital�Engine�Electronics�(DME)
DSC Dynamic�Stability�Control
DVDC DVD�changer
EGS Electronic�transmission�control
EKPS Electronic�fuel�pump�control
EPS Electromechanical�Power�Steering
Ethernet Cable-based�data�network�technology�for�local�data�networks
FEM Front�Electronic�Module
FLA High-beam�assistant
FlexRay Fast,�preset�and�fault-tolerant�bus�system�for�use�in�automotive�sector
FZD Roof�function�center
GWS Gear�selector�lever
HEADUNIT/CIC Headunit�(Car�Information�Computer�or�Basic�headunit)
ICM Integrated�Chassis�Management
IHKA Integrated�automatic�heating�/�air�conditioning
K-CAN Body�controller�area�network
K-CAN2 Body�controller�area�network�2
KAFAS Camera-based�driver�assistance�systems
KOMBI Instrument�cluster�(MOST�only�with�option 6WA)
MOST Media�Oriented�System�Transport
OBD On-board�diagnosis�(diagnostic�socket)
PDC Park�Distance�Control�(with�option�5DP,�parking�manoeuvring�assistant:
integrated�in�the�parking�manoeuvring�assistant�control�unit,�otherwise
integrated�in�the�Rear�Electronic�Module�control�unit)
PMA Parking�manoeuvring�assistant
PT-CAN Powertrain�controller�area�network
PT-CAN2 Powertrain�controller�area�network�2
RAD Radio

5
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
3.�System�Overview
Index Explanation
REM Rear�Electronic�Module
REMA�LI Reversible�electromotive�automatic�reel,�left�(not�US)
REMA�RE Reversible�electromotive�automatic�reel,�right�(not�US)
SMFA Seat�module,�driver
SWW Lane�change�warning
TPMS Tire�Pressure�Monitoring�System
TRSVC Control�unit�for�all-round�vision�camera
VDM Vertical�Dynamics�Management
ZGM Central�gateway�module

6
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
3.�System�Overview
3.1.2.�System�wiring�diagram

F30�System�wiring�diagram

7
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
3.�System�Overview
Index Explanation
1 Front�sensor,�left�engine�support
2 Instrument�cluster
3 Crash�Safety�Module
4 Front�sensor,�right�engine�support
5 Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
6 Terminal�30
7 Airbag�sensor,�door,�right�(pressure)
8 Head�airbag,�front�passenger
9 Acceleration�sensor,�B-pillar�on�right
10 Indicator�lamp�for�front�passenger�airbag�deactivation�in�roof�function�center
11 Knee�airbag,�front�passenger
12 Front�passenger�airbag,�two-stage�with�ventilation
13 Seat�belt�buckle�contact,�front�passenger
14 Seat-position�sensor,�front�passenger
15 Seat�belt�buckle�tensioner,�front�passenger
16 Seat�occupancy�mat,�CIS�mat
17 Side�airbag,�front�passenger
18 Automatic�tensioner,�front�passenger
19 Adaptive�belt�force�limiter,�front�passenger�(not�US)
20 Safety�battery�terminal
21 COMBOX
22 Integrated�Chassis�Management
23 Side�airbag,�driver's�side
24 Seat�belt�buckle�tensioner,�driver
25 Seat-position�sensor,�driver�(not�US)
26 Seat�belt�buckle�contact,�driver
27 Adaptive�belt�force�limiter,�driver�(not�US)
28 Automatic�tensioner,�driver
29 Acceleration�sensor,�B-pillar�on�left
30 Head�airbag,�driver
31 Driver's�airbag,�two-stage�with�ventilation
32 Knee�airbag,�driver
33 Clock�spring
34 Airbag�sensor,�door,�left�(pressure)

8
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
4.�Functions
4.1.�Functions�of�Crash�Safety�Module
The�function�of�the�Crash�Safety�Module�is�to�permanently�evaluate�all�sensor�signals�in�order�to�iden-
tify�a�crash�situation.�As�a�result�of�the�sensor�signals�and�their�evaluation,�the�Crash�Safety�Module
identifies�the�direction�of�the�crash�and�the�severity�of�the�impact.

The�ACSM�evaluates�the�information�from�the�sensors�and�then�forwards�corresponding�measures�for
selective�activation�of�the�necessary�restraint�systems.

The�Crash�Safety�Module�monitors�the�system�itself�and�indicates�when�it�is�ready�for�operation�by
switching�off�the�airbag�indicator�light.

If�an�error�occurs�during�operation�this�is�stored�in�a�fault�memory.�and�can�be�read�out�for�diagnosis
purposes.

If�a�crash�situation�is�detected,�a�crash�message�is�sent�to�the�other�bus�users�in�the�data�bus�network
as�notification.�The�relevant�control�units�respond�to�this�signal�by�executing�their�own�activities�ac-
cording�to�the�severity�of�the�crash.

The�activities�include:

• Opening�the�central�locking�system
• Activating�the�hazard�warning�flasher
• Switching�on�the�interior�light
• Deactivating�the�electric�fuel�pump
• Making�an�emergency�call.

An�additional�function�of�the�Crash�Safety�Module�is�the�acoustic�seat�belt�warning�that�reminds�the
driver�and�front�passenger�using�visual�and�acoustic�signals�to�fasten�their�seat�belts.�Seat�belt�buck-
le�switches�are�used�to�identify�whether�the�driver�and/or�the�front�passenger�have�their�seat�belts�fas-
tened.�Information�on�occupancy�of�the�front�passenger�seat�is�also�included�for�the�acoustic�seat�belt
warning.�Furthermore�the�position�of�the�driver�and�the�front�passenger�seat�is�monitored.

The�functions�of�the�Crash�Safety�Module�generally�belong�to�one�of�the�following�areas:

• Crash-relevant�functions
• System-monitoring�functions
• Additional�convenience�functions.

4.2.�Crash-relevant�functions
The�Crash�Safety�Module�must�fulfil�the�following�crash-relevant�functions:

• Evaluating�the�sensor�signals
• Crash�detection
• Determining�actuators�to�be�activated
• Specifying�the�trigger�time�and�trigger�sequence

9
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
4.�Functions
• Activation�of�the�ignition�circuit�output�stages
• Sending�the�crash�message�to�all�bus�users
• Crash�documentation
• Emergency�call�function.

4.2.1.�Evaluating�the�sensor�signals
The�sensors�serve�to�identify�and�verify�head-on,�side-on�and�rear-end�crashes�and�also�as�roll-over
detection.

The�sensors�are�directly�connected�to�the�Crash�Safety�Module�where�their�signals�are�evaluated�and
processed.

4.2.2.�Crash�detection
All�F30�vehicles�are�equipped�with�the�following�sensors:

• One�lateral�and�one�longitudinal�acceleration�sensor�in�the�B-pillars�(green)
• One�airbag�sensor�to�monitor�the�pressure�in�each�of�the�front�doors�(blue)
• One�lateral�and�one�longitudinal�acceleration�sensor�in�the�ICM�(yellow)
• One�roll�rate�sensor�in�the�ICM�(yellow)
• One�vertical�acceleration�sensor�in�the�ICM�(yellow)
• One�front�sensor�on�each�of�the�engine�supports�(red).

The�airbag�sensors�in�the�car�doors�assist�with�the�identification�of�a�side-on�crash.

The�front�sensors�on�the�engine�supports�assist�with�the�identification�of�a�head-on�crash�and�the�cor-
responding�severity.

F30�Sensors

10
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
4.�Functions
4.2.3.�Trigger�time�and�trigger�sequence
The�Crash�Safety�Module�uses�the�values�transmitted�by�the�sensors�to�determine�the�direction�and
severity�of�the�crash.

In�the�case�of�a�head-on�crash,�corresponding�high�acceleration�values�from�the�longitudinal�accelera-
tion�sensors�in�the�B-pillar�and�ICM�respectively�must�be�detected�for�example.�An�algorithm�uses�the
accelerations�to�calculate�the�severity�and�direction�of�the�crash.�This�information�is�used�to�assist�cal-
culation�of�the�trigger�times�and�sequence�in�which�the�restraint�systems�are�activated.

A�possible�imminent�rollover�is�also�detected�and�the�appropriate�protection�systems�are�energized.

4.2.4.�Activation�of�the�ignition�circuit�output�stages
The�Crash�Safety�Module�is�supplied�by�the�FEM�with�terminal�30B.�The�Crash�Safety�Module�is�in�of-
fline�mode�with�terminal�30B.�This�means�that�it�is�active�on�the�data�bus�and�can�perform�all�diagnos-
tic�functions.�Triggering�of�the�ignition�circuits�is�blocked�and�is�only�enabled�as�of�terminal�15�once
the�system�self-test�is�complete.�The�Crash�Safety�Module�is�also�ready�for�ignition,�even�with�the�logi-
cal�terminal�R�after�engine�off.

The�ignition�capacitors�are�recharged�via�a�switching�controller.�These�ignition�capacitors�make�the�fir-
ing�energy�available�in�the�event�of�a�crash.�If�the�voltage�supply�is�interrupted�during�a�crash,�the�igni-
tion�capacitors�serve�briefly�as�an�energy�reserve.

The�ignition�circuit�output�stages�consist�of�a�high-side�and�a�low-side�power�switch.�The�high-side
power�switch�connects�the�ignition�voltage,�while�the�low-side�power�switch�connects�to�the�ground.
The�ignition�circuit�output�stages�are�controlled�by�a�microcontroller.

The�high-side�and�low-side�power�switches�also�serve�to�check�the�ignition�circuits�during�the�system
self-test.

4.2.5.�Sending�the�crash�message
In�the�event�of�a�collision�involving�activation�of�the�restraint�systems,�the�Crash�Safety�Module�sends
a�crash�message�to�the�bus�users�in�the�bus-system�network.�In�tandem�with�this,�the�Combox�is
prompted�to�send�an�emergency�call�via�a�direct�single-wire�connection.

As�a�result,�the�respective�control�units�perform�the�following�functions�depending�on�the�crash�severi-
ty:

Function Control�unit
Switch�off�electric�fuel�pump Digital�Motor�Electronics�DME
via�electronic�fuel�pump�control�EKPS
Release�central�locking�system Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)�All�Doors
Rear�Electronic�Module�(REM)�Tailgate/Trunk
Switch�on�hazard�warning�flashers Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
Rear�Electronic�Module�(REM)
Switch�on�interior�light Front�Electronic�Module�(FEM)
Rear�Electronic�Module�(REM)
Send�emergency�call Combox

11
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
4.�Functions
4.2.6.�Crash�documentation
In�the�event�of�a�collision�where�one�or�more�actuators�are�activated,�a�crash�entry�is�stored�in�a�non-
erasable�memory.�After�three�crash�entries,�a�non-erasable�fault�entry�is�stored�in�the�fault�memory�to-
gether�with�the�information�that�the�three�crash�messages�have�been�saved.�The�airbag�indicator�light
also�lights�up�continuously.

The�three�crash�entries�could�also�be�stored�during�the�course�of�an�accident.�Each�crash�entry�is�as-
signed�a�system�time.�The�control�unit�remains�capable�of�firing�even�after�three�crash�entries.�The
crash�entries�cannot�be�erased�and�serve�the�purpose�of�subsequent�device�diagnosis.�A�maximum�of
three�crash�entries�can�be�stored.�The�control�unit�must�then�be�replaced.

4.2.7.�Emergency�call�function
The�emergency�call�functions�with�the�BMW�Assist.�This�means�an�appropriate�service�provider�with
a�call�center�must�be�available.�A�telephone�network�must�also�be�available�in�order�to�be�able�to�make
an�emergency�call.

The�BMW�Assist�optional�equipment�(option�6NL)�must�be�installed�for�the�emergency-call�function�to
be�available.

Manual�emergency�call

Drivers�who�are�not�directly�involved�in�the�accident�can�use�the�manual�emergency�call�to�request�as-
sistance.

The�emergency�call�button�is�located�in�the�roof�function�center�and�is�connected�to�the�Combox�di-
rectly.

Voice�contact�with�the�relevant�service�provider�for�the�country�is�established�by�pressing�the�emer-
gency�call�button.�The�voice�contact�is�indicated�by�a�flashing�LED�in�the�switch.

Automatic�emergency�call

The�Crash�Safety�Module�sends�a�message�to�the�Combox�in�the�event�of�an�accident�with�corre-
sponding�crash�severity.�The�Combox�sends�an�emergency�call,�and�also�the�location�of�the�vehicle�if
available.

Attempts�are�made�at�the�same�time�to�establish�a�voice�contact�with�the�occupants�of�the�vehicle�in
order�to�obtain�more�detailed�verbal�information�about�the�accident�(e.g.�condition�of�occupants).�Fur-
ther�rescue�operations�can�be�initiated�accordingly.

Advanced�Automatic�Crash�Notification

In�addition,�the�Advanced�Automatic�Crash�Notification�function�features�in�vehicles�with�BMW�Assist.

The�data�from�different�sensors�is�transferred�to�the�call�center�in�the�case�of�an�emergency�call,�for
example�the�status�of�the�belt�contacts�to�determine�the�number�of�persons�in�the�vehicle�or�sensor
data�on�the�severity�of�the�crash�to�obtain�the�probability�of�risk�of�injury.

12
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
4.�Functions
The�emergency�call�contains�additional�specific�information�on�the�circumstances�of�the�accident.
This�means�that�more�precise�information�regarding�the�accident�and�risk�of�injury�is�therefore�avail-
able�at�the�call�center�and�can�be�forwarded�to�the�emergency�coordination�center.�The�emergency�co-
ordination�center�can�then�initiate�appropriate�measures.

4.3.�System-monitoring�functions
The�Crash�Safety�Module�has�the�following�system-monitoring�functions:

• System�self-test�(pre-drive�check)
• Display�of�system�operability
• Cyclic�monitoring
• Fault�display�and�fault�storage
• Output�of�faults�(diagnosis)
• Acoustic�and�visual�seat�belt�warning
• Deactivation�of�the�front�passenger�airbag�and�side�airbag�and�knee�airbag�on�the�front�pas-
senger�side.

4.3.1.�System�self�test
The�Crash�Safety�Module�performs�a�system�self�test�from�terminal�15.�The�airbag�indicator�light�is�en-
ergized�for�roughly�five�seconds�during�the�system�self�test.

Once�the�system�self�test�is�complete�and�no�faults�have�been�identified,�the�airbag�indicator�light
goes�out�and�the�system�is�ready�to�operate.

4.3.2.�Display�of�system�operability
The�airbag�indicator�light�in�the�instrument�panel�goes�out�to�indicate�that�the�Crash�Safety�Module�is
ready�for�operation.

4.3.3.�Cyclic�monitoring
Once�the�system�self-test�has�been�successfully�concluded�and�the�system�is�ready�for�operation,
a�cyclic�monitoring�procedure�is�performed�for�fault-monitoring�purposes.�This�cyclical�monitoring
serves�the�internal�diagnosis�of�the�control�unit�and�overall�airbag�system.�Cyclical�monitoring�takes
place�continuously�from�terminal�15.�This�also�continues�when�logical�terminal�R�is�reached�after�the
engine�is�switched�off.

4.3.4.�Fault�display�and�fault�storage
The�Crash�Safety�Module�has�a�non-volatile�fault�memory.�The�airbag�indicator�light�lights�up�to�indi-
cate�a�fault�entry.

Events,�such�as�the�activation�of�an�airbag�or�seat�belt�buckle�tensioner,�are�also�stored�in�the�fault
memory.

13
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
4.�Functions

If�the�fault�memory�contains�the�entry�that�the�restraint�system�has�been�activated,�this�only�means�the
ignited�restraint�system�is�not�available�for�further�activation�and�not�that�it�malfunctioned�during�the
crash.

4.3.5.�Output�of�faults�(diagnosis)
The�fault�memory�can�be�read�out�via�the�diagnostic�interface�with�the�assistance�of�the�Integrated
Service�Technical�Application�ISTA�in�the�BMW�diagnosis�system.�After�rectifying�the�faults�or�after�re-
newing�activated�components,�the�fault�memory�can�be�cleared�with�the�diagnosis�command�"Clear
fault�memory".

4.3.6.�Acoustic�and�visual�seat�belt�warning
An�acoustic�and�visual�seat�belt�warning�is�a�standard�feature�of�all�vehicles�equipped�with�the�Crash
Safety�Module.�The�Crash�Safety�Module�records�whether�or�not�the�driver�or�front�passenger�have
fastened�their�seat�belts.�If�they�have�not,�an�acoustic�and�visual�warning�is�output�to�remind�them�to
fasten�their�seatbelts.�Both�seat�belt�buckle�switches�are�monitored�separately.

4.3.7.�CIS�Mat

Provision�is�made�in�the�F30�for�the�airbag�to�be�deactivated�automatically�in�order�to�satisfy�the�regu-
lations�of�the�National�Highway�Traffic�Safety�Administration�NHTSA.�When�the�child�seats�listed�in�the
regulation�are�occupied�by�a�child�this�must�lead�to�deactivation�of�the�airbag.

To�do�so,�a�seat�occupancy�mat�is�used�on�the�front�passenger�seat�for�the�purpose�of�occupancy�de-
tection�and�classification�of�occupants�in�the�front�passenger�seat.�A�further�development�of�the�Occu-
pant�Classification�3�mat�(OC3�mat),�the�Capacitive�Interior�Sensing�Mat�(CIS�mat)�is�used�in�the�F30.

The�CIS�mat�is�made�up�of�two�elements:�A�sensor�wire,�which�runs�parallel�to�the�seat�heating�in�the
seat�cushion�and�an�evaluation�unit.�The�CIS�mat�measures�the�capacity�and�ohmic�resistance�be-
tween�the�sensor�wire�(anode)�and�the�vehicle�ground�(cathode)�at�a�frequency�of�120�kHz.�The�CIS
mat�determines�from�the�change�in�capacity�and�resistance�whether�the�front�passenger�seat�is�occu-
pied�by�an�adult�or�a�child�in�a�child�seat.

The�deactivation�of�the�front�passenger�airbag,�the�side�airbag�and�knee�airbag�on�the�front�passenger
side�is�signalled�by�the�indicator�lamp�for�front�passenger�airbag�deactivation.

The�indicator�lamp�for�front�passenger�airbag�deactivation�in�the�roof�function�center�lights�up�if�a�child
seat�with�child�for�e.g.�a�child�restraint�system�that�has�been�tested�in�accordance�with�the�NHTSA
regulations�and�is�holding�a�small�child�is�detected�on�the�front�passenger�seat�or�if�the�front�passen-
ger�seat�is�unoccupied.

The�display�brightness�is�controlled�by�automatic�regulation�of�the�display�illumination.

14
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
5.�System�Components
5.1.�Crash�Safety�Module
The�Crash�Safety�Module�is�accommodated�in�a�housing�with�two�sockets.

The�wiring�harness�is�connected�via�one�of�the�sockets.�An�additional�socket�is�provided�for�the�cock-
pit�wiring�harness.

F30�Crash�Safety�Module

The�Crash�Safety�Module�is�located�in�the�F30�on�the�supporting�structure�of�the�cockpit�module�on
the�driver's�side.

The�Crash�Safety�Module�no�longer�contains�any�sensors.�The�sensors�are�located�in�the�ICM�on�the
transmission�tunnel.

5.2.�Sensors�and�switches
The�following�sensors�and�switches�are�installed:

• Lateral�and�longitudinal�acceleration�sensors�in�ICM
• Roll�rate�sensor�in�the�ICM
• Vertical�acceleration�sensor�in�the�ICM
• Lateral�and�longitudinal�acceleration�sensors�on�the�B-pillars
• One�airbag�sensor�for�pressure�in�each�of�the�front�doors�(blue)
• One�front�sensor�on�each�of�the�engine�supports
• CIS�mat�with�occupant�classification

15
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
5.�System�Components
• Seat�belt�buckle�switch
• Seat-position�sensor,�front�passenger
• Emergency�call�button

5.2.1.�Lateral�and�longitudinal�acceleration�sensor,�B-pillar
The�lateral�and�longitudinal�acceleration�sensors�in�the�B-pillars�assist�with�the�identification�of�head-
on�crashes,�side-on�crashes�and�rear-end�crashes.

The�B-pillar�airbag�sensor�consists�of�a�longitudinal�acceleration�sensor�and�a�lateral�acceleration�sen-
sor.�The�acceleration�sensors�measure�both�the�acceleration�and�the�deceleration�in�the�X�and�Y�direc-
tions.�The�resultant�from�the�X�and�Y�signals�is�decisive�in�identifying�the�direction�of�the�crash.�The
airbag�sensors�in�the�B-pillar�assist�with�the�identification�of�head-on,�side-on�and�rear-end�crashes.
The�B-pillar�airbag�sensors�on�the�left�and�right�are�of�identical�design�and�are�allocated�by�way�of�me-
chanical�coding�during�installation.

F30�Lateral�and�longitudinal�acceleration�sensor,�B-pillar

5.2.2.�Door�airbag�sensor�(pressure)
Pressure�sensors�are�installed�in�the�driver�and�front�passenger�doors.�Side�crashes�are�identified�with
the�assistance�of�the�airbag�sensors.�In�addition�to�the�lateral�acceleration�values�that�are�present,�the
pressure�in�the�door�cavity�also�increases�in�the�event�of�a�side-on�crash.

The�airbag�sensors�in�the�doors�serve�to�verify�the�plausibility�of�the�acceleration�signals�from�the�B-
pillar�airbag�sensors�and�the�ICM�when�a�side�crash�is�detected.�The�airbag�sensors�are�situated�in
the�inner�panel�of�the�doors�and�measure�the�increase�in�pressure�in�the�event�of�a�side�collision.�In
the�event�of�a�side�collision�with�the�door,�the�outer�panel�is�pressed�inward,�thus�reducing�the�volume
and�increasing�the�pressure�in�the�door�interior.�This�pressure�change�is�measured�by�the�airbag�sen-
sors.�The�airbag�sensor�also�includes�electronics,�in�addition�to�the�pressure�sensor,�that�digitize�the

16
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
5.�System�Components
pressure�readings�and�transmit�them�cyclically�to�the�Crash�Safety�Module.�The�data�is�transferred�in
the�same�way�as�the�B-pillar�airbag�sensors.�The�pressure�readings�are�evaluated�in�the�Crash�Safety
Module.

F12/F13�door�airbag�sensor�(pressure)

5.2.3.�Front�sensor
Two�front�sensors�are�installed�in�the�front�area�of�the�engine�support.�The�measured�values�are�for-
warded�to�the�Crash�Safety�Module�where�they�are�evaluated.

The�sensors�in�the�front�area�of�the�side�member�on�the�left�and�right�assist�with�identification�of�a
head-on�crash.

They�deliver�additional�information�to�the�crash�safety�module�on�the�characteristics�and�severity�of
the�collision.�Each�sensor�contains�an�acceleration�sensor�for�recording�the�deceleration,�signal�pro-
cessing�technology�and�an�ASIC�for�data�transfer.�The�measured�values�are�sent�in�the�form�of�a�data
telegram�to�the�crash�safety�module�and�are�used�in�the�calculation�of�the�algorithm.

F30�Up-front�sensor�engine�support

17
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
5.�System�Components
5.2.4.�Sensors�in�the�ICM
The�ICM�control�unit�is�located�centrally�on�the�transmission�tunnel.�In�addition�to�the�driving�dynamics
control�sensors,�the�ICM�in�the�F30�also�incorporates�longitudinal�and�lateral�acceleration�sensors�for
crash�detection.

In�order�for�the�ICM�to�be�able�to�transmit�the�sensor�data�directly�to�the�ACSM�4,�it�is�connected�to
the�latter�via�two�lines.�The�transmitted�data�is�evaluated�in�the�ACSM�4.

The�sensor�data�of�the�roll�rate�sensor�and�the�vertical�acceleration�sensor�is�transmitted�to�the�ACSM
via�the�two�additional�lines.

The�sensor�data�of�the�ICM�helps�the�ACSM�4�identify�side-on,�rear-end�or�head-on�crashes�and�as-
sists�with�roll-over�detection.

F30�ICM

Index Explanation
1 ICM�control�unit

5.2.5.�CIS�mat
The�capacitive�interior�sensing�mat�(CIS�mat)�is�fitted�in�the�front�passenger�seat�instead�of�the�seat
occupancy�mat.�The�CIS�mat�can�detect�whether�the�front�passenger�seat�is�occupied�by�an�adult�or�a
child�in�a�child�seat.�The�deactivation�of�the�front�passenger�airbag�and�side�airbag�and�knee�airbag�on
the�front�passenger�side�is�signalled�by�the�indicator�lamp�for�front�passenger�airbag�deactivation.

18
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
5.�System�Components
5.2.6.�Seat�belt�buckle�switch
The�seat�belt�buckle�switch�detects�whether�the�seat�belt�buckle�tongue�is�in�the�seat�belt�buckle.�The
Crash�Safety�Module�supplies�power�to�the�sensors�and�performs�the�evaluation.

From�terminal�15,�the�seat�belt�buckle�switch�is�permanently�monitored�and�used�for�the�visual�and
acoustic�seat�belt�warning�and�also�to�determine�which�restraint�systems�are�triggered.

F30�Seat�belt�buckle�switch

5.2.7.�Emergency�call�button
The�emergency�call�button�is�located�in�the�roof�function�center.

F30�Roof�function�center�with�emergency�call�button

5.2.8.�Seat-position�sensors
In�accordance�with�the�US�legal�requirement�(FMVSS208),�a�height�identification�for�the�person�in�the
driver�and�front�passenger�seat�must�be�effected.�This�height�identification�is�effected�via�the�adjust-
ment�travel�of�the�forward/back�seat�adjustment.�In�US-version�vehicles,�the�exact�position�is�identified

19
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
5.�System�Components
using�the�seat-position�sensors�for�the�driver�and�front�passenger�seats.�For�vehicles�with�an�electric
seat�adjustment�with�memory�(option�459),�the�seat�position�on�the�driver's�side�is�transferred�from�the
seat�module�on�the�driver's�side�to�the�ACSM.

The�job�of�the�seat-position�detector�is�to�distinguish�between�a�relatively�small�person�and�a�person
of�normal�height�within�the�lengthways�adjustment�range�of�the�seat.�This�detection�is�another�techni-
cal�feature�aimed�at�increasing�the�safety�of�the�occupants.�The�deployment�of�the�two�airbag�stages
and�the�adaptive�vent�valve�is�then�adjusted�to�the�driver's/front�passenger�seat�position.

The�seat-position�detector�takes�the�form�of�a�2-wire�Hall-effect�sensor�and�is�supplied�with�power�via
the�ACSM�control�unit.�The�current�level�of�the�seat-position�sensor�changes�depending�on�the�seat
position�or�the�distance�of�the�seat-position�sensor�to�the�permanent�magnet.

5.3.�Actuators

5.3.1.�Overview
The�following�actuators�are�installed�in�the�F30:

• Two-stage�driver's�airbag�with�active�vent�valve
• Two-stage�driver's�airbag�with�active�vent�valve
• Knee�airbag�on�front�left�and�right
• Head�airbag�on�left�and�right
• Side�airbag�on�front�left�and�right
• Seat�belt�buckle�tensioner�on�front�left�and�right
• Automatic�tensioner�with�linear�force�limiter
• Automatic�tensioner�with�adaptive�force�limiter
• Safety�battery�terminal.

In�addition,�the�following�indicator�lights�inform�the�vehicle�occupants�about�the�condition�of�the�safety
systems:

• Airbag�indicator�light
• Seat�belt�warning�light
• Indicator�lamp�for�front�passenger�airbag�deactivation.

20
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
5.�System�Components
The�following�graphic�shows�the�airbags�in�the�activated�state.�Depending�on�the�type�of�crash,�only
specific�airbags�are�activated.

F30�Airbags

The�familiar�three-point�seat�belts�are�used�as�the�seat�belt�systems�in�the�F30.

F30�Seat�belt

21
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
5.�System�Components
Index Explanation
1 Seat�belt�buckle�tensioner
2 Reversible�motor-driven�reel�ReMA�(not�US)
3 Automatic�reel/Automatic�tensioner

The�following�table�provides�an�overview�of�the�actuators�of�the�seat�belt�systems:

Seat�belt Automat- Force Reversible


tensioner ic�reel limiter motor-driv-
en�reel
F30�Vehicles Yes Yes Linear No

5.3.2.�Driver's�airbag
The�purpose�of�the�driver's�airbag�is�to�reduce�the�risk�of�injury�to�the�driver�in�combination�with�the
seat�belt�when�a�head-on�crash�occurs.�The�driver's�airbag�is�located�in�the�steering�wheel�impact
plate.�The�driver's�airbag�is�equipped�with�a�gas�generator.

A�two-stage�generator�is�installed�which�can�be�used�to�activate�the�stages�at�short�or�long�time�differ-
ences,�depending�on�the�severity�of�the�crash�detected�and�taking�into�consideration�the�seat�position.

Furthermore,�the�driver's�airbag�features�an�active�vent�valve.

5.3.3.�Front�passenger�airbag
The�purpose�of�the�front�passenger�airbag�is�to�reduce�the�risk�of�accident�to�the�front�passenger�in
the�event�of�a�head-on�crash.�The�front�passenger�airbag�is�located�in�the�dashboard.�When�the�front
passenger�airbag�expands,�the�dashboard�tears�open�at�defined�points.�The�front�passenger�airbag
opens�towards�the�windscreen,�emerges�in�the�upwards�direction�and�is�supported�on�the�windscreen
and�dashboard.�The�front�passenger�airbag�is�equipped�with�a�gas�generator.

A�two-stage�generator�is�installed�which�can�be�used�to�activate�the�stages�at�short�or�long�time�differ-
ences,�depending�on�the�severity�of�the�crash�detected�and�taking�into�consideration�the�seat�position.

22
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
5.�System�Components

F30�Front�passenger�airbag

Index Explanation
1 Ignition�squib
2 Ignition�squib
3 Vent�valve
4 Vent�valve�connection

Furthermore,�the�front�passenger�airbag�features�an�active�vent�valve.

5.3.4.�Knee�airbag
The�driver's�side�knee�airbag�and�front�passenger�side�control�the�forwards�displacement�of�the
occupant(s)�in�the�event�of�a�head-on�crash.

F30�Knee�airbags

Index Explanation
1 Knee�airbag,�driver's�side
2 Knee�airbag,�front�passenger�side

5.3.5.�Head�airbag
Head�airbags�are�installed�in�the�F30�to�protect�the�occupants'�heads�in�the�event�of�a�side�collision.

23
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
5.�System�Components
The�head�airbag�extends�from�the�A-pillar�to�the�C-pillar�and�covers�the�entire�area�of�the�side�win-
dows.�It�expands�between�the�occupants�and�side�structure.

System�features:

• Extended�covered�area�across�all�front�and�rear�side�windows
• Protection�of�occupants�from�glass�splinters
• Covered�area�for�different-sized�occupants�optimized.

F30�Head�airbag

5.3.6.�Side�airbag,�front
As�with�all�current�models,�the�side�airbag�at�the�front�ignites�out�of�the�front�seat�backrest.

The�side�airbags�and�gas�generators�are�accommodated�in�a�plastic�housing,�the�airbag�module.�This
is�installed�in�the�front�seat�backrest�and�is�concealed�by�the�seat�cover.

If�activated,�the�side�airbag�emerges�outwards�from�the�backrest�frame�and�spreads�between�the�side
structure�and�occupant.

It�is�important�to�ensure�that�no�additional�seat�covers�are�fitted�as�they�would�greatly�impair�the�func-
tion�of�the�side�airbag,�or�even�immobilize�it�altogether.

24
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
5.�System�Components

F30�Seat�with�side�airbag

Index Explanation
1 Side�airbag

5.3.7.�Seat�belt�buckle�tensioner
The�task�of�the�pyrotechnic�seat�belt�buckle�tensioner�is�to�minimize�the�belt�slack�in�the�pelvis�and
shoulder�regions�in�the�event�of�a�crash,�thereby�improving�the�restraining�effect.

The�seat�belt�buckle�tensioners�are�located�at�the�driver's�seat�or�the�front�passenger�seat.�The�seat
belt�buckle�tensioners�are�ignited�in�specific�crash�situations.

The�seat�belt�buckle�is�connected�by�means�of�a�steel�cable�to�the�piston�in�the�tensioning�tube.�If�the
ignition�squib�is�triggered,�gas�pressure�is�created,�which�moves�the�piston�in�the�tensioning�tube.�This
causes�the�cable�to�pull�the�seat�belt�buckle�down�and�the�seat�belt�is�tensioned.

25
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
5.�System�Components

F30�Seat�belt�buckle�tensioner

Index Explanation
1 Seat�belt�buckle�switch
2 Tensioning�tube�with�piston

5.3.8.�Automatic�tensioner�with�linear�mechanical�force�limiter
An�automatic�tensioner�with�linear�mechanical�force�limiter�for�the�driver�and�front�passenger�is�used
in�the�F30.�In�addition�to�force�limitation�effected�by�a�torsion�bar�spring,�the�seat�belt�strap�is�retract-
ed�with�the�assistance�of�a�gas�generator�in�order�to�reduce�belt�slack�prior�to�forwards�displacement
of�the�occupant.

By�harmonizing�the�individual�passive�safety�components,�seat�belt�tensioner,�automatic�tensioner,
force�limiter�and�airbag,�the�kinetic�energy�acting�on�the�occupants�is�dissipated�more�evenly�for�the
duration�of�the�crash.�Thus�lower�occupant�stress�values�are�achieved.

5.3.9.�Safety�battery�terminal
The�safety�battery�terminal�is�triggered�at�different�thresholds�when�the�Crash�Safety�Module�detects
a�head-on,�side-on�or�rear-end�crash�of�sufficient�severity.�The�line�that�connects�the�battery�to�the
starter�motor/alternator�and�positive�battery�connection�point�is�then�severed�by�means�of�pyrotech-
nics.�The�safety�battery�terminal�is�located�directly�at�the�positive�terminal�of�the�battery.�The�safety
battery�terminal�is�encased�completely�in�plastic�so�that�in�the�event�of�separation�no�sparks�get�out-
side�the�case.

Even�though�the�safety�battery�terminal�has�been�disconnected,�a�voltage�supply�to�all�safety-relevant
consumers�such�as�hazard�warning�flashers,�interior�light,�airbag�and�telephone�(including�emergency
call)�is�ensured.

26
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
5.�System�Components

F30�Safety�battery�terminal

5.3.10.�Airbag�indicator�light
The�airbag�indicator�light�is�located�on�the�instrument�panel.�The�airbag�indicator�light�lights�up�then
goes�out�during�the�pre-drive�check�to�signal�readiness�of�the�Crash�Safety�Module�and�passive�safe-
ty�systems.�The�airbag�indicator�light�is�controlled�via�a�message�on�the�PT-CAN�from�the�Crash�Safe-
ty�Module�to�the�instrument�panel.�The�instrument�panel�receives�a�message�cyclically.�If�the�message
remains�off,�the�airbag�indicator�light�is�activated.

F30�Airbag�indicator�light

27
F30�Passive�Safety�Systems
5.�System�Components
5.3.11.�Seat�belt�warning�light
A�visual�and�audible�warning�is�issued�if�the�seat�belt�is�not�fastened�or�is�unbuckled�during�the�jour-
ney.

F30�Seat�belt�warning�light

The�status�of�the�seat�belt�contacts�of�the�rear�seat�bench�is�visible�for�a�short�period�in�the�instrument
cluster�TFT�display�during�starting�or�if�a�contact�is�changed.

5.3.12.�Indicator�lamp�for�front�passenger�airbag�deactivation
The�indicator�lamp�for�front�passenger�airbag�deactivation�in�the�F30�is�in�the�roof�function�center.�The
indicator�lamp�for�front�passenger�airbag�deactivation�is�activated�if�the�CIS�mat�detects�a�small�child�in
a�child�seat�or�if�the�front�passenger�seat�is�unoccupied.

The�brightness�of�the�indicator�lamp�for�front�passenger�airbag�deactivation�is�controlled�via�the�auto-
matic�brightness�control�of�the�display�illumination.

F30�Roof�function�center�with�indicator�lamp�for�front�passenger�airbag�deactivation

28
Bayerische�Motorenwerke�Aktiengesellschaft
Händlerqualifizierung�und�Training
Röntgenstraße�7
85716�Unterschleißheim,�Germany

You might also like